Sunteți pe pagina 1din 1168

Automation College

Experion PKS:
Fundamentals - Control Execution
Environment Controller & ACE
Implementation
EXP-2001 R400 Student Guide
Rev 05.0
04/2012
Book 1 of 1

Notices
While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell assumes
no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this courseware. The courseware is presented
on an as-is basis. Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose, and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written
agreement with and for its customer.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages even
if Honeywell is informed of the possibility of these damages. The information and specifications in
this courseware are subject to change without notice.
No part of this courseware may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means. It is
intended for the use of the original purchaser only. Copying, duplicating, selling or otherwise
distributing the courseware is a violation of law. The materials and workbooks comprising the
courseware may not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced
to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent in writing from
Honeywell.
This courseware is the confidential and proprietary information of Honeywell. The courseware may
only be used by the person who attended the Honeywell class. The courseware may only be used
in conjunction with a Honeywell system at the company that paid for the class. Only Honeywell
may use the courseware for training purposes.
This class has special equipment configurations that are appropriate only for training and should
not be used for any other purpose.
Experion, Da Vinci, IntelliMap, MXOpen, MXProLine, TotalPlant, PlantScape, TDC 3000,
Uniformance, and Universal Control Network are registered trademarks of Honeywell International.
These commodities, technology or software were exported from the United States in accordance
with the Export Administration Regulations. Division contrary to U.S. law prohibited.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell Inc.

Honeywell International, Inc.


Automation College
Global Learning Services

Program Objectives
EXP2001R400 - EPKS CEE R400
Tab
1

Lesson
Orientation and Course Introduction

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Control Builder Introduction

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Controller Hardware Configuration

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

10

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

11

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Objectives
Course Introduction
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and
Redundancy
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and
Options
Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C
System
Verify Series C Hardware Connections
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
Use Compare Parameters Options
Use Control Builder Search
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
Open and Operate Control Builder
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E
Hardware and I/O
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control
Builder
Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in
SIM-C200E
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the
SCE
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in
SIM-C300
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300
Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection
Rules
Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the
Series C System
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
Describe Performance Calculations

Page: 1 of 3

04/04/12

Program Objectives
12

EXCEL Simulation

13

Data Acquisition Control Module

14

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

15

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

16

Checkpoints

17

PID Control Module

18

PID with Split Range Control Module

19

Cascade PID Control Module

20

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries

21

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

22

Device Control Module

23

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

24

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel
Configure Series C IO Channel
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
Describe the Block Name References in CM and
SCM
Export/Import a Control Module
Describe ERDB Administration
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
Perform Checkpoint Save
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization
Fundamentals
Configure a PID Control Module
Calculate Performance Statistics of the
Configuration Performed (C200 & C300)
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range
Outputs
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two
Secondaries
Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Options
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal
Indications
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
Describe MATH Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block
Use Counter Function Block

Page: 2 of 3

04/04/12

Program Objectives
25

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

27

Sequential Control Module - Lab

28

Interactive Instructions

29

SCM Abnormal Handlers

30

Final Project

31

PMIO

32

Appendix

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Describe Search Functionality


Perform Parameter Search
Perform Where Used Search
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
Configure a Sequential Control Module
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
Explain the Operation of SCMs
Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence
Use a Step to Start Another SCM
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
Describe Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Configure an SCM Abort Handler
Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler
Configure an SCM Check Handler
Complete the Final Project - 20
Identify PMIO Hardware
Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to
the PMIO
Describe the I/O Card File
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks
in CMs
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
Describe Device Control Blocks
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E
Operations
Control Module Reference
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs

Page: 3 of 3

04/04/12

Course Introduction

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Introduction to the course

Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

Honeywell

Purpose of This Course

Experion PKS Control Execution


Environment C200, C200E, C300
and ACE course will provide you
with the ability to:
Plan the C200, C200E and C300
controller

Human Interface
Console Operations

Fault Tolerant Ethernet


LAN

Process
Server

ACE

C300
ESV-LCN
Connected

Configure C200, C200E and C300


hardware, control modules and
sequential control modules

Safety
Manager

ControlNet

NIM

C200/ C200E

Build control strategies on the C200,


C200E, C300 and ACE

TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000


PM I/O

HART

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

Honeywell

Who Should Attend

Experion System implementers who are responsible for designing and


configuring the system:
System engineers or application engineers who configure, add to or change
the C200, C200E, C300 or ACE controller configuration
Maintenance engineers or technicians who add new control loops or
troubleshoot existing loops
Others, whose job functions include performing these tasks

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

1
Honeywell

What You Will Learn


In this course, you will learn how to:

the role of the major Experion PKS hardware and software


Recognize
components and learn how data flows through the C200,C200E and C300
controller

Configure control modules that incorporate data acquisition, regulatory

control and logic

Configure sequential control modules (SCMs) used to control process

sequences such as startup, shutdown and batch operations


Create parallel steps in an SCM for parallel branching
Configure interactive instruction that allows a seamless combination of
operator-guided manual intervention and automatic control in SCMs
Configure additional I/O functionality for the PMIO

Troubleshoot typical errors in configuration


Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

Honeywell

Course Organization

The Experion PKS Control


Execution Environment C200,
C200E, C300 and ACE course is
divided into two sections:
1.

2.

The basic concepts and strategies


needed, to develop guidelines for
effective and consistent system
planning
Self-paced computer-based
lessons or instructor-delivered
workshops

Human Interface
Console Operations

Fault Tolerant Ethernet


LAN

Process
Server

C300
ESV-LCN
Connected
Safety
Manager

ControlNet

NIM

C200/C200E

A hands-on workshop in which you


will build and configure the Experion
PKS C200, C200E and C300
controller
Hands-on lab exercises with
step-by-step instructions
Assessments to reinforce
concepts learned

Orientation and Course Introduction

ACE

TPS, TDC2000,
TDC3000
PM I/O

HART

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Introduction to the course
Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

Honeywell

Lesson Window

Navigation bar
Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

1
Lesson window - Tabs

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

Honeywell

Pausing and Playing the Lesson

Click Play to resume

Click Pause to stop the lesson


Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

Moving Backward and Forward in the lesson

Honeywell

Click slide title

Previous screen
Next screen

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

EXP2001 CEE Introduction and Navigation


Overview

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the first lesson in your course material


Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Course Introduction
4/13/2012

Describe the C200/C200E Controller


Architecture

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

This lesson introduces you to the Experion PKS C200 and C200E
controller architecture.
At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will be able to:
Identify the high-level
components and connections

Experion
Server

ACE

FTE

Explain the basic purpose


of the components and
connections
Identify C200 and C200E

ControlNet

Process
C300
Controllers
I/O Options

Rail I/O
Series A

Rack
I/O
Series
A

PM
I/O

Fiber Optic
Isolation

HART
GI/IS Rail I/O
Series H

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Architecture Overview

Cluster 2

Cluster 3
FTE
Control Net
Peer to Peer (within cluster)

Cluster 1
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture


4/13/2012

Types of IO:
Series A Chassis IO (Local or Remote CNI)
Rail IO: Series A, Series H (CNI)
PMIO (IOLIM)
Foundation Fieldbus (FIM)
HART (Series A Chassis IO & PMIO)
Profibus (PBIM)
DeviceNet (DNB)

Honeywell

C200 / C200E Architecture


ACE

Experion Server

FTE

Process
Controllers
ControlNet

I/O Options
Rack I/O
Series A

Rail I/O
Series A
C300
PM I/O

Fiber Optic
Isolation

HART

GI/IS Rail I/O


Series H
C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Can be redundant:
Server
C200 & C200E
FIM
IOLIM & PMIO
CNI (redun ctlr chassis)

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture


4/13/2012

C200E is a newer controller in the Experion family with larger memory

The architecture of the C200E is similar to the C200 controller


It supports all C200 functions and features
It has 16 MB of User Memory
It supports some additional feature like
Experion Batch Manager
Whole Array Transfer
Custom Data Blocks (up to 200)
New Function Blocks
User Memory Specifications
Rolling Average (RollAvg)
Item / Controller
C200
C200E
Counter (CTUD)
User memory
4 MB
16MB
It does not support
Maximum number of
1023
4095
Custom Algorithm Block
tagged blocks
PCDI
Maximum No of

Component blocks per


CM

Firmware for C200 is frozen at R311

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Primary

100

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Interoperability, Redundancy, and Migration


C200

100

ON-Process Migration

C200
Secondary

C200E

C200E

C200

C200E

C200E
Primary

C200E
Secondary

C200
Primary

C200E

OFF-Process Migration

Secondary

C200

C200E
Primary

C200E

C200
Secondary

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture


4/13/2012

Honeywell

C200E

Honeywell

Question 1: Redundant Components


All of these can be redundant except:
A) C200/C200E processors
B) C200/C200E Fieldbus interface modules
Experion
Server

C) C200/C200E PM I/O link modules

FTE

D) C200/C200E Rack I/O


E) C200/C200E PM I/O

ACE

Process
Controllers
I/O Options

ControlNet

C300

Rail I/O
Series A

Rack
I/O
Series
A

PM
I/O

Fiber Optic
Isolation

HART
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
C200
C200
Rack
Rack
I/OI/O
cannot
cannot
be
YouYou
must
did answer
not
answer
the question
this question
before
redundant.
Incorrect
Correct
You be
-answered
-redundant.
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
continuing
completely
Click anywhere to continue.

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

GI/IS Rail I/O


Series H

Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

Clear

Key concepts to take away from this lesson are:

The ACE communicates to the Experion Server over FTE


The C200/C200E communicates to the Experion Server over Ethernet, FTE or

ControlNet

C200/C200Es, C300s, and ACE nodes on the same Experion Server can
communicate Peer-to-Peer

Three main types of I/O:


PMIO, Rail I/O, and Chassis I/O

The C200E Controller has more memory than the C200

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture


4/13/2012

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture


4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks


and Redundancy

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

4/13/2012

11

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson, you will learn how the C200/C200E controller is


networked to the server and to remote I/O racks in redundant and nonredundant configurations.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe the C200/C200E control processor, communication and
redundancy modules
CP or CPM Control Processor Module
CNI ControlNet Interface
FTEB Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge
RM Redundancy Module

Explain the C200/C200E network connections and addressing

Honeywell

C C CC
NC P C NCNC
I N MP I NI N
I M I I

R
MR
M

Honeywell

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell

C
N
I

AAADAADD
I O I OO I O I

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

4/13/2012

C200/C200E Hardware
C200/C200E Network Connections and Addressing

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

13

Honeywell

C200 Control Processor (CP)


100MHz Power PC 603E processor with 8 MB RAM
4 MB (of 8 MB RAM) available for user built control strategies

4 MB Flash ROM for storing program


Lithium battery (or optional rechargeable battery extension module)
Can support up to 8 I/O chassis and 64 IOMs
OK

Controller can be redundant or non-redundant

Double-wide module -- occupies 2 slots on CP rack

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics

Honeywell

C200E Control Processor (CP)


150MHz Power PC 603R processor with 32 MB RAM
16 MB (of 32 MB RAM) available for user built control strategies

8 MB Flash ROM for storing program


Lithium Battery (or Optional Rechargeable Battery Extension Module)
Can support up to 8 I/O Chassis and 64 IOMs
OK

Controller can be Redundant or Non-redundant

Double-wide Module -- occupies 2 slots on the CP Rack

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

15

Honeywell

ControlNet Interface (CNI)

Provides the interface to the supervisory network (supervisory CNI)


Facilitates Peer-to-Peer communication
Enables remote I/O communication (downlink CNI)
Each downlink CNI can support up to 24 remote IOMs
4 downlink CNIs can be connected to one controller

NET

Each CNI must have a unique MAC ID on the


same network

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

4/13/2012

The Device Index


(generally, the last
octet of the IP address)
is set here

FTEB

FTE

CNI

ControlNet

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Redundancy Module (RM)


Placed in controller chassis to support redundant controllers
RM must be in the same position in both racks
Both RMs are connected by an optical cable
Switchover between redundant controllers is bumpless
Note: If controller is redundant, then all IOMs must be remote

Redundancy Cable (Fiber Optic)

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB)

Honeywell

Question 1: C200/C200E Control Processor

Which of these statements about the control processor (CP) is false?


A) It can support up to 8 I/O chassis and 64 IOMs
B) It is a double-wide module that occupies 2 rack slots
OK

C) It can be redundant

D) It provides an interface to the supervisory network

Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
must
You
notanswer
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickthe
anywhere
anywhere
this
question
this
question
correctly!
to
tobefore
continue
continue
completely
continuing
Good
Incorrect.
job! The false statement is "It provides an
interface to the supervisory network." The interface
to the supervisory network is provided by either the
CNI
CNI card
card or
or the
the Fault
Fault Tolerant
Tolerant Ethernet
Ethernet Bridge
Bridge (FTEB).
(FTEB)
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Clear

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
C200/C200E Hardware

C200/C200E Network Connections and Addressing

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

4/13/2012

TC-CCR013-ControlNet Interface
(CNI), Redundant
Media

TC-PRS021-- C200
Control Processor

(Optional) TC-CCR013-CNI to connect to other


I/O racks

TC-FXX102 -- 10-slot rack

Controller
Chassis

TC-FPCXX2-120/240 VAC
Power Supply

Series A IO can be
in a non-redundant
controller chassis

LAN Connection
Ethernet, TCPIP,etc.

I/O modules and


terminal blocks
Taps -- 9904-TPS, R,
YS, and YR (4 kinds)
ControlNet Cable (TC- KCCxxx) -- Supervisory
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
N
e
t

Terminators-TC-TCXBNC

TC-PCIC01 -- ControlNet
Communication Interface
Module for PC (redundant
media) (in server)

TC-CCR013 -- CNI,
Redundant Media

Server
(stations not
shown)

Additional
Remote I/O
I/O modules and
terminal blocks

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

21

Honeywell

Redundant Controller
TC-PRS021 -- C200
Control Processor
TC-CCR013 -- CNI,
Redundant Media

TC-CCR013 -- CNI to
connect to I/O racks

TC-FXX072 7-slot rack


TC-PRR021 -Redundancy
Module

Redundant Chassis

Identical Configuration
Module for module

TC- FXX072
7 SLOT RACK

TC-FPCXX2 -120/240 VAC


Power Supply

-GN KRRxx1 Redundancy


Cable (Fiber Optic)

ControlNet Cable

-- I/O Comm

ControlNet Cable (TC -KCCxxx ) -- Supervisory


Terminators -TC-TCXBNC
NO IOMs PERMITTED IN CONTROLLER
NO IOMs
PERMITTED
IN CONTROLLER
CHASSIS
FOR REDUNDANT
CHASSIS
FOR REDUNDANT
CONFIGURATION!!
CONFIGURATION!!
(IOLIM and
FIM are exceptions)

to
Server

to IO

Chassis

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Non-redundant Controller

Honeywell

PCIC must be 23
(24 for redundancy)
Supervisory CNIs must be odd 1-19
IO CNets should leave no gap
Use even and odd numbers
All CNets must have a CNI = 1
(network update time)

03

01
02

04

CNI

CNI
CNI

CNI
C200/
C200E

01

CNI

Address Settings - Non-redundant C200/C200E

Server
03

05

CNI

CNI
C200/
C200E

PCIC

23
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

4/13/2012

23

23 & 24 for Servers

CNIs in C200 chassis must be the Honeywell


same odd number
Address Settings Redundant C200/C200E

CNI
CNI

CNI
C200/
C200E

PCIC

ServerB

01
05

CNI
C200/
C200E
CNI
CNI

01

03

CNI

05

ServerA

PCIC

04

CNI

01

Second one powered on uses virtual (+1) address


IO CNet Assign 3 to a CNI in a remote chassis
During a failover, it controls Network Update Time
IO chassis are not redundant, so use odd & even
No gaps

RM

01

RM

24

03

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

CNI

CNI
C200/
C200E

23

07

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

4/13/2012

01

01

03

05

CNI

01
05
RM

CNI
CNI

FTEB
C200/
C200E

ServerB

CNI

04

02

Switch

RM

CNI
CNI

FTEB

C200/
C200E

ServerA

03

Switch

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

CNI

FTEB
C200/
C200E

07

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

25

Honeywell

Question 2: MAC Addresses

While configuring a ControlNet-connected Control Processor (CP), which


MAC address is entered as the supervisory MAC address?
A) MAC address of the PCIC card

ServerB

B) Device index of the FTEB card

PCIC

C) MAC address of the CNI card connected


to the server

03

The
answer is:
Yourcorrect
answer:
Correct!
Incorrect.
The MAC
Theaddress
MAC
of the of
CNI
the
card
CNIconnected
card
You
must
answer
theaddress
question
before
Correct
anywhere
to
You
did
not
this
question
completely
You-answer
answered
this
correctly!
Incorrect
-Click
Click
anywhere
tocontinue
continue
to
connected
the server
to
should
the
server
be
entered
should
as
be
the
entered
supervisory
as the
continuing
supervisory
MAC address.
MAC address.

01

CNI

23
CNI
C200/
C200E

D) MAC address of the CNI card connected


to the I/O chassis

Supervisory CNet

I/O CNet

CNI

Click anywhere to continue.

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Submit

Clear

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

4/13/2012

Honeywell

FTEB

Honeywell

Summary

When you connect the C200/C200E controller to the server and to


remote I/O racks in non-redundant and redundant configurations,
remember:
The double-wide control processor (CP) supports up to 8 I/O chassis and 64
IOMs.
Interface (CNI) modules provide interfaces to the I/O ControlNet
ControlNet
and the Supervisory ControlNet.

Redundant controllers require all IOMs be configured remotely.


All devices on the same network must have unique MAC addresses.
Redundant CNI cards must be addressed with the same odd number.
Redundant FTEBs must be addressed differently with the primary having an
odd number and the secondary having the next highest even number.

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

27

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

4/13/2012

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson you will learn about the standard C200/C200E input/output
(I/O) modules and their applications.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
List the standard I/O types that are compatible with the Experion system
Identify the application for each type of I/O module

Rail I/O
Series A

GI/IS Rail I/O


Series H

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

PM I/O

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Chassis - Series A Input/Output Modules


Chassis I/O (also referred to as Series A I/O) has the following
attributes:

Compact Size may reside in either the controller rack or remote I/O rack
Diagnostic and non-diagnostic modules available (DI & DO modules)
IOM configurable through Control Builder
Removable wiring hood
Can be removed and replaced under power
All modules have a form factor of 5 X 5
Redundancy not supported

Module Types:

HART / Non-HART Analog Input


HART / Non-HART Analog Output
Digital Input (with and without Diagnostics)
Digital Output (with and without Diagnostics)
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input
Thermocouple Input

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series A Rail I/O


Modular connections slide rail
8 terminal bases can be
connected to a single gateway
Gateway
Terminal Base

Gateway provides link to the


ControlNet

DIN Rail

-1 2
+ +

Analog I/O, digital I/O,


thermocouple and RTD

Redundancy is not
supported.

IOM types:
AI- Analog Input
AO- Analog Output
DI- Digital Input
DO- Digital Output

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Galvanically isolated
Intrinsically safe

Server

Supervisory ControlNet

Redundancy is not
supported.

Controller
CNI
Module

I/O ControlNet
Repeater/
Adapter
E

COM

C o n rt o N
l e tR e p e a
t d
A
re a p e
t r

Repeater/
Adapter

Fiber Modules
E

T C -P B F O 0 1

MO D

C o n rt o N
l e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1

C o n rt o N
l e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1

P W R

COM

Ch a
n1

Cha
n2

Ch a
n1

Ch a
n 1 Ch a
n2

C o n rt o N
l e tR e p e a
t d
A
r a p te r
e
T C -P B F O 0 1

X m ti

Ex

R e cv

X m ti

R e cv

C o n rt o lN e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1

X m ti

R e cv

Ch a
n1

Ch a
n1

i e r Mo u
dl e
x C o n rt o lN eF tb
T C -P M F O 0 1

Ch a
n2

R e cv

Fiber
Optic
Cable

E x C o n rt o N
l e tF b
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1

Ch a
n2

Ch a
n1Cha
n2

+V-V+V-V

X m ti

PW R

+ V-V+ V-V

M OD

i e r Mo u
d l e
x C o n rt o lN e tF b
T C -P M F O 0 1

PW R

R e cv

T C -P B F O 0 1

+V-V+V-V

COM

Fiber Modules

C o n rt o lN e tR e p e a
t d
A
r a p te r
e

MO D

Cha
n2

R e cv

X m ti

R e cv

X m ti

R e cv

X m ti

R e cv

X m ti

COM

C o n rt o lN e tR e p e a
t d
A
r ape
e
t r
T C -P B F O 0 1

X m ti

R e cv

X m ti

R e cv

E x C o n rt o lN e tF b
i e r Mo u
dl e
T CP
- M F O0 1

MO D

X m ti

R e cv

Ch a
n 1 Ch a
n2

Ch a
n 1

NonHazardous
Area
Hazardous
Area

E x C o n rt o lN e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1

PW R

X m ti

Ch a
n2

+V-V+ V-V

R e cv

X m ti

R e cv

X m ti

R e cv

X m ti

R e cv

X m ti

Rail I/O Modules - Series H


Ex
T C -P G C N 1 1

I/O ControlNet

Gateway

-+

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

12
+

V+V- V+V-

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Process Manager I/O (PM I/O)


Requires a PM I/O Link Interface Module
(IOLIM) in the same rack as the
C200/C200E
Redundant IOLIMs are supported with
redundant C200/C200Es
PM I/O can be redundant
PM I/O includes AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C,
DI SOE
PM I/O requires a separate board to accept
field wiring. This board is called a Field
Termination Assembly (FTA).

PM I/O

PM I/O can be configured remotely up to


8km using an fiber optic IOLINK Extender
C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series H Rail I/O

Honeywell

Serial Interface Module

NET

OK

NET

Serial Interface Module

Honeywell

SIM FTA
Power Adapter
ADAPTER
SERIAL
INTERFACE
FTA
MODBUS
(16 Array
Channels)

SERIAL
INTERFACE
FTA
A/B
(16 Array
Channels)

Modbus
Compatible
Subsystem

Allen-Bradley
Compatible
Subsystem

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

35

Honeywell

Question 1: I/O Application


Which I/O module can be used in a hazardous environment?
A) Chassis I/O
B) Serial Interface

NET

OK

NET

C) Series H I/O
Honeywell

Rail I/O Modules - Series H


Ex
TC-PGCN11

Gateway

-+

1 2
+

V+V- V+V-

Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
Series
Series
HHI/O
I/O
modules
modules
are
are
specifically
specifically
You must
answer
the
question
before
Correct
- -Click
anywhere
totocontinue
You Incorrect
did
You
not
answer
answered
Click
this
anywhere
this
question
correctly!
completely
continue
designed
for
unsafe
environments.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Clear

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Which I/O module will support redundancy?


A) Chassis I/O

NET

OK

NET

B) PM I/O
Honeywell

C) Series H I/O
Rail I/O Modules - Series H
Ex
TC-PGCN11

Gateway

-+

1 2
+

V+V- V+V-

PM I/O

Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You
must- Click
answer
the question
before
Correct
to
continue
You
Incorrect
did
You
not
answered
-modules
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
continue
completely
Yes!
PM
I/O
modules
are
the
only
standard
No. PM I/Oanswer
are
the
only
standard
continuing
I/O modules that are available in a redundant
configuration.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Clear

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

The standard I/O types compatible with the Experion system are:
Series A I/O modules, which can be installed in the same chassis
asChassis
the C200/C200E (if the C200/C200E is not redundant) or a remote I/O
chassis.

A Rail I/O modules, which include analog I/O, digital I/O,


Series
thermocouples, and RTD.
H Rail I/O modules, which are intrinsically safe for use in hazardous
Series
environments.

PM I/O modules which include AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, and DI SOE.
Interface modules which interface to Allen-Bradley and Modbus
Serial
subsystems.
C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 2: I/O Redundancy

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules


4/13/2012

Describe the Main Features of the Series C


System

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics

Series C Deliverables
Key features of Series C hardware
Performance targets

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C Deliverables
Products and Functions delivered under
the Series C Umbrella include:

Series C I/O
Series C FIM
Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)
C300 Controller
Control Firewall

Related Deliverables include:


FTE Bridge firmware that supports C300
connections to selected Series A I/O
Allows FTE Bridge firmware to be
upgraded from a R300 or later system
The C300 Firmware should match the
release of the Experion Server
Power System

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Honeywell

Series C Deliverables

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Products delivered in Series C Release


C300 Controller
50 ms and 20 ms
Initial release C300 20 ms supported
for Turbo machinery Controls
Series C I/O
Analog Input HART, Non-HART
Analog Output HART, Non-HART
Digital Input & DI-SOE
Digital Output
Low Level Mux Input
Speed Protection Module (SPM)
Only with C300 20 ms
Servo Valve Position Module (SVPM)
Only with C300 20 ms
Fieldbus Interface Module (FIM4, FIM8)
Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)
Control Firewall
Power System

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

I/O options for C300

Series C I/O
AI, AO - HART & Non-HART
DI, DO, LLMUX, DISOE

Series C Fieldbus Interface

FIM4, FIM8

PMIO
AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, DI SOE

FTEB connected Series A I/O

FTEB connections to AB PLCs


Using a bridge chassis with a FTEB and
downlink CNI

Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Non-HART Series C IO Modules


Non-HART versions of both the AI and AO
These modules use the AI-HL and AO block
templates
IO Unit Consumption remains the same as
the HART AI and HART AO

IOM Model
Names

IOM Block Name

Description

Number of
Channels

Cx-PAIX01

AI-HL

High Level Analog Input

16

Cx-PAOX01

AO

Analog Output

16

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Series C Deliverables

Which of these statements about the Series C deliverables is false?


A) Series C deliverables include Series C I/O, C300,
Series C FIM and Control Firewall
B) Series C deliverables include a new Power System
C) New FTE Bridge firmware is required but cannot
be upgraded from a R310 system

Correct!
Incorrect.
The
false
The false
statement
is " New
is " New
FTE Bridge
FTE
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is: statement
firmware
Bridge firmware
is required
is required
but it cannot
but itbe
cannot
upgraded
be
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
upgraded
from
from
aanywhere
R300
a R300
system."
system."
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Clear

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Series C Deliverables

Key features of Series C hardware


Performance targets

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Packaging - Overview

Series C is the term used to describe the new


styling for the C300 controller and associated
modules
The Series C hardware was designed to be
space efficient
Designed Vertical
No electronic card files
Zero Footprint power system does not impact
module space
Designed to offer >30% reductions in space

Combines I/O Processor and Field Terminations


into one Assembly
Fewer components providing higher MTBF
and Availability

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Key Attributes
Environmental ratings

Temperature: 0 -60 Deg C


EMI/RFI:15 V/M External to cabinet with doors closed
Vibration: Frequency 10 to 60 Hz, Acceleration 0.5 g max, Displacement 0.1
inch
Class 1 Div 2/Zone 2 interface & mounting support

Approvals Support (CE, FM, CSA, ATEX, etc.)


No plans for UL certification of complete system

Corrosion protected models


All Series C components can be mixed and matched in cabinet
Electronics mounted to IOTA
Module Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Reduces footprint

Packaged cabinet solution


Similar to TPS Process Manager today

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Key Attributes
Designed Vertical
The modules are set at an 18 degree
angle for greater heat dissipation
Reduces hot spots
More Efficient Field Wiring
Top/Bottom Wiring Entry
More Natural Terminations
No Severe Wire Bends

Space Efficient Design


Comparable to highest density current
competitive offerings

Modular Approach
Removable Terminal Blocks

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Mechanical Keying
The Series C IO Modules all have the same
form factor. To prevent insertion of the wrong
module into the wrong IOTA, the modules are
equipped with tabs or keys which correspond to
slots on the IOTA.
Keys

Key
Slots

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

New Terminology
IOTA Support

IOTA Carrier

IOTA (Input/Output Termination Assembly)

IOM (Input/Output Module)

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Main Components
Mounting concept:
Single cabinet side for electronics
and terminations
Cable tray mounted carrier/IOTA with:
Replaceable Module
Power and Communication
Connectors
Field Wiring Connections

Vertical stacking of elements


Natural flow of field wiring

Channel mount
Channel is like PM FTA channel
Channel is not the same as FTA and
cannot be used for Series C mounting

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

New Cabinet Design


Power
Supply
Area

I/O Rail
Area
Batteries/Battery
Charger

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 2: Packaging
What factors contribute to the Series C space-efficient design?
A) Designed Vertical
B) No electronic card files
C) Power system does not occupy footprint
D) All of the above

Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
Incorrect!
Correct!
All
All
of
ofthe
theis:
above
abovestatements
statementsare
aretrue
trueand
and
make
Series
C a more
space efficient
You
must
answer
the question
before design.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Clear

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 3: Terminology
Which of the following is not a Series C hardware terminology?
A) IOTA Support
B) IOTA Carrier

C) IOTA
D) IOM
E) CPM

Incorrect.
Correct! The
Theterm
term"CPM"
"CPM"isisnot
notaaSeries
SeriesCC
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
hardware terminology and is used when
You must
answer
the
question
before
referring
toanywhere
a C200
controller.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Clear

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Series C Deliverables
Key features of Series C hardware

Performance targets

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Performance Targets
FEATURE

C300 (20ms)

C300 (50ms)

65

330 (200)

Fault-Tolerant Ethernet
FTE Node s per Community

Non-FTE Node s per Community

200

ACE
No. ACE per Server

Controller
No. Controllers per Server (C200 or C300)
Latency

20
250 ms
100 ms

Analog
Digital

Notes:
1. 330 nodes per community if no FTEBs are present; 200 nodes per community with FTEBs.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

19

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Limitations

The following is not supported with C300:

Series C FIM (FIM4)


- OK w/o C300

Peer-to-Peer communications with FTEB-based IOLIMs


Series C and PM I/O cannot be mixed on same I/O Link

Series A FIM (FIM2)


- Requires C200 (CPM)

The following architectures are not supported:


C200/C200E Peer-to-Peer communication with Series C FIM4/FIM8
modules
C300 Peer-to-Peer communications with Series A FIM (FIM2) modules
Peer-to-Peer

OK

PM I/O

OK
Series C
I/O

H
L
A
I

Honeywell

OK
NO

NO

FIM

I
O I
LM

F
I
M

OK

NO

C300
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

F C
T P
E M
B

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 4: Rules

Which of the following statements is true about a Series C system?


A) Peer-to-peer communication with FTEB based
IOLIMs is not supported

B) Series C I/O and PM I/O cannot be mixed on the


same I/O Link
C) C200 Peer-to-peer communications with Series C
FIM modules is not supported
D) C300 Peer-to-peer communications with FTEBbased (Series A) FIM modules is not supported
E) All of the above

The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
Incorrect.
Correct!
All
All
of
ofthe
theis:
above
abovestatements
statements
You
must
answer
the question
before
are
true
about
the Series
C system.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Submit

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Clear

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

C hardware includes:
Series
Series C I/O (HART and Non-HART AI and AO, DI, DO, LLMUX, DISOE)

Series C FIM (FIM4, FIM8)


Profibus Gateway Module
C300 Controller
Control Firewall

C is a space efficient design that combines I/O processor and


Series
field termination into one assembly.
C electronics are mounted to IOTAs reducing footprint and
Series
supporting module removal and insertion under power (RIUP).
C300 controller supports Series C, Series A, and PM I/O, Series C
interface, PGM, and FTEB connections to AB PLCs via
Fieldbus
Downlink CNI.
C300 controllers are supported per server.
20
C300 Peer-to-Peer communications with FTEB-based IOLIMs is not
supported.
Series C and PM I/O cannot be mixed on the same I/O link.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the main features of the Series C system

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System


4/13/2012

Describe the Architecture of Series C System

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

25

Describe the Architecture of Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Experion Platform Architecture


Advanced Enterprise Wide
Applications
Business FLEX
Workcenter
POMS, OptiVISION

Firewall

Casual User
Secure Read Only
Process Display
Web Server
eServer

Plant Wide
Data
Warehouse
PHD

Integrated
Physical
Security
Enterprise
Building
Integrator

Desktop
Access
for Business
Applications
Web Browsers

Business Network
Plant Asset
Management
Asset Manager

Remote Operations
Experion Station

Multivariable Control Video as a Process Sensor


Digital Video Manager
and Optimization
Profit Suite

Plant Simulation
UniSim

Video Ethernet

Advanced Applications Network


Integrated
Supervisory Control
ACE

Precision Measurement
Redundant
and Control
Global Database & Historian
Quality Control System
Experion Server

Web-based Human Interface


Experion Station
ASM Operator Effectiveness
Ergonomic
Operator Consoles
Icon Series

Focus of this Presentation


Supervisory Control Network
Regulatory, Logic
Sequential & Model
Based Controls
C300/C200 & Profit Loop

Wireless
Access

Field Mobility
Mobile PKS

Field Rounds
Automation
IntelaTrac PKS

Local Control Network

SIL 3 Safety System


Safety Manager

Redundant and/or
Remote I/O

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Wireless
Transmitters

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Basic
Process
Controller
Manager
Investment Protection
for TPS/TDC
Experion on LCN

Describe the Architecture of Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C Architecture

AB PLCs
Point to point data using
exchange blocks

In this release,
all Series A IOMs are
supported.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

27

Describe the Architecture of Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Profibus Gateway Module Architecture


Experion Server

FTE

C200
Process
Controllers
C300

PGM

Rack I/O
Series A

Profibus
I/O Options

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

SST Card

Describe the Architecture of Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)

Series C Profibus Gateway Module (PGM) is used to


connect Profibus devices to a C300 controller

Profibus Configuration Tool is integrated into Control


Builder

New Profibus Device & Channel Blocks in C300

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Each C300 Controller supports connections to 2 PGMs


Each PGM can be connected to a single C300 Controller
Each PGM supports 2 Profibus Network Links (PBLink)
Each PGM link supports up to 124 Profibus devices
(slaves)
Uses Profibus DP protocol to communicate with
devices
PGMs can optionally be Redundant
Redundant PGMs are on separate IOTAs
New PDA protocol supports IO Data Communication
between C300 and PGM

Describe the Architecture of Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Architecture

Which of the following statements is not true about the Series C Architecture?
A) Series C FIM is connected to L1 or L2 switch
B) Serial Interface, Pulse Input, Device Net Interface
and Profibus Interface Series A I/O's are connected
to Control Firewall using FTEB
C) Allen Bradely PLCs can also be connected to a rack,
and then to the Control Firewall using an FTEB
D) All of the above

Incorrect.
Correct! The
Thefalse
falsestatement
statementisis""Series
SeriesCCFIM
FIMisis
connected to L1 or L2 Cisco switch". The Series C
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
FIM is the Fieldbus interface module which
You
must answer
the question
before
connects
to
the
Control
Firewall
via FTE.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Clear

Describe the Architecture of Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

Control Firewalls are connected to Level 1 or Level 2 switches


The C300 Controller is connected to the Control Firewall using FTE
The Series C FIMs (4 & 8) are the Fieldbus interfaces. They also
connect to the Control Firewall via FTE
PGM is the Profibus interface. This module also connects to the
The
Control Firewall via FTE
A Rack IO connects to the C300 through the Control Firewall
Series
using an FTEB
This rack is connected to the Control Firewall using an FTEB and via FTE

Bradley PLCs can also be connected to a Rack, and then to the


Allen
Control Firewall using an FTEB

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Describe the Architecture of Series C System


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the Architecture of Series C System

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe the Architecture of Series C System


4/13/2012

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and


Options

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

C300 Controller Supported I/O


Flexible I/O support:
The C300 can support a number of IO modules
all of which can be mixed on the same C300.
These IO modules can be any mix of:
PMIO
Series C I/O
Series A Chassis I/O through the FTEB
module
Series C FIMs
Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)
The C300 can support 64 I/O units
The C300 is equipped with 2 IOLINK (IOL)
interfaces to connect to Series C and / or PM
I/O.
Each IOL can support 40 I/O units

IOL
Connection

FTE
Connection
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Types of Series C I/O Modules


Analog Input (AI) 16 Channels

A Channel is one
Input (or output)
circuit.

HART & non-HART

Analog Output (AO) 16 Channels


HART & non-HART

Digital Input (DI) 32 Channels 2 physical types


Low Voltage 24VDC Input
High Voltage 100VAC/120VAC/125VDC/240VAC

Digital Output (DO) 32 Channels


Optional Relay Extension Board

Sequence Of Events (SOE) 32 Channels


Low Level Analog Input (LL) 64 channels
Thermocouple and RTD

AI, AO, DI, DO and SOE are optionally redundant


LL Inputs are not available in redundant configurations

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Non-Redundant Series C I/O Module


IOM is physically placed on
an IOTA
The IOTA has all the wiring
and power connections
The IOM has the
electronics and diagnostics

I/O Link
Connection
I/O Module

Field
Termination

AI, AO and LL modules


mount on a 6 IOTA
DI/DO modules mount on a
9 IOTA
Calibration
Resistors /
Jumpers

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Series C I/O Support

Which of the following statements is true about C300 I/O Support?


A) Supports 2 I/O Link interfaces
B) Supports mix and match of I/O types

C) 64 primary IO units per C300, 40 per I/O Link


D) HLAI, HLAO, DI, DO and LL Mux
are all supported type Series C I/O's
E) All of the above

The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
All All
of the
of the
above
above
statements
statements
are
You must answer the question before
are
true
true
about
about
Series
Series
Cthis
C
I/O
I/O
support.
support.
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Clear

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Redundant Series C I/O Module


Same IO module as non-redundant
AI, AO, DI, DO modules mount on a
12 IOTA

I/O
Module

I/O Link
Connection

Field
Termination

I/O Termination
Assembly

Redundant IOM

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Diagnostic LEDs

Power and Status LEDs on the module itself


Provides display of any failure conditions
Power LED
Off or On (green)

For detailed information,


search KB for:
Series C I/O LED Descriptions

Status LED
Off, Green, Amber, Red
Steady, Flashing (1 sec), Flashing quickly (1/4 sec)
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

HART Analog Input


16 Analog Channels
Supports Integrated HART
Communications
4 Analog Channels support
Voltage mode (device ground)
System ground, all channels
support voltage mode, Special
wiring for ground

Optionally Redundant
50msec Scan for 4-20ma input
4 configurable modems
250ms Loop Latency

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

HART Analog Input Non Redundant

I/O Link
Connections
Differential
Voltage Input
Channels 13-16

I/O Link
Address

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

41

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 2: Series C I/O Support


Which of the these statements explains an IOTA?
A) The IOTA has all wiring and power connections
B) Power and Status LEDs are located on the IOTA
C) The same IOTA is used for non-redundant and
redundant IOM

Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is: has
Correct!
Incorrect.
The
The
IOTA
IOTA
has
all the
all the
wiring
wiring
and
You must
answer
the question before
and
power
connections.
connections.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-power
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

42

21

Clear

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Analog Input
I/O Module

Honeywell

IOM Addressing and IOLINK

I/O Link
Connections

IOM Address, Pre-define


Address jumpers are
available

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

43

Honeywell

HART Analog Input Wiring Options


Channels 1-12

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Channels 13-16

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

44

22

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

HART Analog Input Redundant

I/O Link
Connections

Module
Fuse

I/O Link
Address

Analog Input
I/O Module
primary and
redundant

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

45

HART Analog Input Detail Displays

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

46

23

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

HART Analog Output


16 Analog Channels
Supports Integrated HART
Communications
Optionally Redundant
250ms Loop Latency when
used with Series C HLAI
4 configurable modems

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

47

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

HART Analog Output


Calibration
Voltage
Reference

I/O Link
Connections

I/O Link
Address

Analog Output
I/O Module

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

48

24

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

HART Analog Output Detail Displays

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

49

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Non-HART Series C IO Modules


Non-HART versions of both the AI and AO
These modules use the AI-HL and AO block
templates
IO Unit Consumption remains the same as
the HART AI and HART AO

IOM Model
Names

IOM Block Name

Description

Number of
Channels

Cx-PAIX01

AI-HL

High Level Analog Input

16

Cx-PAOX01

AO

Analog Output

16

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

50

25

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

New Non-HART Series C IO Modules (R311.2 on)

These Non-HART versions of both the AI and AO


contain no Hart functionality and are different from the
CC-PAIX01 and CC-PAOX01

They use different IOTAs:


AI IOTA CC-TAIN01, CC-TAIN11 (red)
AO IOTA CC-TAON01, CC-TAON11 (red)

These modules use the AI-HL and AO block templates

IO Unit Consumption remains the same as


the HART AI and HART AO
IOM Model
Names

IOM Block Name

Description

Number of
Channels

CC-PAIN01

AI-HL

High Level Analog Input

16

CC-PAON01

AO

Analog Output

16

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

51

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Low Level Inputs


64 Channel Low Level Multiplexer Analog Input
Thermocouple (T/C) and RTD

Uses only the New Solid State FTAs


No plans to support the FTAs requiring the Power Adapter

With the new Solid State FTAs:


OTD before propagation of PV every 1 sec
Does not require Power Adapter FTA
Can be used with existing UCN/xPM installations

With the existing FTAs:


OTD propagates every 30 sec

FTAs will require standard FTA Channel and cannot be mounted on


IOTA Carrier

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

52

26

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

LLMUX Solutions
Standard Solution
LL IN-CABINET CONFIGURATION

Power
Status

51304465-xxx Internal Cabinet Cable

CU/CC-TAIM01

PMIO LLMUX

VL/BS

CC-PAIM01

6C
on
d

LL TCMUX IOTA

uc
t

or
Ca
b

le

He
a

Max. Length
1000 ft.
B-Size

FTA Assemblies must be


installed in a cabinet.

LLMUX Models
MU/MC-TAMT04
MU/MC-TAMR04
MU/MC-TAMT14

New FTAs Only (no Power Adapter)


C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

53

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Digital Input
32 Channels
Two (2) Physical IOM Types
1. 24VDC
2. 100VAC/120VAC/125VDC/240VAC

Three (3) Physical IOTA Types


1. 24VDC
2. 120VAC/125VDC
3. 240VAC

Optionally Redundant
100ms Loop Latency

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

54

27

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Digital Input, contd.


I/O Link
Connections
Digital Input
I/O Module
I/O Link
Address

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

55

Honeywell

Digital Input Detail Displays

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

56

28

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Digital Input Sequence of Events Module (DISOE)

Honeywell

32 Channels
1ms Digital Input resolution for
SOE

Time Correlation with other SOE


modules
Within C300 view
Over either I/O Link
Works with PMIO SOE

Input Channel scanning


20ms (SOE mode)
5ms (Low Latency mode)
1ms (SOE)

Input channels are Isolated


Selection for Internal or External
excitation power

Optionally Redundant
Uses Same IOTA As DI24V (TDIL01 & TDIL11)
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

57

Honeywell

Digital Input New DISOE Module

Existing DI Module
20ms scanning (Normal mode)
Open Wire Detection
5ms scanning (Low Latency mode)
Open Wire Detection disabled

New DISOE Module


DISOE Module CC-PDIS01
Uses Same IOTAs as DI
CC-TDIL01 & CC-TDIL11
All DI Functions PLUS
1ms SOE resolution
20ms scanning (SOE mode)

Same IOTA

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Open Wire Detection disabled

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

58

29

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

24V Digital Input IOTA for DI & DISOE


CC-TDIL01

I/O Link
Connections
Digital Input
I/O Module

DISOE uses
the same
IOTAs as DI
(CC-TDIL01 &
CC-TDIL11)

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

I/O Link
Address

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

59

Honeywell

Digital Input Detail Displays

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

60

30

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Digital Output
32 Channels
Same IOM used for 24VDC or
High Voltage Output
IOTA Types

Redundant and Non-redundant


24VDC Bussed Output
High Voltage Relay Output
100VAC / 120VAC / 240VAC /
125VDC / 48VDC
Utilizes Relay Extension Board

Optionally Redundant
100ms Loop Latency

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

61

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Digital Output
I/O Link
Connections
I/O Link
Address

Digital Output
I/O Module

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

62

31

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Digital Output Module with relay extender


Relay Extension Panel

Digital Output IOTA

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

63

Honeywell

Digital Output Detail Displays

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

64

32

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

65

Honeywell worked with MTL to manufacture


an IOTA for use when wiring into hazardous
locations (C1D1 / Zone 1).
The IOTA will be larger than a standard
IOTA (approximately 9 wide)
1-, 2- and 4-channel isolators are available

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas, contd.

Standard
IOTA Footprint

Non-Redundant
IOTA + IOM

6.00

Redundant
IOTA + IOM

I/S
IOTA Footprint

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

66

33

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas


Cabinet Layout Wide Channel
Supports mixture of IS and general
purpose signals within same cabinet
Cables are segregated using hazardousarea trunking
High vertical packing density

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

67

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Process Manager I/O


No separate IOLIM needed, connects directly to IOLink
PM I/O includes AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, DI SOE
PM I/O can be redundant
HLAI, HLAIHART, STIM, AO, AO16HART, DI, DISOE, DO
NOT: LLAI, LLMUX, and RHMUX

Direct connection
to C300 IOLINK

FTA for I/O


Remote I/O using Fiber Optic

PM I/O

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

68

34

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Honeywell DE Transmitters and C300

Support is provided for Honeywell DE-based smart transmitters in C300


via existing PMIO modules:

The (older) Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) module is not supported in


Experion
The Experion Platform provides full integration of all DE information
(diagnostics, configuration, etc.) within the standard system displays.
No additional Asset Management software (e.g., Asset Manager PKS or
Field Device Manager) is required to access the DE data.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

69

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

FTE Bridge in Series C


FTE Bridge, as part of a Series C system
allows:
A C300 Controller to use Series A chassis I/O
without the need for a C200/C200E
A C300 to communicate (Exchange Block
peer-to-peer) with Rockwell devices like PLC5
and CL5550 using a bridge chassis with a
FTEB and downlink CNI

The FTEB continues to operate at 10Mbps


after updating firmware to support C300
communication with Series A Chassis I/O
C200/C200E with FTEB can be used for
Peer to Peer with a C300 Controller

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

70

35

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Smart Transmitter Interface Multivariable (STI-MV)

Honeywell

Question 3: Series C I/O


Which of the following I/Os are available in
a Series C type?
A) HLAI, HLAO, Profibus I/O, LL Inputs
B) DI, DISOE, DO, HLAI, HLAO, LL Inputs
C) HLAI, HLAO, LL Inputs, Serial Interface
D) Serial Interface, DeviceNet, Pulse Input, HLAI

Incorrect.
Correct!
The
TheI/O's
I/O's
available
availableininaa
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Series C type are DI, DO, HLAI,
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did HLAO
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
ClickLL
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
and
Inputs.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

71

Clear

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 4: FTEB in Series C

Which of the following scenarios are available for a FTEB to publish I/O
data to a C300?
A) FTEB in redundant chassis connected to C300
B) FTEB in a non-redundant chassis connected to
C300 via Control Firewall
C) FTEB in a non-redundant chassis connected to
C300 via L1 or L2 switch

Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
The
valid
validscenario
scenariofor
forFTEB
FTEBto
topublish
publishI/O
I/O
data You
to C300
" FTEBthe
in aquestion
non redundant
mustisanswer
before I/O chassis
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
connected to
C300 via Control Firewall."
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

72

36

Clear

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

SERIES C

I/O
Family

I/O Type
HLAI
HLAI w/ HART
LLAI
LLMUX
RHMUX
STI
STI-MV
AO8
AO16
AO16 w/ HART
Serial Device
Serial
Pulse
DI
DI-24V
DISOE
DO16
DO32
Fieldbus

C300
Support

C200/C200E
Support

xPM
Support

C300
Support

I/O Type
HLAI w/ HART
LLMUX64
AO16 w/ HART
DI24D32
DI32
DO24D32
DO32
Fieldbus

C200/C200E
Support

I/O
Family

RAILSERIES A

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

C200/C200E
Support

HLAI

DI24D

DI120A

LLAI-TC

LLAI-RTD

AO

DO24D

DO120A

DO-Relay

AO16 w/ HART

I/O
Family

xPM
Support

C300
Support

I/O Type

RAIL
SERIES H

PMIO

I/O
Family

I/O Type

C300
C200
xPM
Support Support Support

HLAI8
LLAI8
AO8
DI16
DO4
DI16

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

73

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

I/O Compatibility Series A

CHASSIS SERIES A

I/O
Family

I/O Type
HLAI16
HLAI6
HLAI8 w/HART
LLAI-TC6
LLAI-RTD6
AO6V
AO6MA
AO8
AO8 w/HART
Pulse (612O)
DI120A16I
DI220A16I
DI120A8D
DI120A16
DI24D16I
DI24D16D
DI24D32
DO120/220A16I
DO120A8D
DO120/220A16
DO220A16-Relay
DO24D16I
DO24D16D
DO24D32
Serial
Fieldbus (FIM2)
Profibus DP
DeviceNet

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

xPM
Support

C300
Support

C200/C200E
Support

TC-IAH161
TC-IAH061
TC-HAI081
TC-IXL062
TC-IXR061
TC-OAV061
TC-OAH061
TC-OAV081
TC-HAO081
TC-MDP081
TC-IDK161
TC-IDW161
TC-IDX081
TC-IDA161
TC-IDJ161
TC-IDX161
TC-IDD321
TC-ODK161
TC-ODX081
TC-ODA161
TC-ORC161
TC-ODJ161
TC-ODX161
TC-ODD321
TC-MUX021

Model
Number

SST-PFBCLX
1756-DNB

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

74

37

xPM
Support

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

C300 I/O Compatibility

Honeywell

Conclusion
Describe Series C Input/Output Modules and Options

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

75

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

76

38

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options


4/13/2012

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series


C System

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

77

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C IO Topology Rules


I/O Topology Rules:
2 IO LINKS
PMIO and Series C I/O can be on the same C300
Connect to series A I/O using an FTEB
Connect to Allen Bradley PLCs using an FTEB

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

78

39

4/13/2012

Honeywell

C300 Topology Rules IO Capacity

A C300 can support a maximum of 64 IO Units (IOU).


Series C IO and PM IO count as 1 IOU each.
Series C IO and PMIO are connected to C300 using
IO LINKS.
Series A I/O also consume IOUs, shown later.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

79

C300 Topology Rules IOLINK Capacity

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Each IO Link can support a maximum of 40 IOUs.


A C300 controller supports 2 IO LINKs.
An IO LINK can be configured for either Series C IO
(at 750 kb link speed) or PMIO (at 375 kb link speed).
An IO LINK cannot support both Series C IO and
PMIO on the same link.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

80

40

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C IO and PMIO Mix

Link 1
750 kbps
40 PRI
Series C IOMs
40 RED
Series C IOMs

#2: PMIO
TOTAL 64 IOUs

Link 2
750 kbps

Link 1
375 kbps

24 PRI
Series C IOMs
24 RED
Series C IOMs

24 PRI
PM - IOPs
24 RED
PM - IOPs

#3: Series C +PMIO


TOTAL 64 IOUs
Link 1
750 kbps
40 PRI
Series C IOMs
40 RED
Series C IOMs

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Link 2
375 kbps
40 PRI
PM - IOPs
40 RED
PM - IOPs

#4: Series C +PMIO


TOTAL 64 IOUs

Link 2
375 kbps

Link 1
375 kbps

24 PRI
PM - IOPs
24 RED
PM - IOPs

40 PRI
PM - IOPs
40 RED
PM - IOPs

Link 2
750 kbps
24 PRI
Series C IOMs
24 RED
Series C IOMs

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

4/13/2012

81

C300 Topology Rules FTEB Connections to CF9

Honeywell

A C300 can support up to 7 FTEBs for interfacing with


supported Chassis I/O or AB PLC interface.
FTEBs must be connected to the same Control Firewall
as the C300.
This limits the FTEBs to 6 per redundant C300
controller.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

82

41

4/13/2012

#1: Series C I/O


TOTAL 64 IOUs

Honeywell

C300 Topology Rules Series A IOU Capacity

Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support up to 16


IOUs. The IOU count per module is:
Serial
Interface

8 per FTA

Profibus
Interface

DeviceNet Interface

Pulse Input

The FTEB used for Series A cannot be in a redundant


configuration.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

4/13/2012

83

Honeywell

C300 Controller I/O Link Configurations


#5: Series C + PMIO + Series A
TOTAL 64 IOUs

C300
Capacity 3 MIX #3
Link 1
Link 2
750 kbps
375 kbps

24 PRI
Series C IOMs

24 PRI
PM-IOPs
24 RED
PM-IOPs

24 RED
Series C IOMs
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

FTE

16 Series A IO
Units w/FTEB

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

84

42

4/13/2012

Honeywell

C300 Topology Rules FTEB Limitations

Important limitations:
An FTEB connected chassis can allow connections
to only 1 C300 controller.
You cannot have any other C200/C200E, IO or CNI
downlink modules in the FTEB chassis to connect to
other IO chassis.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

85

C300 Topology Rules FTEB I/F Capacity

4/13/2012

Honeywell
CNI, ENET or
DHRIO only

FTEBs can be used to connect AB PLCs for Peer to


Peer, using Exchange Blocks. No IOUs consumed.
A maximum of 32 exchange blocks, and a maximum
of 8 PLCs can be connected.
The interface uses Control Net to the AB PLCs and
allows only the CNI, ENET or DHRIO.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

86

43

4/13/2012

C300 Topology Rules Series C FIM Usage

Honeywell

A Series C FIM can be used with or without the C300.


A FIM needs to connect to a C300 if a combined
control strategy is needed.
A FIM4 counts as 4 IOUs; A FIM8 counts as 8 IOUs
A C300 can support 15 FIM4s, or up to 8 FIM8s
A mix of FIM4s & FIM8s is supported as long as the
total number of H1 links does not exceed 64

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

4/13/2012

87

C300 Topology Rules Series C FIM Capacity

Honeywell

An Experion Server can support up to 125 FIMs.


A FIM supports 4 or 8 H1 links, with 16 devices per
link.
An Experion Server can support up to 12000
FieldBus devices!

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

88

44

4/13/2012

Honeywell

C300 Topology Rules PGM Connection and Capacity

It is not necessary to connect a PGM to the same


CF9 as the C300 (but is a good practice)
A C300 can support 2 PGMs.
A PGM supports two ProfiBus links
Each ProfiBus Link supports up to 124 devices
Each device supports up to 16 I/O modules
IOUs consumed by a PGM must be calculated
(# Digital IO Points / 384) + (# Analog IO Points / 24)
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

4/13/2012

89

Honeywell
Question 1: IO Topology Rules
Which of the following statements is not true for Series C IO Topology
Rules?
A) Series C, PM and Series C A IO on the same
IO Link
B) Series C and PM IO cannot be on the same IO Link
C) FTEB connected chassis can allow connections to
only 1 C300 controller
D) Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support
up to 16 IOUs
Incorrect. Series C, PM and Series A IO on the same
Correct! Series C, PM and Series A IO on the same IOLINK
IOLINK is not true for a Series C IO Topology. An IOLINK
is not true for a Series C IO Topology. An IOLINK cannot
cannot support both Series C IO and PMIO on the same
support
both
Seriesis:C IO and PMIO on the same link. An
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
link.
An FTEB
connected to the same Control Firewall as
FTEB
connected
to the
same
Control
Firewall as the C300
You
must
answer
the
question
before
the
C300
can
publish
Series
A IO data to the
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
notcontroller
-answer
answered
-can
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
toA
continue
continue
completely
controller
publish
Series
IO data to the C300.
continuing
C300.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Submit

Clear

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

90

45

4/13/2012

Honeywell
Question 2: Topology Rules
A project is required to use Fieldbus only control strategy for 1500 FF
devices. How many C300 controllers are required?
A) 2 C300 Controllers + 24 FIM Modules
B) 1 C300 Controller + 48 FIM Modules
C) No C300 Controllers are required, only 24 Series C
FIM Modules

Yes!
No.
The
The correct
correct
statement
is
is "No
"No C300
C300 controllers
controllers are
are
The
Your
correct
answer:
answerstatement
is:
required, only 24 Series C FIM Modules". Since the
project requires only Fieldbus control strategy the C300
You must
answer
the question
controller
is not
required.
Each FIMbefore
Module has 4 FF links
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
and each link continuing
supports 16 FF devices. Hence 1 FIM
module can support a maximum of 64 (16*4) FF devices.
Hence only 24 (1500/64) Series C FIM Modules are
required.
Click anywhere to continue.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Submit

Clear

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

4/13/2012

91

Honeywell
Question 3: Topology Rules
FTEBs can be used in the Series C topology under specific scenarios.
Which of these configurations is valid?
A) FTEB connected to AB PLC via Downlink CNI
B) FTEBs must be connected to the same Control
Firewall as the C300
C) An FTEB connected chassis can allow connections
to only 1 C300 controller
D) All of the above

Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
All All
of of
thethe
above
above
statements
statements
areare
correct
correct
for
You
must
answer
the
question
before
for
FTEBs
FTEBs
used
used
in
in
the
the
Series
Series
C
C
topology.
topology.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Clear

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

92

46

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

There are 2 IO LINKS per C300

A C300 can support a maximum of 64 IO Units (IOU).

A C300 can support up to 7 FTEBs

A Series C FIM can be used with or without the C300.

Mix and match of Series C I/O and PMIO is an option


Same IO LINK cannot support both Series C and PM IO

Each IO Link can support a maximum of 40 IOUs


Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support up to 16 IOUs
FTEBs must be connected to the same Control Firewall as the C300
FTEBs interface with Series A I/O or AB PLC interface
FTEBs cannot be in a redundant configuration

A C300 can support 15 FIMs.


An Experion Server can support up to 125 FIMs.
A C300 can support 2 PGMs.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

4/13/2012

93

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the I/O Topology Rules for the Series C System

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System

94

47

4/13/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2


Contents

Verify Series C Hardware Connections .................................................................................................3

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2


Verify Series C Hardware Connections

Verify Series C Hardware Connections


Introduction

The following Lab will allow you to become more familiar with the Series C Hardware.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2


Verify Series C Hardware Connections

Practice
Performance Review for C300 Cabinet

Please check off each item as you complete the task.


Your course manager may wish to observe you while you perform these tasks.
LEARN BY DOING

Step

Action

Go to the C300 cabinet, and locate the following items.

Locate the CF9 in the Cabinet.

Is uplink LED is blinking?

How many cables are connected to ports on the CF9?

How many LEDs are blinking on the CF9?

Locate the C300 Controller Module.

Locate the FTE Device Index rotary switches on C300 IOTA.

What is the Device Index set on rotary switches?

Is an IOLINK cable connected to the C300 IOTA?

10

On the CF9 IOTA, identify the Yellow & Green uplink cables.

11

On the C300 IOTA, identify the cables which are connected to the CF9.

12

Locate the reset power solder pads on the C300 IOTA.

13

Locate the FTE A and FTE B status LEDs on the C300 module.

14

Is the C300 module status LED steady or blinking?

15

If the status LED is blinking, why is it blinking?

16

Identify the Power supply + and - cable on the bus bar.

17

Locate the address jumpers for the IO modules.

18

What is the IOM number on the Analog input module?

19

What is the IOM number on Digital input module?

20

What is the IOM number on Digital output module?

21

What is the IOM number on Analog output module?

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
In this lesson you will learn about the
purpose and use of the Control Builder
application.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will
be able to:
Open and navigate Control Builder
Identify the toolbar icons and functionality
Explain the purpose of the tabs in the
tree windows
Describe the load functions available
from the Control Builder Project and
Monitoring tabs

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Topics

Starting Control Builder


Control Builder Functions
Control Builder Load Function

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Start Control Builder

Click to open
Configuration Studio

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Start Control Builder, contd.

Select the server.


Then, select the Connect button.

General rule:
Select the System.
Here we are selecting
the server.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Honeywell

User accounts

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Configuration Studio login is not required for integrated accounts or Users added
to Experion Install time groups

Windows user is part of


Experion groups

Windows user
created for
Windows login

Experion Install time groups include following

Product Administrators
Local Engineers
Local Supervisors
Local Operators
Local Ack View Only Users
Local View Only Users

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Start Control Builder, contd.

A logon window will appear only


when you have logged on to
Windows as a user who is not a
member of a pre-defined
Experion group

Change to

User Name: mngr


Password: mngr1
Domain: <Traditional Operator Security>
Careful, this user & password
may not work at your site.
In fact, you may not be required
to enter user name & password.

Control Builder Introduction

Click

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Start Control Builder, contd.

Select Control
Strategy
Select Configure Process
Control Strategies

Access level
This information is displayed
only if you connected to the
Server, not the System.

User name

Server name

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Starting Control Builder

Control Builder Functions

Control Builder Load Function

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Control Builder Introduction

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Toolbar

Not all toolbar icons will be available


until you open Control Builder items.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Toolbar, contd.

1 2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3 4 5

6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Open Tree Window


Close active Control Drawing
or Tree Window
Move to the Left
Move to the Right
Save the active Control Drawing
Delete the selected object
Copy selection and place on
clipboard
Paste clipboard contents
Print selected pages of active
document
Display program information

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

This is a good reference page,


you may want to flag it.

Display help information


Point Selection Command
Create a wire for connecting function
blocks
Create a Parameter Connector
Assign Modules to a Control
Execution Environment (CEE)
Module Containment
Load selected items
Upload selected items
Substitute Names
QVCS Manager
Toggle single item state
SCM Navigation
Fieldbus DD import
View error log
Change scale dimensions

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Control Builder Introduction

25

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

11

Control Builder Status Line

Honeywell

Security level

Experion PKS server name


currently running as primary
Primary when connected to ServerB
Backup when connected to ServerA
(should always be Primary)

Shows Sync when ERDBs on


ServerA and ServerB are
synchronized

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder System Preferences

To establish IP addresses using the Embedded FTE tab on System


Preferences dialog:
Click on the Tools System Preferences option to open Embedded
FTE Tab.

Click the Edit network parameters check


box to make address fields available for
editing.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Control Builder System Preferences

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Type applicable base address. Setting the Base IP


Address prompts a suggested Subnet Mask address.

Type applicable Subnet Mask address. An invalid


Subnet Mask address displays an error message.
Type applicable Default Gateway address.

Provide the procedure for establishing the NTP time


sources for the C300 and the Series C FIM. The FTE
Bridge Module does not use NTP.

Click OK, warning will be displayed that restart remote


Control builder session.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Tree Windows


1 2 3

1. Clicking the Open Tree button will open a tree


window. Clicking the button again will open a
second tree window.
2. Clicking the Close button will close the selected
window.

3. Clicking the Open Library button will


open the Library window

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Tree Windows


Tabs appear at the bottom of each tree window.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Tabs

The Project Tab displays the CPM, IOMs, CMs and SCMs in the current
project.

The Project Tab is linked directly to the ERDB in the Experion Server.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Tabs, contd.


The Monitoring Tab:
Displays all objects loaded to the control
processor module (CPM)
Permits active modules to be viewed and
controlled during process operations

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Monitoring Tab


To disable the online viewing of control
modules in the monitoring tab click:
Chart > Disable Chart Monitoring
The Control Module (CM) window must
be open to make the change

Selection are made per Control Module


Disabling Chart Monitoring only lasts as
long as the CM window is open
The next time the CM window is opened,
it will be re-enabled

Generally, Chart Monitoring should be


Enabled
When disabled, values shown on the
Monitoring Tab are from the ERDB (last
downloaded), not from the controller

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Tabs

The Library Tab displays all available system function blocks grouped
into type categories.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Control Builder Functions


Control Builder is :
A) An online documentation tool for C200
controllers and Experion PKS servers
B) A tool used only for building graphics
C) A graphical tool used to design control
strategies for C200, C300, ACE and SCE
to save run time data

D) A graphical tool used to view plant graphics

Correct!
Incorrect.
Control
Control
builder
builder
is a isgraphical
a graphical
tooltool
used
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
to design
used tocontrol
designstrategies
control strategies
for C200,
for
C300,
C200,
ACE
You must answer the question before
C300,
and
ACE
SCE
and
and
SCE
save
and
run
save
time
run
data.
time
data.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Control Builder Introduction

Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Clear

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Starting Control Builder
Control Builder Functions

Control Builder Load Function

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Load Function

Controller

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Control Builder Introduction

23

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Load Function, contd.


Project / Monitor Tabs

Update

Server
RTDB

Checkpoint
File

Monitor
Tab

Project
Tab
Load

Windows

Upload
Load (reload)

Checkpoint
Restore from
Checkpoint

Control
Controller
Processor

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Question 2: Load Operation

During the load operation from the Control Builder project tab, control
strategies are downloaded:
A) Only to the C200 controller
B) To C200 memory, the monitor
tab and the server real time database
C) Only to the server real time database
D) Only to the C200 memory and monitor tab

Click anywhere to continue.

Control Builder Introduction

The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
During
During
the load
the
operation
operation
fromfrom
Control
Control
Builder
You must
answer
the load
question
before
You
Incorrect
Correct
did tab,
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
project
Builder
project
control
tab,
strategies
control
strategies
are
downloaded
are downloaded
to C200
continuing
tomemory,
C200 memory,
the monitor
the monitor
tab andtab
theand
server
the server
real time
real
time
database.
database.

Submit

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Clear

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Summary
Control Builder:

a graphical, object-oriented configuration environment in Configuration


IsStudio
used to design, implement and document control applications.
toolbar icons that become available when specific Control Builder items
Has
are opened.
Has tree window tabs to help you design control applications.
The Project tab displays the CPM, IOMs, CMs and SCMs in the current
project.

The Monitoring tab displays all objects that have been loaded to the
control processor module (CPM) and permits active modules to be
viewed and controlled during process.
The Library tab displays all available system CMs and function blocks
grouped into type categories that can be used to build control strategies.
Control strategies download to C200, C200E, C300 memory, the monitor tab
and
the server real time database.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder


4/30/2012

Use Compare Parameters Options

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Use Compare Parameters Options


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson you will learn the purpose and use of the compare
parameters functions in Control Builder.
At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will know how to:
Compare system parameters

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Use Compare Parameters Options


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
The Compare Parameters Function:

Allows you to compare the parameters on function blocks in your ERDB with
parameters on the same function blocks loaded on your controller.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Use Compare Parameters Options


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Topics

Comparing System Parameters

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Use Compare Parameters Options


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Using Compare Parameters

Tools > System Preferences

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Control Builder Introduction

33

Use Compare Parameters Options


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Compare Parameters
CM_FV101RC loading from Project tab

Uncheck if PVHIALM is to remain at 87 -- be sure to perform an


Upload to Monitoring and an Update to Project!

This dialog box is displayed


at the time the download
operation is requested.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Use Compare Parameters Options


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Comparing Parameters


When the Compare Parameters function is active:
A) The Compare Parameters checkbox in the
Tools > System Preferences window is checked
B) Control Builder will inform you of any parameter
discrepancies between the control module you are
loading and the control module which resides on the
controller
C) Control Builder will give you the option to keep
certain parameter values on the controller or
overwrite them with new values
D) All of the above
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Yes!
No.You
All
Allmust
these
theseanswer
statements
statements
are
are correct
correct
when
when the
the
the question
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
Compare Parameters
function is active.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Control Builder Introduction

Submit

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Clear

Use Compare Parameters Options


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Summary
The Compare Parameters function in Control Builder:

parameters from function blocks in your ERDB with parameters


Compares
from function blocks in your controller, giving you the opportunity to keep or
write over existing values.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Use Compare Parameters Options


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Identify Functionality of Compare Parameters

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Use Compare Parameters Options


4/30/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Use Compare Parameters Options


4/30/2012

Use Control Builder Search

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this section we will learn about Control Builder search enhancements


introduced in Experion R400
At the end of this module you will be able to perform the functions such
as
Navigation from hyperlinks
Search, Sort and Filter Tags
Search function blocks in chart

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder Navigation

Right-click a wire connector to locate the source and destination blocks


Locate From Param option source block
Locate to Param option destination block
Navigation is available for connecting wires and not for block pins

Destination
Block.Parameter will
be highlighted

Source
Block.Parameter
will be highlighted

Hover mouse over wire


connector to view tooltip
indicating source and
destination blocks

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

41

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Navigate to Block in Chart

Double-click block in
tree view

Right-click block in
tree view and select
Locate in Chart

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

42

21

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Navigation Using Hyperlinks


Parameter Connector
Cross Reference
SCM step output or condition

OR
Right
Click

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

43

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Selecting Hyperlink Color


The following parameters will be
displayed as hyperlinks

Hyperlink color set in


User Preferences will
override System
Preferences

Parameter connectors, Crossreferences, SCM expressions

User Preferences are tied


to the Windows logon.
Config Studio logon and
Signon Mgr logon do not
make any difference.

The hyperlink color can be


configured from System
Preferences or User Preferences

System Preferences
are copied to User
Preferences when a
new Windows user logs
on.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

44

22

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Hyperlink Color
Project Mode

Configured hyperlink
text color displayed in
Project mode

Monitoring Mode

Hyperlinks displayed
in normal text color
in Monitoring mode
Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

45

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Navigation Scenarios
Target Parameter

Chart Navigates to

In same SCM handler

Corresponding Block/Parameter is selected

In different handler within


same SCM

SCM Handler shall be invoked and corresponding block /


parameter is selected

In different SCM

Chart for the particular SCM is opened and corresponding


block / parameter is selected

In CM

Chart is opened for the CM and corresponding block /


parameter is selected

Directly belongs to a CM

Chart of the tagged module is opened

Alias in the same SCM

Configuration form is opened with the Alias tab active

DATA block parameter

DATA blocks properties is opened with the Formula


Parameters/Report Parameters tab active

Tagged block which does not


have a chart

Configuration form shall be opened for the tagged block.

Block which does not exist

Tag name is displayed as ??? and no hyperlink shall be


displayed

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

46

23

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Special Navigation Scenarios


Target Parameter

Chart Navigates to

OPC parameter

Configuration form of the OPC gateway shall be opened

Projected parameter

Configuration form for the CM/SCM/RCM shall be


opened with the Projected parameters tab select

Substitute Block

Substitute Name List popup shall be opened with the


Substitute Blocks tab active

Substitute Parameter

Substitute Name List popup shall be opened with the


Substitute Parameters tab active

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

47

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Search Tags Toolbar

Experion R400 provides a search toolbar to search for tags in Control


Builder
Project Window
Monitoring Window
Chart View

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

48

24

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Find Block in Chart

Enter the block name in the chart toolbar and click search option
Block will appear selected in chart

Block Names only.


Wildcards not allowed.

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

49

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Navigating Between Chart Pages

Select to close
the chart toolbar

Enter the page number


and press <Enter> key
or
button

Right-click chart empty


space and select Display
Search Bar

Page will be
visible in chart
view

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

50

25

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Navigating Between Chart Pages


Icon

Function
Navigate to the first page
Navigate to the previous page
Navigate to the next page
Navigate to the last page

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

51

Search Tags Toolbar Project, Monitoring Tab

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Search tags in Project tab

Select name of required strategy


Press Enter key or click and the
corresponding chart is opened

If user enters a tag name which


does not exist in the database,
an error message is displayed

If user enters a tag name that does


not have a chart

Enter initial
tag name

Configuration form is opened


Example, search for a controller in
Project mode, controller
configuration form is opened

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

52

26

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder List View

List View available in Control Builder to search, sort and filter tags

List View can be opened from both Project and Monitoring modes
Cells are not editable in List View
Filter row text is editable, for filtering text to be entered
List View can be filtered for to view details of a particular tag

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

53

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Open List View


Select the Project tree/Monitoring tree
Select View List View
List View will open for Project/Monitoring
mode depending on selected tree view
OR

Right-click empty space in tree view and


select List View
Button to open
List View

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

54

27

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Default Columns in List View

Default columns available in both Project and Monitoring List View

Columns

Description

Name

The name of the tag will be represented with an icon

Type

Represents type of module for example FTE ,CPM,CPM200s,IOLIMS,CEE,CM etc

Parent

Gives name of the parent block


Represents state of the block for example initial, loaded, changed (Project mode) or
active, inactive, error, database invalid (Monitoring mode)

State
Description

Gives description of the block

Parent Asset

Gives description of the parent asset associated with the block


Gives description of the date and time the last modification was made to the block's
configuration

Date Last Modified

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Control Builder Introduction

55

List View Toolbar Assignment Parent, Column Organizer

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Used for navigation to


different controllers

Used to organize
the columns

Parent Item Name

Description

All Tags

Displays all strategies in the database. For example


controllers, CEEs, IOLINKs, CMs, SCM, RCM,
UCM, etc

Root

Displays elements directly below the root. For


example controllers, interface modules, unassigned

Controller

Displays all tagged blocks under the controller

Unassigned

Displays tagged blocks which are not assigned to


any particular controller

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

56

28

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

List View Toolbar Buttons

Functions
Clear Filters
Copy Selected
Rows
Refresh

Icons

Description
Clears all filters applied on the individual columns in List view
Copies selected rows along with the currently displayed parameters
Updates List View contents with the latest changes
Opens the previously saved filters from any particular location

Save Filters

Used to save the filter to an particular location

Open Filters

Change Context
Last Update

Control Builder Introduction

User can switch from Project mode to monitoring mode or vice versa
Displays the date & time when the contents of the List view were last updated

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

57

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Summary

Hyperlinks are used to navigate to respective Control Strategies

List View is available in Control Builder to sort, Search and filter tags

Search Toolbar is added to search for tags in Control Builder

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

58

29

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Use Control Builder Search

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

59

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

60

30

Use Control Builder Search


4/30/2012

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

61

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
In this lesson you will learn to locate
information about Control Builder
components in Knowledge Builder.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will
know how to:
Find function block information and
theory in Knowledge Builder
Find parameter information in
Knowledge Builder

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

62

31

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Knowledge Builder Location

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

63

Function Blocks in Knowledge Builder

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Experion R400 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control > Regulatory Control Blocks

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

64

32

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB


4/30/2012

Honeywell

PID Block Theory

Experion PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control > PID Block

PID
Theory

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

65

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Parameter Reference

Experion PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Parameter Reference

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

66

33

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB


4/30/2012

Question 1: Knowledge Builder Parameter Information

Honeywell

Where can you find information in Knowledge Builder for the CVEUHI
parameter on a PID function block?
A) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Components Reference> CXXXX Parameters
B) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Components Theory> CXXXX Parameters
C) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Parameter Reference> CXXXX Parameters
D) None of the above

No.
The correct
path
to find information for the CVEUHI
The
Your
correct
answer:
answerpath
is: to
Yes!
No.
The
The correct
correct
path
to find
find information
information for
for the
the CVEUHI
CVEUHI
parameter
onanswer
a PIDA the
function
block
in Knowledge Builder is
You must
question
before
parameter
a
PIDA
function
block
in Knowledge Builder is
YouExperion
Incorrect
Correct
did You
noton
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
PKS>
Reference>
Control
Builder
Parameter
Experion PKS>continuing
Reference> Control Builder Parameter
Reference> CXXXX Parameters
Reference> CXXXX Parameters
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.

Control Builder Introduction

Submit

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

67

Clear

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Summary

Read Knowledge Builder to learn about the components youll use to


create control modules including:
Function block information and theory

(Experion PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control)

Parameter information
(Experion
PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Parameter Reference)

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

68

34

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB


4/30/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe How to Locate CB Information in KB

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

69

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB


4/30/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Control Builder Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

70

35

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB


4/30/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: Control Builder Introduction


Contents

Open and Operate Control Builder ........................................................................................................3

4/30/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/30/2012

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Open and Operate Control Builder


Practice
The Purpose of this lesson is to demonstrate opening and operating Control Builder. After you
complete this lesson you will be able to:

Identify the tabs used to make structural changes to an existing Control Module.

Identify the tabs used to change parameters online.

An Experion PKS Server

The server name for your system (E20ESV##_Server), where the ## symbols represent your
team number; will be supplied by your instructor.

Introduction

Control Builder is one of the Experion PKS Engineering Tools.

Controllers can connect to a Server over FTE or over ControlNet.

Control Builder can run on the Server or an Engineering Workstation. If controllers are
connected to the server over FTE, then a maximum of 12 Control Builder clients can
connect to a single Experion server. If controllers are connected to the server over
ControlNet, then a maximum of 4 Control Builder clients can connect to a single Experion
server.

The devices, as well as control strategies, are created in Control Builder and downloaded to
the C200 Controller, C200E Controller, C300 Controller or ACE and the Experion PKS
Server.

Configuration Studio is required to launch Control Builder.

In this course you will use the Manager (mngr) account to log into configuration studio.

The user name entered when logging on to Configuration Studio determines the access level
of the user in Control Builder.

View Only VIEW only

Ack Only View and alarm acknowledgement

OPER & SUPV Allow Operations

ENGR & MNGR Allow Configurations

The Experion PKS Operator profile can use a Windows account ID and password
(Integrated Accounts).

4/30/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Prerequisites

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

On a system with only one EPKS server, the Configuration Studio Connect window will
show both a System and a Server. Connecting to the System allows access to Enterprise
wide configuration, while connecting to the Server only allows access to server specific
configuration. Generally, it is best to connect to the system rather than the server.

Identify the System and Server from the icon, as shown below. The server is also
categorized as Experion PKS Server in the Type column of the Connect window.

System/Server

Icon

Purpose

System

Use Configuration Studio to connect to a


system to access the Enterprise Model
Database.

Server

Use Configuration Studio to connect to a


specific server.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/30/2012

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step

Click Start > All Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS> Configuration Studio.

Action

4/30/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
2

Action
In the Connect window, from the Local Targets tab, select your Experion Server
(E20ESV##_Server).
(Note your server list may appear different than the one shown below)

ATTENTION
The display, as seen above might, be different on your
screen.
For the class, the Server Name is E20ESV##_Server,
where ## is the Student number.
Verify that the server name shown in the property
panel (in gray) is the same as the server name
selected in the list above.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/30/2012

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
3

Action
Click Connect.

4
ATTENTION
Depending on the credentials used to logon to
Windows, it may not be necessary to provide
additional credentials (as shown) here.
In the Logon to window, enter the following information:
User name: mngr

Password: mngr1
Domain: <Traditional Operator Security>

4/30/2012

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step

Action

In the Configuration Explorer tab, in the left-side pane, expand your server (click the
+ symbol next to the E20ESV##_Server ServerName), to expand the corresponding
tree.

ATTENTION
For the class, the Server Name is E20ESV##_Server,
where ## is the Student number.

Select Control Strategy.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/30/2012

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step

Select Configure process control strategies.

Action

ATTENTION
The Control Builder application window will open.

4/30/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
9

Action
In the Control Builder application window, you will see a screen, as illustrated below:

Toolbar

Tree window

Your access level appears in the lower right corner as shown.

ATTENTION
The status line at the bottom of the Control Builder
application indicates:
1. Sync if the ERDBs are synchronized (only on
redundant servers. The example above is a
non-redundant server).
2. The ERDB to which Control Builder is
connected. This should always be Primary
which indicates that Control Builder is
connected to the B server (the primary ERDB
is always on the B server).
3. The Experion Server to which Control Builder
is connected.
4. The access level of the user.

10

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/30/2012

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
10

Action
The toolbar gives you a graphical interface for accessing the different tools available in
Control Builder. Some of the tools can also be found in the dropdown menus.
The details of the toolbar are as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

27

1 Open Tree. Open Tree Window


2 Close. Closes the Tree Window that has focus in Control Builder
3 Open Library
4 Move to the Left

5 Move to the Right


6 Save. Saves the active Control Drawing
7 Delete. Deletes the selected Object
8 Copy. Copies the selection and places on the clipboard
9 Paste. Pastes the item from clipboard contents
10 Print. Prints the selected pages of active document
11 Displays Program information
12 Displays Help information
13 Point Selection Command
14 Wire Connector
15 Parameter Connector
16 Assign Module to Execution Environment
17 Module Containment
18 Load Parameters
19 Upload Parameters
20 Substitute Names
21 QVCS (Qualification and Version Control System)
22 Toggle single item state
23 SCM Navigation
24 Field Device Description Unit
25 Wireless Device Description Unit
26 View Error Log
27 Change Scale

4/30/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Using Tree Windows

Step
1

Action
If the tree windows are open, close them by clicking on the
corner of each window.

button on the right upper

ATTENTION
You can also close the Tree Windows by selecting the
tree window and then clicking the
toolbar.

12

button from the

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/30/2012

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step

Action

Select View > Project/Monitor Tree to open the first Project/Monitor tree view on the left
side of your screen. Repeat the same procedure to open a second Project/Monitor tree
view on the right hand side of the screen.

You can open a maximum of two Project/Monitor tree views at a time.

ATTENTION
Another way to open the Project/Monitor Tree Window
is to click the

button on the toolbar.

Select View > Library Tree to open the Library Tree Window. You can open only one
Library Tree View.

ATTENTION
Another way to open the Library Tree window is by
clicking the

4/30/2012

button from the toolbar

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

14

Step

Action

Click and Drag the divider bar to the right to increase the size of the Project-Assignment
window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/30/2012

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
5

Action
There are 2 tabs in each Project/Monitor tree window: Project and Monitoring. Click
each tab to toggle between them.

Project Tab

The following tasks are performed in the Project tab:

4/30/2012

Create new CMs, SCMs and IOMs and define their parameters.

Design a Control Strategy through CMs and SCMs.

Save the Control Strategy.

Assign CMs and SCMs to the CEE (Control Execution Environment).

Load CMs and SCMs to the CPM (Control Processing Module).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
6

Action
Monitoring Tab

The following tasks are performed in the Monitoring tab:

16

Open CMs and SCMs for Online Monitoring.

Activate/Deactivate CMs and SCMs.

Change controller parameters and upload the changes.

Update changes to the Project database.

Change monitoring/configuration parameters on the faceplate of CM blocks.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/30/2012

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
7

Action
Monitoring Tab Color Codes for C200/C200E:
1

2 3 4

6 7

1. Project Tree (gray)


2. Loaded, not monitoring (gray with black arrow)
3. Communication failure (red with black exclamation point)
4. Active (green)
5. Failed (red with white exclamation point)
6. Loaded, but no database (yellow with black exclamation point)

7. Idle / Inactive (blue)


ATTENTION
Refer to Knowledge Builder for more information on
color codes:
Experion R400 > Configuration > Control Building
Users Guide > Creating a Control module >
Control Builder block icon descriptions

Monitoring Tab Color Codes for C300:

1. Project Tree (gray)


2. No Communication (red)
3. No Database (Yellow)
4. Run or OK (Green with dotted border)
5. Idle (blue)
6. Run soft fail or Ok soft fail (green with cross mark)
7. Idle soft fail (blue with cross mark)
ATTENTION
Refer to Knowledge Builder for more information on color codes:
Experion R400 > Configuration > C300 Controller Users Guide
>C300 Controller Operation > Control Builder block icon
descriptions

4/30/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Control Builder Introduction


Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
9

Action
The Library Tree window has just a single tab named Library.
Library Tab

18

Lists devices, IOMs, PM I/O, Rail I/O, and Function Blocks.

Click the + icon against an item in the Library Window to expand and view the
blocks.

Drag the blocks into a CM or SCM as appropriate, to form a control strategy.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/30/2012

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson you will learn to configure C200/C200E hardware and I/O
using Control Builder.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify C200/C200E hardware, slot numbers and addressing
Configure and download hardware configurations for these components

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E


Hardware and I/O

Honeywell

Topics
Hardware and Slot Numbers

Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE

Configuring IOMs

Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs

Activating a CEE

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

4/13/2012

Honeywell

C200/C200E Chassis Hardware


Below is an example C200/C200E chassis configured with:

1
2
3
4

10-slot chassis

5
6
7
8

Power supply
ControlNet Interface (CNI)
or FTE Bridge
Control Processor (C200/C200E)

IO Link Interface Module


Fieldbus Interface Module
Redundancy Module
CNI to Remote I/O

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

Honeywell

C200/C200E I/O Slot Numbers

To determine the slot location of C200/C200E related hardware you


must:
Start counting at zero (do not count the power supply)
Count from left to right
Count both spaces if the module occupies two spaces

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Hardware and Slot Numbers
Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE

Configuring IOMs
Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs
Activating a CEE

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

Power Supply

Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB)

Honeywell

Single-wide chassis module


Connects to FTE cable A and B
Supports chassis redundancy
Can only be used for Supervisory
Control Network connection
ControlNet and downlink CNIs
required for all I/O communications
including peer-to-peer to AB devices
Rotary switch for FTE Node Number (1 to 99)
The last octet of the IP address of the FTEB can be set to higher than 99 by
configuring the Base IP address accordingly in System Preferences.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB), contd.

Honeywell

The FTEB can be used for FIM-only connections to the supervisory


network.
In the Project and Monitoring tabs in Control Builder you will see the
FTEB as the root for the CPM.
You will set up the FTEB using IP addresses.
An FTE community can only have 99 FTEBs so you are limited to 49
redundant pairs and 99 single FTEBs in one community.
The FTE connection to the FTEB is 10Mbps.
10Mbps is only supported in FTE for connection from an FTEB to a switch
and nowhere else

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring a FTEB

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: FTEB Index Numbering


Which of the following is not a valid FTEB device index number?
A) 15
B) 99
C) 110
D) 1

TheIncorrect.
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Correct.
110'
110'isis
not
notaavalid
validFTEB
FTEBindex
index
number.
The answer
last octet
the FTEBbefore
IP address
You must
theofquestion
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
answer
answered
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
can be set to higher
than 99 by configuring the
continuing
base IP address accordingly in System
Preferences in Control Builder.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Clear

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

4/13/2012

Must match the hardware switches


found on top of the FTEB card.

Honeywell

Configuring a C200

Follow these steps to add a


new control processor
module (CPM) from the pulldown menus.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

11

Honeywell

Configuring a C200 CPM Main Tab ControlNet


Data entry details
will be provided in
the lab exercise

Tag Name & Item Name


ControlNet

Driver Name

CNI slot #
Slot number of CPM

MAC ID of CNI Card


connected to server

Alarm reporting by CEE

Check for the redundant controller and


then enter its name.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring a C200 CPM Main Tab Ethernet


Data entry details
will be provided in
the lab exercise

Ethernet Network
Driver Name
Slot Number

The This Controller is Redundant


option is selected when building the
FTEB

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Redundant Controller &


Name

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

13

Configuring a C200 Server History Tab

Honeywell

History parameters and control level required to operate this CPM

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

4/13/2012

When the Driver Name


selected is an FTEB:

Honeywell

Configuring a C200 Group and Trend Assignment

Point, group, trend and associated


displays (that reside on the server) are
defined on the Server Displays tab.

Select OK to close and save the new


controller.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

15

Honeywell

Question 2: Supervisory MAC Address for a CPM


When configuring a ControlNet connected
control processor module (CPM) in Control
Builder, which MAC address is entered as
the Supervisory MAC address?
A) The device index of FTEB card
B) The MAC address of the PCIC card
C) The MAC address of CNI card
connected to the I/O rack
D) The MAC address of CNI card
connected to server
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You must
answer
the question
beforeisisthe
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
The
Supervisory
Supervisory
MAC
MAC
address
theMAC
MAC
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
toaddress
continue
continue
completely
continuing
address of the CNI
card connected to the server.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Clear

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring a C200E

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Honeywell

Configure C200E Main Tab

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

4/13/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

4/13/2012

Follow the Step to configure


new C200E controller

C200E Configuration Simulation Tab

Honeywell

To create either a C200E or a SIM-C200E


File > New > Controllers > C200E Control Processor Module (16M)

Select the check box for


simulation Node Configuration

Select the check box , if the node


is connected to ControlNet
Network

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

19

Initiating the Configuration of the CEE

Honeywell

The Control Processor Module (CPM) and its Control Execution


Environment (CEE) are configured but not yet downloaded.

Click the + sign to expand


the CPM in the Project tab.

Double-click the CEE to


open its configuration
form.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

4/13/2012

CEE Main Tab Name, Base Execution Period

Honeywell

The Main tab configuration of the CEE block.

System assigned or user configured unique


name (consisting of up to 16 characters and
at least one letter A-Z)

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

21

Main Tab C200 CEE Command State

Honeywell

The Main tab is used for the configuration of the CEEC200 block.
Select the command to change the
CEESTATE parameter; options are:
IDLE, COLDSTART, WARMSTART

Indicates the current state of the CEE

Select the user level required to


perform a coldstart or a warmstart

Select the user level required to


Idle the CEE

Determines whether program access is


allowed to command the CEE from Idle
to Run and from Run to Idle
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

4/13/2012

Indicates the base execution


period for the CEE block
- 5 ms (non-Redundant)
- 50 ms (non-Redundant or
Redundant)

Honeywell

Main Tab C200 Alarm Info

Indicates if an alarm has been


detected with this function block

Allows user to set the alarm reporting


function used when an alarm condition
is detected by the function block
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

23

Main Tab C200E CEE Simulation, State, and Time Info

Honeywell

Select the CEE state after


a RAM retention restart
Options: Idle, LastCold,
LastWarm

Indicates Simulation State of


C200E controller in Monitoring

Shows the time zone offset value


for the controller location

Explained later
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Restart Initialization Delay

Integer configuration value establishes an initialization delay, in


seconds, to be applied to all CMs within the CEE following a restart
RSTRTINIDLY allows CMs within CEE to come into alignment with the
process following a RAM Retention Restart or a Checkpoint Restore
Default value is 10 seconds
When CEE restart occurs, CEE.RSTRTINIDLY and CM.RELOADINIDLY are
used to compute starting value of CM.CURRELINIDLY as follows
CM.CURRELINIDLY = CM.RELOADINIDLY + ( CEE.RSTRTINIDLY /
CM.PERIOD)

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

25

Honeywell

Batch Tab
Applies to: C200, C200E, C300, ACE

Indicates the buffer size allocated for batch


events generated by SCM/RCM.
Options are:
None, Small, Medium, and Large

Small = 120 events


Medium = 240 events
Large = 720 events

This item can be


changed only from
the Project tab.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

4/13/2012

Applies to: C200E, C300, ACE

Server History and Server Displays Tabs

Honeywell

Server History Tab -- Access Levels, History Configuration

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Hardware and Slot Numbers
Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE
Configuring IOMs

Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs


Activating a CEE

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Methods to Add Input/Output Modules (IOMs)


Three methods to add an IOM:
From the Library:
Drag and drop onto the CEE
Drag and drop onto a blank area
From the Menu:
File>New>I/O Modules>IOMODULE>

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

29

Honeywell

Different Actions Based on Method Used


Method Used

Name New
Dialog?

Drop on CEE

Yes

No

Drop to Blank

Yes

Yes

Menu

No

Yes

Depending on the method


used to add the IOM, your
IOM may be automatically
assigned to your CEE, or it
may be put in Unassigned.

Depending on the method


used to add the IOM, you
may or may not be presented
with this dialog box.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Put in
Unassigned?

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring an IOM

Module slot number

MAC address of the remote


racks CNI card
0 if IOM is in CPM chassis

Double
Click

Slot number of the CNI in


the processor rack through
which this card will
communicate.
Zero if IOM is in CPM chassis

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

4/13/2012

31

Honeywell

Assigning IOMs
Required if the menu method
was used, or if the IOM was
dropped onto a blank area.

1b
3

1a

Assigned
to CEE

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 3: Configuring an IOM


Before loading an IOM, it must be:
A) Activated
B) Assigned
C) Renamed
D) Validated

Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You must answer the question before
Incorrect.
Correct!
Before
you
you
can
can
load
load
IOMs,
they
theymust
mustbe
be
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
notBefore
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
toIOMs,
continue
continue
completely
continuing
assigned to the Control Execution Environment.
Click anywhere to continue.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Clear

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Hardware and Slot Numbers
Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE
Configuring IOMs
Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs

Activating a CEE

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

4/13/2012

Submit

Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs

Honeywell

Right
Click

Not yet
loaded

Load:
C200 & CEE

Load with Contents:


C200 & CEE & IOMs

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs, contd.

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Verify that the


items to load are
checked.

Note:
You can decide to have the
modules go to the active state
automatically by clicking this
checkbox, with the Post Load State
selected, to be Active.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Hardware and Slot Numbers
Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE
Configuring IOMs
Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

37

Honeywell

Activating a Control Strategy

Double-click CEE

This can be done only


from the monitoring
tab (not the Project tab).
Another method is to
right-click on the CEE
and select Change
State.

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Select COLDSTART
or WARMSTART

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

4/13/2012

Activating a CEE

Honeywell

Activating a Control Strategy, contd.

Click Yes

Blue:

The object is not running (inactive)

Green:
Red:

The object is running (active)

Communication failure

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

4/13/2012

39

Honeywell

Summary

When configuring and loading C200/C200E hardware and I/O in Control Builder,
remember:

To determine the IOM slot number of hardware in the C200 chassis, start counting at
zero, but do not count the power supply, count from left to right and count both spaces
if the module occupies two spaces.
An FTEB Index number can not be set to higher than 99.

However, the last octet of the IP address can be higher than 99

The Supervisory MAC address of the CPM is the MAC address of the CNI card
connected to the server.
C200E has a separate Simulation Tab to configure a simulated C200E
Before loading the Control Processor Module (CPM), its Control Execution
Environment (CEE), and I/O modules (IOMs):
Configure the CPM, its CEE and I/O modules (IOMs)
Assign the IOMs to the CEE

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O

Completion
Certificate

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

41

4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

42

21

4/13/2012

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson you will learn to configure a C300 Controller and


Series C I/O.
PMIO configuration will be discussed in a separate lesson.
The steps for configuration are similar to the C200/C200E configuration:
Add a new Controller to the Project hierarchy
Control Builder adds the CEE and two IOLINK modules
Configure the Controller
Configure the CEE
Configure the IOLINKs (PMIO or Series C IO)
Configure the IOMs
Assign the IOMs to the IOLINKs
Load the Controller, CEE, IOLINKS, and the IOMs
Activate the CEE

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell

Topics

Configuring the C300 and CEE


Configuring IOLINKs
Configuring IOMs
Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs
Activating the C300

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring a Controller

Follow these steps to


add a new controller
from the pull-down
menus

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring a Controller Main Tab


Data entry
details will be
provided in the
lab exercise.

Name

Check for
redundant controller

Device index
Number of C300
This number must
match the number of
the switches on the
C300 IOTA.

Select to
Configure a
SIM-C300

Enter details of Simulation


Environment Node
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring a Controller Server History Tab

History parameters and control level required to operate this C300

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Configuring a Controller Group and Trend Assignment

Honeywell

Point, group, trend and associated


displays (residing on the server) are
defined on the Server Displays tab

Select OK to close and


save the new controller

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

C300 View in Control Builder

C300, CEE, and


IOLINKs

Redundancy

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring a CEE

For C300, the options for


Base Execution Period are:
50mS and 20mS
20mS is selected only
for the Turbo Machinery C300

Data entry details will


be provided in the Lab
exercise

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Main Tab C300 CEE RAM Retention


Main Tab Powerup Restart Settings

Shows the CEE state after


a RAM retention restart
Options: Idle, LastCold,
LastWarm, LastTimeout

Shows the power down timeout that indicates whether the


CEE block executes a warm or cold restart upon power up
Only used if LastTimeout was selected for the CEE State

Shows the time zone offset value


for the controller location

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell

Question 1: C300 Configuration

Which of the following statements is not true for C300 configuration?


A) Device Index number on the C300
IOTA needs to be specified
B) 2 IOLINKs are automatically created
C) Only one IOLINK is automatically created for
Series C I/O
D) 50ms Base Execution Period is supported for
non-redundant C300 configuration
The
answer is:
Yourcorrect
answer:
Incorrect.
falsethe
statement
"Only one
You mustThe
answer
questionisbefore
Incorrect
-Click
Click
anywhere
tocontinue
continue
You
did You
not
answer
answered
thisthis
question
correctly!
completely
Correct
-automatically
anywhere
to
Correct!
IOLINK
is
When
acontinuing
C300
controller
created
for
is created
Series C
in
Control
I/O".
I/O".When
When
Builder
aa C300
C300
2 IOLINKS
controller
controller
are is
automatically
is created
created in
in
added. are automatically
Control Builder 2 IOLINKS
added.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Clear

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Configuring the C300 and CEE

Configuring IOLINKs
Configuring IOMs
Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs
Activating the C300

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

IOLINK Configuration Link 1

I/O family selection

I/O Link number 1 Cable - Gray

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

IOLINK Configuration Link 2

I/O Link number 2 Cable - Violet

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell

Configuring C300 Hardware

The Control Processor Module (CPM) and its Control Execution


Environment (CEE) are now configured but not yet downloaded.

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 2: IOLINK Configuration

Which of the following items are specified during IOLINK configuration?


A) Series C or PM IO, one type on each IOLINK
B) Series A I/O type
C) Whether Series C and PM IO are to be used on
the same IOLINK

Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
When
configuring
an
only
Incorrect.
When
configuring
anIOLINK
IOLINK
onlyone
one
You must
answer
the question
before
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
type of IO
family
can
becorrectly!
connected
to each
continuing
IOLINK i.e. Series C or PM IO, one type on each
link.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Clear

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Configuring the C300 and CEE
Configuring IOLINKs

Configuring IOMs
Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs
Activating the C300

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

17

Honeywell

Methods to Add Input/Output Modules (IOMs)


Three methods to add an IOM:
From the Library:
Drag and drop onto an IOLINK
Drag and drop onto a blank area
From the Menu:
File>New>I/O Modules>SERIES_C_IO

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell

Different Actions Based on Method Used


Method Used

Name New
Dialog?

Put in
Unassigned?

Drop on IOLINK

Yes

No

Drop to Blank

Yes

Yes

Menu

No

Yes

Depending on the method


used to add the IOM, your
IOM may be automatically
assigned to your IOLINK, or it
may be put in Unassigned.

Depending on the method


used to add the IOM, you
may or may not be presented
with this dialog box.

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring an IOM

IOM number
Double
Click
This number must
match the number of
the jumper plug on
the IOTA

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Assigning IOMs
Required if the menu method
was used, or if the IOM was
dropped onto a blank area.

1b
3

1a

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Configuring the C300 and CEE
Configuring IOLINKs
Configuring IOMs

Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs

Activating the C300

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Assigned
to IOLink

Honeywell

Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs


Click

Right-Click

Not yet
loaded

Load:
C300, CEE, IOLinks

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Load with Contents:


C300, CEE, IOLinks, IOMs

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs Post Load State

Honeywell

Verify that the items


to load are
checked.
Note:
You can decide to
have the modules go
to the run state
automatically by
clicking this checkbox
with the Post Load
State selected to be
Run.

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 3: IOP Configuration


Assigned Series C I/O modules appear under:
A) The Unassigned tree in Project tab
B) Their associated IOLINK tree in Project tab
C) Directly under the CEE tree in Project tab

The correct
Your
answer:answer is:
Correct! The assigned I/O modules appear
You must
answer
the question
before
Incorrect
-Click
Click
anywhere
to
continue
You
answered
correctly!
Incorrect.
assigned
I/O
modules
appear
Correct
-The
anywhere
continue
You
did
notthe
answer
thisthis
question
completely
under
IOLINK
tree
into
Project
tab.
continuing
under the IOLINK
tree in Project tab.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Configuring the C300 and CEE
Configuring IOLINKs
Configuring IOMs
Loading the C300, IOLINKs and IOMs

Activating the C300

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Clear

Honeywell

Activating a Control Strategy

This can be done only


from the monitoring
tab (not the Project tab).
Another method is to
right-click on the CEE
and select Change
State.

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Select WARMSTART

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Changing the State of a Controller Confirming Change

Honeywell

Click Yes

Blue: The object is not running (inactive)


Green: The object is running (active)
Red: Communication failure

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

When you configure and load C300 hardware and I/O in Control Builder,
remember:
C IOM number is set on the IOTA of the corresponding IOM using a
Series
numbered jumper plug.
The device index of C300 can be found on the rotary switches located in

front of the C300 board.


Before loading the C300 controller, its Control Execution Environment (CEE)
and IOLINKs:
Configure the Controller, its CEE and IOLINKs
Define the I/O Family type on each IOLINK
Assign the IOMs to the respective IOLINKs
the C300 controller, its Control Execution Environment (CEE) and
Load
IOLINKs
Activate the C300 from the CEE.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration


4/13/2012

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in


Control Builder

Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson you will learn how to


import and export control strategy
configurations from one server to
another.
At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will be able to:
Describe how to export control
strategy configurations from a
Control Builder project.
Describe how to import control
strategy configurations into a
Control Builder project.

Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

4/13/2012

Honeywell
The Export function lets you The exported portions or all of the
ERDB are stored in the Ixport folder at
export all or a portion of the
the directory location:
ERDB viewed in the Project
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Tree to the Ixport folder or a
Experion PKS\Ixport
user-defined location.

Control Builder - Export

Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder - Import/Export

CM, SCM and hardware configurations (IOMs) can be moved between


servers using the Import/Export function
Control Builder
(Server 1)

Control Builder
(Server 2)

Control
Strategy
Configuration

Control
Strategy
Configuration

Project
Tree

Ixport Directory

Import
Data

Export
Data
Controllers, CEEs,
IOLINKs should be
built from scratch,
not exported/imported.

Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Project
Tree

The servers must be


running the same
release.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder - Export

In Control Builder, select File > Export to call up the dialog box shown:
All items in current
project use selection
buttons (or use
<Ctl> + mouse
select or <Shift> +
mouse select to
export specific CMs
from the point
window)

All items in Current


project

Import\Export text
files target location

List of items to Export


based on selections
from window
(Export.sl)
Select to start export

Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder - Export

Exporting Data Dialog Box

Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Control Builder - Import

In Control Builder, select File > Import to call up the dialog box shown:
Use selection buttons
(or use <Ctl> + mouse
select or <Shift> +
mouse select to import
specific CMs from the
Point window)

All items in Current


Import/Export text Files
location

List of items to Import


based on Selections from
Window (Import.sl)

Import\Export text Files


target location

Import and Assign

Select to start Import

Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

The export function


automatically creates
an export.sl file.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Importing and Exporting

Which of the following statements best describes the import/export function?


A) Only the hardware configuration
can be moved between servers
B) CMs, SCMs and the hardware
configuration can be copied and
restored to another server
C) Only CMs can be moved between
servers
D) None of the above

Yourcorrect
answer:
The
answer is:
You
mustCMs,
answer
theand
question
before
Correct!
CMs,
SCMs
and
the
the
hardware
hardware
Correct
anywhere
to
Incorrect
-Click
ClickSCMs
anywhere
tocontinue
continue
YouIncorrect.
did You
not -answer
answered
thisthis
question
correctly!
completely
continuing
configuration can
be copied and restored to
another server.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Clear

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary
The Import/Export function in Control Builder:

you to copy CM, SCM and hardware configurations from one


Allows
servers ERDB to another servers ERDB
The export server and the import server must be running the same
release
Controllers should be built from scratch, not exported / imported
Includes CEE and IOLinks

Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure C200 Hardware in a Simulation Control


Environment (SCE) and Import the Remaining I/O Modules into the SCE
lab exercises
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

10

4/13/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: Controller Hardware Configuration


Contents
Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware ....................................................................................3
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E ............................................................5
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE ...................................................................29
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300 ................................................................37

Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300 .............................................................................49

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware

Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware


Introduction
This portion of the lab describes how to follow the Controller Hardware Configuration lab.
Procedure

Step
1

Action
Select ONLY one of the following:
Read the IMPORTANT information below.

In class, students can choose to configure hardware and points for either a C200E, or a
C300. It is not possible for students to complete labs for both. Therefore, each student
must decide whether they will configure hardware and points for a C200E, or a C300.
There are several reasons that only one or the other can be done: Time allocated to the
course (1 week), Tag names cannot be duplicated on a server, the AC simulator Excel
spread sheet, the AC HMI Web pre-built displays, etc.
Please select whether you will be performing labs for the C200E (and Series A I/O
modules) or for C300 (and Series C I/O Modules). Select only one of the following:

_______

C200E (and Series A I/O modules)

_______

C300 (and Series C I/O Modules)

If you selected:
C200E (and Series A I/O modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the first two sections):
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE


C300 (and Series C I/O Modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the second two sections):
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Import the Remaining Series C IO Modules into the SCE

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Controller Hardware Configuration


Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E


Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn to create a SIM-C200E. You will also learn that an associated Control
Execution Environment (CEE) block represents an installed SIM-C200E controller in the Project
Tree. The CEE supports execution of Control Modules (CMs) for simulating control applications.
The CEE runs in the SCE controller as a software layer built on top of the control software
infrastructure.
Objective

Configure a SIM-C200E (Simulation Control Environment) Controller in Control Builder

Configure a CEE in Control Builder

Configure Input Output Modules. (3 Analog Input modules, 2 Analog Output Modules, 1
Digital Input Module, 2 Digital Output modules)

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server setup and configured to run SCE controller

Note:

You must note the names, for the SIM-C200E, CMs, and FBs used in Control Modules and IOMs,
in your lab exercises. These are the names used, in the Excel tie back sheet, for simulation purpose.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Complete the Following Steps in Control Builder


Create an SIM-C200E

Step

Action

Launch Control Builder Application from Configuration Studio

Add a new Simulation Controller


With the Project Tab selected, select File > New > Controllers > C200E

ATTENTION
C200E and SIM-C200E share the same template

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
3

Action
Enter the Data for each configuration parameter for Main tab
Name: SCE59 and Item Name: SCE59_item
The name can be up to 16 characters

Alarm Enabled: Ensure this checkbox is checked to enable alarming for this SCE
Let all other values on this tab remain at the defaults
Select Load to simulation Environment.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step

Action

6
ATTENTION
Enter the Host Name of your Experion Server
(E20ESVxx) and press Enter. The Host IP Address
should automatically be entered. If it is not, get the IP
address from your course manager.
Host Name Simulation node name

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
7

Action
Click the Server History Tab. Keep the default values on this tab

A) Control Level: The minimum control level (between 0 and 255) required to
perform supervisory control on this point. The default is 200. Keep the default.

B) History Configuration Grid: Supports the configuration of associated point


parameters for history collection. Leave it blank.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
8

Action
Click the Server Displays Tab. Keep the default values.

A
B

A) The Point Detail Display is used to show detailed point information. If you leave the
value as (default), the standard detail display is used for the point type. You can
create your own point detail display and enter the display name here.
B) The Group Detail Display is used to display point information when the point is part
of a group. If you leave the value as (default), the standard group display is used.
Accept all the defaults on this tab

10

Click the OK button

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
10

Action
Click the PLUS sign + to the left of SCE59
Notice that SCE/CEESCEFB blocks are created in Project tab

ATTENTION
The Name of CEESIMC200FB_135, as shown in the above display,
may be different than your CEE.
Right-click your CEE and select Module Properties

11

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
12

Action
Change the Tag Name to CEESCEFB61 and the Item Name to CEESCEFB61_item
Click Help for additional details of each parameter
Click OK
This completes configuring the CEE for SCE Controller

13
14
15

12

In the Project Tree window, select SCE59.


Click the

button on the Control Builder toolbar to download the SCE59 controller

Click Continue in the Load window

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
16

Action
Click OK in the Load Dialog window

ATTENTION

If any error message displays while downloading,


contact your course manager.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
17

Action
Choose one of the following options, depending on your preference:
1. Open two Project/Monitor tree windows. On one of the windows, select the
Project tab. On the other window, select the Monitoring tab
2. Open only one Project/Monitor tree window. Select the Project tab or the
Monitoring tab as needed
Option 1 is shown here:

Monitoring Window

14

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
18

Action
In the Monitoring Tree, expand all items

ATTENTION
The SCE59 block appears as a blue icon indicating it
is loaded to the database but not yet active.
The CEESCEFB61 block also appears in blue
indicating it is loaded into the database but not yet
active.

Right-click CEESCEFB61, and Select Module Properties

19

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
20

Action
Select WARMSTART from the drop down list for CEE Command

TIP
Performing a Warm start, all strategies retain old values (values prior
to controller power loss). This is also called RAM Retention Restart
(RRR). To perform a Warm Start, the battery must be in good
condition.
Performing a Cold start, all strategies are initiated with default values.

16

21

Select YES

22

Click OK

23

SCE59 and CEESCEFB61 should now be green (active).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Configure C200E Racks and Rail I/Os


This section familiarizes you with the different types of available C200E IOMs (Input/Output
Modules). Configure IOMs according to the instructions in the following steps. Use the names
provided in the lab exercise for the I/O Modules.

Step
1

Action
Choose one of the following options, depending on your preference:
1. Open two Project/Monitor tree windows. On one of the windows, select the
Project tab. On the other window, select the Monitoring tab
2. Open only one Project/Monitor tree window. Select the Project tab or the
Monitoring tab as needed
Option 1 is shown here:

Project Tree
window
Monitoring Tree window

Library Tree window

4/13/2012

Return to the Project Tree Window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
3

Action
Select File > New > I/O Modules > IOMODULE in the Control Builder menu.
This gives the list of all available C200E IO Modules

NOTE: The system being built will have architecture, as shown below.

Built
Manually

Imported

18

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
4

Action
Select TC-IAH061 Analog Input Module, 6 Channel, 10V/ 4-20mA, Isolated.

A
B
C
D
E

A) Change the Module Name to AI_3_4_4.


Enter the Item Name AI_3_4_4_Item
B) Enter Module Description as Isolated Analog I/P in Slot 3 CNI MAC 4.
C) Enter the IOM Slot Number as 3. This is the Physical slot number of the I/O
module being configured.
D) Enter the Remote IO Chassis MAC Address as 4. This is the MAC address of the
CNI Card from the I/O Rack where this IOM resides.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

E) Enter ControlNet Module Slot Number as 4. This is the slot number of the CNI
card in the control rack to which the I/O chassis communicates. This value is
zero for local IOMs.

19

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
5

Action
Click the Server Displays tab and enter Group # as 100, Pos # as 1.

20

Click the point selection button in the Group Parameter column

In the Point Selection Window

Select the module AI_3_4_4

Select CEESTATE from the Parameters window

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
In the IOMODULE dialog box, click OK.

Action

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
8

Action
Expand the Unassigned section, to view the AI module.
The module appears in the Unassigned section, as shown below.

9
10

22

Select AI_3_4_4
Click the
controller.

button on the Control Builder toolbar to assign the IOM to the SCE59

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step

Action

11

Select AI_3_4_4 from the Available Modules list, select CEESCEFB61 from the Assign
To list, and click the Assign button to assign this IOM to CEESCEFB61.

ATTENTION

Since you can have up to 20 controllers associated


with one Experion Server, there could have been
several controllers (each with its own CEE) listed, in
which case you would pick the CEE to which you were
assigning the IOM. In the lab exercise we are building
one C200E; therefore, only one CEE will be shown in
the Assign To list.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

24

Step

Action

12

AI_3_4_4 is assigned to CEESCEFB61, as shown below.

13

Click Close.

14

If required, expand SCE59 and CEESCEFB61 by clicking on the


project tab.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

buttons in the

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
15

Action
Expand the I/O.

The AI_3_4_4 IOM can be seen under the tree of CEESCEFB61

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
16

26

Action
Add a Digital Input module.

Click File > New> I/O Modules > IOMODULE

Select the module TC-IDD321 Digital Input, 32 ch, 24V DC

Enter the Module Name as DI_10_4_4 under the main tab

Enter the Item Name as DI_10_4_4_Item

Enter the Module Description as Digital Input in Slot 10 CNI MAC 4

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
17

Enter the I/O Rack Addresses for this IOM, as follows:

IOM Slot Number as 10

Remote IO Chassis MAC Address as 4

Control Net Module Slot Number (connected to I/O Chassis) as 4

Select the Server Displays tab.

Enter the Group # as 100, Pos # as 6, Group Parameter as


DI_10_4_4.CEESTATE

Click OK

18

Action

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

28

Step

Action

19

Click the OK button, and the module DI_10_4_4 will be added in the Unassigned list, as
shown below

20

Assign the DI_10_4_4 module to CEESCEFB61. Refer to the steps above, if any help is
required

21

Verify that the DI module is now assigned to the SCE59 controller, as shown above

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE


Practice
Objective

Import the remaining hardware modules

Observe the operation of the Import/Export function

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server setup and configured to run an SCE controller

Introduction

To study the Import/Export facility of Control Builder, we will import the other IOMs into
the database. Using the Import/Export functionality, you can copy/paste items from one
project to other

A Project file can contain many items such as IOMs and CMs. From Control Builder you
can use the Import/ Export tool to copy part or all of one project to another

Import copies designated function blocks from the Import/Export files located in the
directory shown in the Import form to the Control Builder Project. In this lab we will Import
the remaining Input/Output modules into the Project. These IOMs are pre-configured,
already exported and located in the following directory:

C:\Users\Public\ Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\


Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

Complete the Following Steps Using Control Builder

Step
1

Action
In the Project window select File > Import to call up the import box.

Browse to: C:\Users\Public\ Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\


Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A and click OK in the Choose folder window.

After selecting a directory location, all the objects available for import are
displayed in the Object list box. The following Import dialog box example
contains only Control Modules (CMs)

ATTENTION
When the dialog box opens, the Project Tree window
closes automatically.
Your list may be different and contain additional items.

30

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

Step
2

Action
Select only the following Blocks from the Object list:
1. AI_5_4_4
2. AI_8_4_4
3. AO_4_4_4
4. AO_7_4_4
5. DO_6_4_4
6. DO_9_4_4
Selection can be done with the <SHIFT> button or the <CTRL> button.

Keep the option Import CEE Assignments selected


ATTENTION

This option imports and assigns the above items to the CEESCEFB61.
If this option is not selected, then the imported function blocks are
imported as unassigned blocks. The assignment option can be used
because the items being imported are being assigned to the same
named SCE/CEE from which they were exported.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

31

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

Step

Action

Click the Import button. The following dialog box will appear, indicating the status of the
import.

ATTENTION
After a successful Import, this dialog box closes.

32

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

Step
4

Action
Open the Project Tree window, if not already open.
1. After importing all required modules, the I/O listed will appear similar to the
illustration below

5
6

Click the

button and download all the I/O modules.

Click Continue in the Load window.

Press and hold the <CTRL> key and select all the I/O modules one by one.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

33

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

34

Step

Action

Verify that the checkboxes, shown below, are selected.

Click OK to start the download.

10

Click the Monitoring tab and verify that all the IOs are loaded and active (green).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

Step

Action

11

Start Station if not already open.

12

To call the Group display, press <F6> and enter 100 in the message zone.

13

Click OK.

1. The status of all IO modules is displayed.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

35

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

This page was intentionally left blank.

36

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300


Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn how to configure a simulated C300, referred to as a SIM-C300. The SIMC300 supports full simulation of the C300 controller including load and execution of all function
blocks supported by the C300 controller, a CEE executing with the same base execution cycles,
blocks executing with the same block execution period selections, and interaction with Series C I/O
and PM I/O.
Objective
Configure a SIM-C300 Controller in Control Builder
Configure a SIM-C300 CEE in Control Builder
Configure the 2 IOLINKs
Configure Series C IOM
Download and activate the SIM-C300, CEE, and IOM
Verify online SIM-C300 controller in Control Builder
Verify online SIM-C300 CEE Statistics in Control Builder

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

37

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Procedure
Complete the Following Steps in Control Builder

Add a New SIM-C300 Controller

Step

Action

Open the Control Builder if not opened.

Click FileNew Controllers C300 Controller (2 I/O Links)

ATTENTION
C300 and SIM-C300 share the same template

38

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step
3

Action
Enter the Data for each configuration parameter as shown below.

The figure shows the configuration for SIM-C300 controller.


Name Enter the name as SIM_C300
Item Name - Enter SIM_C300Item
Select the check box option Load to simulation Environment
Host Name Simulation node name

ATTENTION

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Enter the Host Name of your Experion Server and


press Enter. The Host IP Address should
automatically be entered. If it is not, get the IP
address from your course manager.

39

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step

Action

Keep all the other settings as default.

Click the OK.

6
ATTENTION
The following Form Validation error is expected. For
a SIM C300, a device index is not necessary, and was
not entered. On a real C300, it would have been
necessary to enter a device index.
Click Close on Form Validation screen

40

Double click the CEE to open Module Properties.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Step

Action

Change the name to SIM_CEEC300, and change the Item Name to SIM_CEEC300Item.
Keep all the other settings as default and Click OK

Double click the first IOLINK to open Module Properties.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

41

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step
10

Action
Change the name to Series_C_IOLINK, and change the Item Name to
Series_C_IOLINKItem.
Select the I/O family as SERIES _C_IO_TYPE. Keep all other settings as default and
Click OK.

11

Double click second IOLINK to open Module Properties.

12

Change the name to PMIO_IOLINK, and change the Item Name to PMIO_IOLINKItem.
Select the IO family as PM_IO_TYPE. Keep all other settings as default and Click OK.

ATTENTION
This PMIO Link configuration is required to be done in
class for PM IOP configuration on the last day of this
course as part of optional PMIO Lesson.

42

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step

Action

Configure IO Modules for Series C IO.


Click File New I/O Modules Series_C _IO AI-HL High Level Analog Input

13

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

43

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step
14

Action
Tag Name Enter the name as C_AI_1
Item Name - Enter C_AI_1_Item
IOM Number - 1.

Keep all other settings as default and click OK.


15

Configure a Series C type Digital Input module- DI-HV- High Voltage digital Input, 32
channels
Tag Name Enter the name as C_DI_6
Item Name - Enter C_DI_6_Item
IOM Number 6
Keep all other settings as default and click OK.

16

Assign C_AI_1 and C_DI_6 to Series_C_IOLINK.

17

Select SIM_C300 in Project tree.

18

44

Click on

icon on the control builder tool bar to download the SIM-C300.

19

Click Continue, and click OK in the Load Dialog window.

20

Click the Monitoring tab and note that SIM_C300 blocks appear with S and it is blue
indicating that it is loaded, but is not active.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Step

Action

21

Right-click SIM_CEEC300 and select Change State. This will open Request Value
Change dialog box

22

Select the CEE Command WARMSTART, and select Yes when prompted for Change
Online Value

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

45

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step

Action

23
ATTENTION
The IOLINKs do not contain IOMs, so you have to load
IOMs separately.

Click on one of the IOMs in the Project window and click on the
Builder tool bar to download the IOM.

46

icon on the Control

24

Download both C_AI_1 and C_DI_6

25

Click the Monitoring tab. IOMs appear in blue indicating as loaded and inactive

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Step

Action

26

Right-click on each IOM and select Activate Selected Item(s). Select Yes when
prompted for change state.

27

The IOMs are green indicating that they are active.

28

The SIM C300 configuration is complete.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

47

Controller Hardware Configuration


Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

This page was intentionally left blank.

48

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300

Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300


Practice
Objective

Import the remaining hardware modules.

Observe the operation of the Import/Export function.

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server setup and configured to run an C300/SIM C300 controller.

Introduction

To study the Import/Export facility of Control Builder, we will import the other IOMs to
create in the database. Using the Import/Export functionality, you can copy/paste items from
one project to other.

A Project file can contain many items such as IOMs and CMs. From Control Builder you
can use the Import/ Export tool to copy part or all of one project to another.

Import copies designated function blocks from the Import/Export files located in the
directory shown in the Import form to the Control Builder Project. In this lab we will Import
the remaining Input/Output modules into the Project. These IOMs are pre-configured,
already exported and located in the following directory:

C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\


IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

49

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300

Complete the Following Steps Using Control Builder

Step
1

Action
In the Project window select File > Import to call up the import box.

Browse to: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\


IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C

After browsing to the directory location, all the objects available for import are
displayed in the Object list box.

ATTENTION
When the dialog box opens, the Project Tree window
closes automatically.
Your list may be different and contain additional items.

50

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300

Step
2

Action
Select only the following Blocks from the Object list:
C_AI_2
C_AI_3
C_AO_4
C_AO_5
C_DO_7
C_DO_8
Selection can be done with the <SHIFT> button or the <CTRL> button.

Keep the option Import CEE Assignments selected


ATTENTION

This option imports and assigns the above items to the


SIM_CEEC300. If this option is not selected, then the
imported function blocks are imported as unassigned
blocks. The assignment option can be used because the
items being imported are being assigned to the same
named SCE/CEE from where they were exported.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

51

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300

Step

Action

Click the Import button. The following dialog box will appear, indicating the status of the
import.

ATTENTION
After a successful Import, this dialog box closes.

52

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300

Step
4

Action
Open the Project Tree window, if not already open.
1. After importing all required modules, the I/O listed will appear similar to the
illustration below

5
6

Click the

button and download all the I/O modules to the database.

Click Continue in the Load window.

Press and hold the <CTRL> key and select all the I/O modules which have not yet been
downloaded.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

53

Controller Hardware Configuration


Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300

54

Step

Action

Verify that the checkboxes, shown below, are selected.

Click OK to start the download.

10

Click Continue if a Warning message is displayed.

11

Click the Monitoring tab and verify that all the IOs are loaded and active (green).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its


Connection Rules

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Overview
Series C I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender Module
Topology Series C IOM, PM IOP
Topology Type Daisy Chain, Star, Tree
Distance Limitation
Cabinet Layout
Specifications

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Overview

The C300 controller can now be connected remotely to Series C I/O or


PMIO through the use of an I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender (FOE)
module.
The same FOE cannot be used for Series C and PMIO connections
concurrently
Each FOE can connect to two remote sites:
Two fiber optic ports sets, FO1 and FO2
Ports have both receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx)

Mounting options:
IOTA
Din Rail
Stand Alone

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

Series C I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender Module


24V DC

4/13/2012

Honeywell
IOLINK cable
COMMON

Carrier
Mounting
Screws

Fiber Optic
Extender IOTA

Fuse
LED Indicators
FOE to IOTA
Mounting Screw

FOE to IOTA
power
connection

Fiber Optic
ports

I/O Link
Connector

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topology Series C IOM


IO Link
Cable

IOM

C300

Remote
Site A

1.5 Km Max.

1.5 Km
Max.

Fiber Optic
Cable

Remote
Site B

IOM
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

4 KM Max. (requires
IOLE every 1.5 km)

1.5 max between FOE with Standard Cable


Possible Configurations are:
Star

Daisy chain

Series C IOM

Tree (Star + Daisy chain)

Series C IOM

Series C IOM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topology PM IOP
IO Link
Cable

1.5 Km Max.

C300
1.5 Km
Max.

Fiber Optic
Cable

8 Km Max.
(requires
IOLE every
1.5 Km)

PM IOP
With IOLink Extender IOP

PM IOP
With IOLink Extender IOP
IOLink Extender
pair MC-IOLX02

Remote Site B

Remote Site A

1.5 Km
Max.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topology Type Daisy Chain

IOM
C300
IO Link
Cable

Main
Location

Remote
Site 1

Remote
Site 2

FOE

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Fiber Optic
Cable

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topology Type Star

IO Link
Cable
FOE
Main
Location

Fiber Optic
Cable

Remote
Site 3

Remote
Site 1

IOM

Remote
Site 2

Remote
Site 4

It is possible to have multiple fiber-optic extenders in any location, provided distance


limitations are observed and no more than 40 IOMs are on a single I/O Link.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topology Type Tree


IO Link
Cable

C300

FOE
Fiber1
Fiber2
Fiber3

Fiber1
IOM

Fiber2
Fiber3

IOM

Main
Location

Remote
Site 1

Remote
Site 2

Fiber Optic
Cable

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Distance Limitations with Series C


Main
Location

Remote
Site#1

d1

C300
IOM
IOM

d2
Remote
Site#3

Remote
Site#2

d4

Remote
Site#4

d3
IOM

IOM

IOM

Maximum distance of any single fiber-optic segment must be less than 1.5 km:

Maximum distance of any single leg must be less than 4.0 km. In above figure:

d1, d2, d3, d4 <= 1.5 km

0.25 + d1 + 0.25 <= 4.0 km


0.25 + d2 + 0.25 + d3 + 0.25 + d4 + 0.25 <= 4.0 km
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

10

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Distance Limitations with Series C Example 1


Main
Location

Remote
Site#1

d1 = 1.5 km

C300
IOM
IOM

d2 = 1.0 km

Remote
Site#2

d3 =
1.0 km

Remote
Site#3

IOM

Remote
Site#4

d4 =
1 km

IOM

IOM

The connections shown in figure above will work because:


d1(1.5), d2(1.0), d3 (1.0), d4(1.0) <= 1.5 km
0.25 + d1(1.5) + 0.25 = 2.0 <= 4.0 km
0.25 + d2(1.0) + 0.25 + d3(1.0) + 0.25 + d4(1.0) + 0.25 = 4.0 <= 4.0 km
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

4/13/2012

11

Honeywell

Distance Limitations with Series C Example 2


Main
Location

Remote
Site#1

d1 = 2.0 km

C300
IOM
IOM

d2 = 1.5 km

Remote
Site#2

d3 =
1.5 km

Remote
Site#3

IOM

d4 =
1 km

Remote
Site#4

IOM

IOM

The connections shown in above figure will not work because:


d1(2.0) which is not <= 1.5 km
0.25 + d2(1.5) + 0.25 + d3(1.5) + 0.25 + d4(1.0) + 0.25 = 5.0 km
which is not <= 4.0 km
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

12

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Cabinet Layout

C300
Controller

FOE can use


either Violet
or Grey IOL

Control
Firewall
FOE A
I/O Link
Extender for
Link A

Digital Input
Card

FOE B
I/O Link
Extender for
Link B

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

13

Honeywell

Specifications

Power Supply Options

Distance

4/13/2012

20 to 30V @ 200mA
Segment distance between FOE:
With Standard Cable: 1.5 Km
With Premium Cable: 2.0 Km
Total maximum IOLink length
Series C IO: 4 Km
PM IO: 8 Km
Propagation delay: Each FOE fiber optic converter subtracts a certain value from the
total IOLink length.
Series C IO: 0.25 Km per FOE
PM IO: 0.5 Km per FOE

Fiber-Optic
Fiber type: Multimode
Fiber core diameter: 62.5 mm
Fiber cladding diameter: 125 mm
Fiber connectors: ST type
Power budget: 8 db min, 15 db typical

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

14

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Describe the Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection


Rules

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

15

4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules

16

4/13/2012

Describe the Control Firewall Connections in


the Series C System

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

17

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Overview
Topology rules pertaining to the Control Firewall

Overview of FTE limits

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

18

4/13/2012

C300 Topology Rules Control Firewall

Honeywell

C300, Series C FIMs must be connected to the Control


Firewall.
The C300 and any FTEBs assigned to it must be on the same
control firewall.
No other device, such as FTEB for C200, Ethernet PLCs,
Stations or Servers can connect to the Control Firewall with the
exception of devices qualified for Peer Control Data Interface
like Safety Manager and Modbus Gateways (Explained in
Advance Course).
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

19

C300 Topology Rules Control Firewall

4/13/2012

Honeywell

The Control Firewall is connected by uplink to a L1 or


L2 switch. Connections can be Fiber Optic or STP
Cable.
Fiber Optic: 2 KM multi mode or 15 KM single mode.
STP cable: CAT 5 up to 100 M.
Control Firewalls cannot be cascaded.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

20

10

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Wiring Detail Series C Control Firewall


Fiber Uplink

STP Uplink
FTE Yellow/A

FTE Green/B

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

21

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C Control Firewall

100Base-FX
Uplink
(Media Converter
not shown)

10/100Base-TX
Ports

Control Firewall
Module

100Base-TX
Uplink

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

22

11

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C Control Firewall Module

Diagnostic LEDs
24VDC Power Present
Status/Alarm LED (bicolor blink when the alarm
occurs)
Activity LEDs for all ports

Activity LEDs
for Ports

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

23

How Many FTE Nodes Do You Have?

4/13/2012

Honeywell

An FTE Community can have no more than 330 FTE Nodes calculated
as follows:
Max. 125 Redundant FIMs per Server = 125 x 2 = 250
Max. 20 Redundant C300s per Server = 20 x 2 = 40
Max. 2 Redundant PGMs per Server = 2 x 2 = 4
Max. 40 Stations = 40
Max. 1 Redundant Server Pair = 2
Max. 7 ACE = 7
GRAND TOTAL: 343

If any FTEBs are present in the Community, the limit is 200 FTE Nodes.
Embedded FTE which is used in the C300, Series C FIM, and PGM is
at the MAC layer; therefore, yellow and green have same IP address.
Starting in R400, Servers and Workstations require only one IP address.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

24

12

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Control Firewall

Which of the following is not a valid connection to a Control Firewall?


A) Series C FIM
B) C300 Controller
C) FTEB for specific Series A IO
D) FTEB for C200

Incorrect.
Correct! FTEB
FTEBfor
forC200
C200controller
controllerisisnot
notaavalid
validdevice
deviceto
to
connect to Control Firewall. No device such as FTEB for
C200, Ethernet PLCs, Stations or Servers, can connect to
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
the Control Firewall
Correct
Incorrect
You
Youmust
did
- Click
not
-answer
Click
answer
anywhere
anywhere
thethis
question
to
before
You answered this correctly!
question
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click
anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Clear

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

4/13/2012

25

Honeywell

Summary

C300 and Series C FIM must be connected to the Control Firewall.

No other device, such as FTEB for C200, Ethernet PLCs, Stations or


Servers can connect to the Control Firewall (with the exception of devices
qualified for Peer Control Data Interface like Safety Manager and Modbus
Gateways to be explained in the Advance Course).

C300 and FTEB (for specific Series A IO and AB devices) associated to

it must be on the same Control Firewall.

The Control Firewall is connected by uplink to a L1 or L2 switch.

Control Firewalls cannot be cascaded.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

26

13

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Describe the Control Firewall connections in the


Series C System

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

27

4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System

28

14

4/13/2012

Define a Typical Series C Configuration

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Define a Typical Series C Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Putting the Pieces Together


RED
CF9

Series C IO

C300

FIM

RED
FIM

PMIO

Series A IO

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Define a Typical Series C Configuration


4/13/2012

C300 Controller I/O Link Configurations

Honeywell

IOLINK 1 and 2

FTE Yellow and Green

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Define a Typical Series C Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

How a Cabinet is Wired


Typical
I/O Link
Cable

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Define a Typical Series C Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C C300 Controller


IOTA

I/O Link # 1

FTE Device
index

C300 Controller
Module
I/O Link # 2

FTE
Battery connection
from power system

GPS Time Sync Input


(Future)

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Private path
redundancy (shielded
Twisted pair)

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Define a Typical Series C Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Wiring Detail Series C FIM

FTE Yellow/A

FTE Green/B
Fieldbus Links

Connection to
Fieldbus power
supply

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Define a Typical Series C Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Wiring Detail Series C Analog Input

IOLINK
Input Signal wiring

Shield Terminations

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Define a Typical Series C Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Connectivity

A C300 Controller has PM IO connected to both IO LINKs. Some of the


data is obtained from a remote monitoring system 5 km from the C300
cabinet. Which of the following is the correct option?
A) Extend the PM IO using IO Link Extender
B) Series C FIM
C) Series C IO

Correct!
Incorrect.
To get
Todata
getis:
from
data the
fromremote
the remote
vibrating
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
vibrating
monitoring
monitoring
system
extend
system
the
extend
PM IO
the
using
PM IO
You must
answer
the question
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
notusing
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
Link
IO Link
Extender.
Extender.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Clear

Define a Typical Series C Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary
C300 controllers, Series C FIM, and FTEB for Series A IO are

connected to the Control Firewall.

Series C and PM IO are connected to the C300 controller by the two IO

LINKs on the C300 Controller IOTA.


Series C and PM IO cannot be mixed on the same IOLINK

Remote PMIO is implemented using the PM IO Link Extender.

C300 can be associated to Series A IO directly via FTEB.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Define a Typical Series C Configuration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Define a Typical Series C Configuration

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Define a Typical Series C Configuration


4/13/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Describe Performance Calculations

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Overview
Each controller can be configured and used differently Ex:
Base execution period of the CEE
Number, type, execution period of CMs
Number, size of SCMs

Controller configuration determines its:


Processor loading
Memory used

Controller performance is expressed in units:


C200 & C200E:
Processing Units (PU)
Memory Units (MU)
C300 Execution Units (XU)
Control XU same idea (and sometimes referred to) as PU
Communication XU (peer-to-peer, display communication)
IO XU (IOLink sometimes referred to as Link Units)
Memory Units (MU) (C200/C200E/C300)
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

10

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell

Processing Unit (PU)

The measure of a controllers capacity to execute control strategies


Quantifies the amount of processing time necessary to complete a logic
execution

Items consuming PUs include: CMs, SCMs, Series A IOMs


Series C IOMs and PMIO do NOT consume PUs

PU specifications are defined based on a typical Control module types


Example:
A typical regulatory control (PID) CM consumes about 3 PUs
A Redundant C200s capacity is 1600 PUs
Approximately 530 Reg. Ctl CMs (executing once per second)

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Execution Unit (XU)

Because a single Processing Unit specification is not possible for a


C300 controller:
The concept of an Execution Unit (XU) is introduced to model how a C300
controllers processing power is spent.

Execution Unit (XU) is specific to the C300 controller and is required


because the C300 controller performs multiple functions such as:
Control CPU time used to execute control strategies (similar to PUs of a
C200).
IO CPU time used to support and communicate with IO on the two IO Links
and with ControlNet-resident Series A IO which is connected via FTEB
modules.
Communication CPU time used for communicating with peer nodes (e.g.
C300s, C200s, ACEs, FIM4s, etc.) and displays.

Execution Unit (XU) is a measure of C300 processing capability per


second:
1 XU of a C300 is logically equal to 1 PU of a C200/ACE.

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

C300 Communication XU

Execution Units (XU) required to support the specified communications


are calculated automatically from the following inputs:
Number of Peer Connections (node type is not critical) nodes considered
as peers include C300, C200/C200E, ACE, FIM4
Number of Console Stations associated with Experion Server/cluster
Number of Parameters per second for display throughput
Number of Messages per second
Number of Messages/second is calculated from the number of
Exchange blocks, Push block stores, and SCM block stores that initiate
and respond to requests.

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

C200 & C200E Resource Usage

Base represents Overhead processing done by the controller


Free is the recommended unused CPU capability
40% for 50ms C200/E, 60% for 5ms C200 (N/A for C200E)

Spend the CPU resources available in each C200 / C200E


Depending on requirements
16000 MU
100%

Free
PU Capacities:
50ms non-redundant 3600 PUs
50ms redundant 1600 PUs
5ms non-redundant 2400 PUs
C200 Only

4000 MU

Control

PUs
For user

Base
0%

C200E

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

10

C200

Honeywell

C300 Resource Usage


XU indicates the processing
power of the C300
Control (Control XU)
IO (IO XU)
Communication (Comm XU)

100%

Free
Comm

16000 MU

Control

Decide how to Spend the


CPU and memory resources
available in each C300
Controller

5500
XUs
For user
IO

Depending on requirements
Base
0%

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

PU and MU Table for C200/C200E


Typical Module Types

Processing Resource
Consumption (per module)

Memory
Resource
Usage

50/5 ms CEE
Non-Red
(PU/Module
Execution)

50ms CEE
Non-Red
(PU/Module
Execution)

50/5 ms CEE
Non-Red
(MU/Mod)

Typical IO Module (Average consumption


of available IOMs)

0.3

0.19

0.6

Analog Data Acquisition Module

2.9

3.8

7.4

Small Analog Data Acquisition Module

0.47

0.43

1.0

Regulatory Control Module

2.8

2.8

3.9

Auxiliary Function Module

4.2

5.1

13.1

Digital Data Acquisition Module

1.2

1.2

3.1

Device Control Module

1.3

1.3

3.1

Logic Control Module

1.0

1.0

3.5

SCM

2.0

3.0

28.9

Small Digital Data Acquisition Module

0.22

0.14

0.6

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

PU and MU Table for C300


Typical Module Types

Processing Resource
Consumption (per
module)

Memory
Resource
Usage

50ms C300
(PU/Module
Execution)

50 C300
(MU/Mod)

Typical IO Module (Average consumption of


available IOMs)

0.2

0.5

Analog Data Acquisition Module

4.2

7.3

Small Analog Data Acquisition Module

0.5

1.0

Regulatory Control Module

3.1

3.9

Auxiliary Function Module

0.7

6.4

Digital Data Acquisition Module

1.3

2.0

Device Control Module

1.2

2.5

Logic Control Module

1.4

3.9

SCM

5.0

27.9

Small Digital Data Acquisition Module

0.2

0.5

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Honeywell

PU and MU Calculation Example

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Processing Units (for a C200/Control XU for C300)


For a given Control Module

PU = (PU per cycle) / (cycle time, Sec)


Total for Complete Control Strategy

Total PUs = (No. of modules) x (Module PU) / (execution period, Sec) for each CM

Memory Unit

Processing Unit and Memory Unit calculation example for:

Memory Unit = (No. of modules) x ( Module MU)

Regulatory Control Modules = 2


Execution Period = 0.5 sec
Typical calculation for Regulatory Control module
(1 CM,1 AI Channel, 1 Data acquisition, 1 PID, 1 AO channel, 6 Logic)
PU

MU

Total PU

Total MU

C200/C200E

2.8

3.9

(2) x (2.8) / (0.5) = 11.2

(2) x (3.9) = 7.8

C300

3.1

3.9

(2) x (3.1) / (0.5) = 12.4

(2) x (3.9) = 7.8

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

10

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell

Correlation of PU/XU and % CPU loading

The following table shows an estimate of the number of PUs / XUs that will
cause 1% CPU loading
Correlation Table for 1% CPU loading
Controller

Number of PUs/XUs(~)

C200 (Non-Redundant)

50-60

C200 (Redundant)

20-30

C300

80-90

Note: All the values listed are approximate

Example: For a C300, control strategy using 2000 PU will amount to a % CPU
usage of 22.22%
Calculated by formula 2000 PU /90 = 22..22%, seen at CPUCYCLEAVG[40]
Free CPU would be approximately 77% (100% 22.22%), seen at CPUFREEAVG

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Monitor CPU % Loading

XU of C300 and PU of C200/C200E/C300 are not shown directly


Inferred in terms of CPU Usage and CPU Free

Recommended CPU free: C300: 20%, C200: 50ms: 40%, 5ms: 60%)

Displayed on faceplate of C200/C200E/C300 controller within Station


Within Control Builder for C300, this same information is on the statistics tab
of the controller template
For a C200/C200E this information is available on the statistics tab of
the CEE template

Minimum CPU Free (%)

Indicates minimum value recorded, since the controller power up or a last


statistics reset

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

C300 CPU Free Alarms

If the average free CPU available is lower than the limits (below), then
the following alarms are initiated
CPU Free Low
Threshold defaults to 20% and is user configurable
On the C300 properties Main tab
An alarm is generated when CPU Free is less than the threshold
Displayed on the System Alarm Summary
Priority - LOW

CPU Free Low Low


Threshold is fixed at 10% and is not user configurable
An alarm is generated when CPU Free is less than 10%
Displayed on the System Alarm Summary
Priority HIGH

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Honeywell

Execution Cycles (Phases)


Execution period and phase = execution cycle
CEE

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

CM

PHASE (cycle)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

37 38 39

1850
1950
1900
2000

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
TIME (ms)

This CEE base execution


period has 40 timing cycles
(phases) of 50 ms each

Example:

A CM with a one second execution period (1000 ms) and a phase of


0 would execute at phase 0 and again at phase 20
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

10

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell

CPU Loading Tab Cycle Loading Table

The CPU Loading tab is one of two tabs containing CPU statistics used
for maintenance and performance monitoring of the CEE
View the average CPU (CPUCYCLEAVG) and maximum CPU
(CPUCYCLEMAX) usage for a given control cycle (0 -39)
Cycle 40 is the overall average (or max)

Data shown is since last power up (or manual statistics reset)


Shows the historical
maximum of Central
Processor Unit (CPU)
processing power used
per cycle

Average percentage of
Central Processing Unit
(CPU) processing
power used per cycle

Data is shown only


when accessed from
the monitoring tab

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

CPU Loading Tab Parameters

Recommendations for C200s and C300s with 50 ms execution period


Parameter
CPUCYCLEAVG[40]

CPUCYCLEAVG[0..39]

CPUCYCLEMAX[40]

CPUCYCLEMAX[0..39]

Description

Recommended

Average CPU used across all 40 CEE


execution cycles

<60%

Average CPU used for individual cycles


Units are percent of 50 ms cycle. Index
corresponds to the cycle (phase)
number.

<60%

Maximum of CPU used for all 40 CEE


execution cycles

<85%

Historical maximum of the CPU used by


each execution cycle. Units are percent
of 50 ms cycle. Index corresponds to the
cycle (phase) number.

<85%

For C200 5ms, CPU Cycle average values should be less than 40%
For C300 20ms, CPU Cycle average values should be less than 50%
More details: Experion PKS Control Builder Components Theory manual
Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

CPU Overrun

An overrun occurs when any container blocks assigned to a cycle fail to


execute within the cycle
Indicates the CPU is scheduled to perform more tasks than can be
completed within a base cycle

Overruns are diagnostic events reported by the CEE as CPU cycle


overruns
Getting an overrun occasionally (may not be bad)
Ex: an overrun occurred when downloading a large number of CMs

Getting overruns periodically (this is bad)


The CPU is routinely deferring execution 1 (or more) CMs to the next cycle
Needs to be fixed
Note the cycle numbers
Load balance
Possibly remove control
Data is shown only
strategies (CMs, SCMs, etc.)
when accessed from
the monitoring tab
from the CEE
Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Cycle Overrun Alarm Conditions

The conditions for reporting and clearing overrun alarms are


summarized below.
A CEE configuration that causes regular overruns should be changed by
reducing the total load or rebalancing the load across timing cycles.
If Controller is . . .

CEE reports alarm if . . .

CPM (50 ms
BASEPERIOD)

Two consecutive intervals of Four consecutive


2000 milliseconds have at
intervals of 2000
least one cycle overrun.
milliseconds have no
cycle overruns.

ACE (500 ms
BASEPERIOD)

Two consecutive intervals of Four consecutive


intervals of 20 seconds
20 seconds have at least
one cycle overrun.
have no cycle overruns.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

10

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

CEE clears alarm if . . .

Honeywell

Load Balancing

Procedure by which overruns are eliminated or minimized by


automatically assigning scheduling parameters to container blocks.
Scheduling parameters
Period - The amount of time between two consecutive executions of a CM or
SCM block
Phase - Determines the set of cycles in which a container block executes
Execution Order - The time sequence in which container blocks execute

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Memory Units
Memory Unit (MU)

The units used to define the amount of memory used by control strategies
(CMs, SCMs, etc.)

The Memory tab indicates


Total user memory
Currently used memory
Currently Free memory

C200E,
C300
C200

Data is shown only


when accessed from
the Monitoring tab.

Total User Memory Units in Kb


Currently Used Memory

Currently Free Memory

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Memory usage exceeds limits


Memory usage exceeds limits
Currently Free Memory becomes negative.
Diagnostic alarm generated
Priority - Low

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Main Tab C300 Memory Exceeded Alarm

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell
Memory Exceeded Alarm is
generated if Currently Free
Memory is less than zero
(indicates a negative value)

Enable Memory Limit


Exceeded Alarm
If, during any 2-second interval, the maximum
count of redundancy bytes transferred each
cycle from primary to secondary C300 reaches
this value, a high-priority alarm is reported by the
CEE block
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

10

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell

EXECTIMER
Execution Timer Block (EXECTIMER)

Used to measure execution timing of Control Modules, SCMs, RCMs, UCMs


Used to measure the timing of individual basic blocks or groups of basic
blocks within Control module
Used to measure the execution time for Control Strategy to be reused

Supported controllers
C200E, C300, ACE, with their simulation environments and C300 20 ms

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

EXECTIMER Configuration and Limitations

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

EXECTIMER is used by creating two


instances
One instance marks beginning of
time interval
Other instance marks the end of a
time interval

Connect the output parameter of


beginning EXECTIMER to input
parameter of end EXECTIMER

Limitations: EXECTIMER cannot be


used for any of the following
purposes
Measuring timing effects between
Different execution Environments
Measuring timing effects between
Execution Environment and IO
Measuring timing effects between
Execution Environment and OPC
gateway or OPC server

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

A Processing Unit (PU) is defined as a platform independent entity


which quantifies the amount of processing time necessary to perform a
specific control processing task in a C200 or C200E.
An Execution Unit (XU) represents the same amount of processing
resources in a C300.
The amount of I/O Link bandwidth available for I/O scanning per second
is divided into 1000 units called Link Units (LU).
A Memory Unit (MU) represents 1 kilobyte or 1024 bytes.
C200 has 4000 MUs
C200E, C300 have 16000 MUs

EXECTIMER blocks are used to measure execution time of basic blocks


or groups of blocks

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe Performance Calculations

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe Performance Calculations


4/13/2012

10

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

This lesson introduces you to the control modules you will build later in
the course using Control Builder.

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Data Acquisition TI20

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Honeywell

PID FC01

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


4/13/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


4/13/2012

11
Honeywell

PID Split Range Outputs PC16

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Honeywell

Cascade PID LC14 and FC17

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


4/13/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


4/13/2012

Cascade PID with 2 Secondaries LC 14 , FC17 and FC18

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Device Control - Pumps

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Honeywell

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


4/13/2012

11
Honeywell

Device Control - Fans

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence


4/13/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

12

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for


Labs

EXCEL Simulation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson, you will learn how


the Excel Data Exchange program,
a licensed Honeywell option, works
with the Excel simulation
spreadsheet and process simulator
used in this course.

At the conclusion of this lesson,


you will be able to:
Identify the two function block
parameters available only in the
simulated control execution (SCE)
environment
Identify the three simulation modes
available in the SCE environment
Explain the purpose of closing and
reopening the spreadsheet after
configuring and loading new tags
to the system

EXCEL Simulation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

SIMVALUE and SIMMODE


SIMVALUE AND
SIMMODE are only
available for the SCE
environment.
SIMMODE provides three
modes:
NONE
DIRECTSUB
SIMVALSUB

SIMVALUE substitutes
the PV when the simmode
is in SIMVALSUB
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

EXCEL Simulation

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Simulation Spreadsheet

EULO

Tag
Function block
parameter

=G7

EUHI

Mode
select

Not<EULO
Not>EUHI

OP

Result of
two left
columns

The new PV

OP/100SPAN+EULO

Current
mode

Mode change
permit

Excel must be open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded


EXCEL Simulation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs


4/13/2012

Some of these tags will be built as a part of the lab and some imported.
There are tags configured in the spreadsheet which do not exist in the
Experion server at the start of the class.

EXCEL Simulation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Enabling Excel Simulation

To make Excel Spreadsheet Write enabled , uncheck Disable Writes


Via the Network API option

EXCEL Simulation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs


4/13/2012

12

Honeywell

Simulation Spreadsheet

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the Excel Simulation Used for Labs

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


EXCEL Simulation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

EXCEL Simulation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs


4/13/2012

13

Describe the Procedure to Build Control


Modules

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
In this lesson you will learn about
Experion control modules.
At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will be able to:
Build and edit control modules
Load, activate and monitor
control modules
Insert an OLE object in a control
module

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics

Building and Editing Control Modules


Loading, Activating and Monitoring Control Modules
Inserting an OLE Object in a Control Module

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Methods to Add a New Control Module (CM)


Three methods to add a CM:
From the Library:
Drag and drop onto a CEE
Drag and drop onto a blank area
From the Menu:
File>New>Control Module

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Different Actions Based on Method Used


Name New
Dialog?

Put in
Unassigned?

Drop on CEE

Yes

No

Drop to Blank

Yes

Yes

Menu

No

Yes

Depending on the method


used to add the CM, your
CM may be automatically
assigned to your CEE, or it
may be put in Unassigned.

Depending on the method


used to add the CM, you
may or may not be presented
with this dialog box.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Data Acquisition Control Module

13

Method Used

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Assigning Control Modules to a CEE


Required if the menu method
was used, or if the IOM was
dropped onto a blank area.

1b
3
1a

2
Assigned
to CEE

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Opening Chart View to Configure a Control Module

Honeywell

Double
Click
When the File Method is
used to add a new Control
Module, the Chart View
window is automatically
opened.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Data Acquisition Control Module

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Add Function Blocks


Add Function Blocks from the library to the CM
Add them in the order in which they should execute
Ex: AI, DACA, PIDA, AO

Series A

TIP:
After adding function blocks,
save your CM. This allows
the point picker to display
the new function blocks.

1
Series C

4
Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Provide Automatic ORDERINCM

Displays Order in CM on the top left corner of all applicable Function Blocks
by default
Reduces engineering efforts required earlier in exposing this parameter on
Function Blocks
Series A IO channel function
blocks have an ORDERINCM,
Series C IO channel function
blocks do not.

Display Order in CM
option is selected
Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Function Block Execution Order in the CM

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

13

System Preferences within Control Builder has an option to display


Order in CM on Function Blocks

Adding IO Channel Function Blocks to the Control Module

Honeywell

A IO channel can be added to the CM by either dragging it from an IOM


in the Project tab, or by dragging it from the Library
When added from an IOM in Project, the channel is automatically assigned
to a specific channel on a specific IOM

Only available
for SeriesC
channels

Drag and
Drop

Drag and
Drop

This method is available


for all channel types.
The channel must be
manually assigned
later.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Data Acquisition Control Module

11

Manually Assigning a SeriesC Channel

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Adding and Manually Assigning a Series A Channel

Honeywell

13

Drag &
Drop

Double
Click

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Configure the CM and Each Function Block

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Double click on a blank space to configure the properties of the CM


Double click on each function block to configure its properties
The properties of the CM will be covered in coming slides

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Displaying the Control Modules Properties

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Name and item name

Parent asset

Execution period

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring a CM Main Tab

Honeywell

CEE base execution


period = 50 ms
50 ms to 2 sec
Default = 1 sec

CEE base execution


period = 5 ms
5 ms to 200 ms
Default = 200 ms

Execution order in CEE


and Execution Phase

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Configuring a CM Execution Cycle


Execution period and phase = execution cycle

13

This CEE base execution


period has 40 timing phases
(cycles) of 50 ms each

PHASE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

37 38 39

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
TIME (ms)

1850
1950
1900
2000

Examples:
A CM with a one second execution period (1000 ms) and a phase of
0 would execute at phase 0 and again at phase 20
A CM with an execution period of 200 milliseconds and a phase of 1
will execute in cycles 1, 5, 9, ... 37

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

CPU Loading

CEE
detail
display

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1 : CM Period and Phase


Together, the CM execution period and phase define the:
A) Execution cycle
B) Execution phase hour
C) Execution phase minute
D) Execution order

Your answer:

You did not answer this question


You answered
this correctly!
Correct - Click anywhere
to
completely
Youanywhere
must
answer
Incorrect
Click
to the question
continue
before continuing
The correct answer
is:
continue

Submit

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Clear

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Reload Initialization

Reload Initialization
parameters on the CM
provide additional
control over the
behavior of CMs
In Execution Cycles
These parameters are
supported by
C300
C200E
ACE

Details on the next


slide

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Reload Initialization Parameters

Initialization delay (integer value to define number of CM execution cycles)


When CM is reloaded, and the RELOADINIDLY is set to non-zero value
CM parameters are not visible to local and peer pull clients
Local and Peer pull clients hold last fetched output until initialization
delay has expired
Default value is 2 execution cycles
Depending on CM configuration, user can assign more than 2 execution
cycles

CURRELINIDLY

Indicates the count of execution cycles before initialization delay expires


When a CM is reloaded
CURRELINIDLY is set to RELOADINIDLY
When a CM is activated
CURRELINIDLY will begin countdown to zero
When CURRELINIDLY is zero
Local and Peer pull clients can view parameters from the reloaded CM

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Connecting Function Blocks with the Wiring Tool

Honeywell

Not yet
connected

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

13

RELOADINIDLY

Honeywell

Example Analog CM CM, Blocks, Par. Conn, XRef, etc.


Analog Loop CM

1
5

2
3

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Example CM Device Control


Device Control CM

Expanded to
show
function
blocks

Inputs

Outputs
Logic/interlocks

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Permissive/Interlocks

13

Device Control Detail Display

2-state

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 2: Execution Order in a CM


Which of these is a definition of
the Execution Order in a CM?
A) All function blocks with the same
execution order in multiple CMs
are executed in parallel
B) The execution cycle of the CM
in the CEE
C) The execution phase of the
function block in the CEE
D) The sequential execution order
of function blocks in a CM

The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
No. "Execution
Yes!
No.
"Execution Order
Order in
in aa CM"
CM" is
is the
the sequential
sequential
You must answer the question before
execution
order
ofthis
function
blocks
in aa CM.
CM.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
question
correctly!
to
toblocks
continue
continue
completely
execution
order
of
function
in
continuing
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue.
Click

Data Acquisition Control Module

Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Clear

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Building and Editing Control Modules

Loading, Activating and Monitoring Control Modules


Inserting an OLE Object in a Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Data Acquisition Control Module

27

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Initiating Load of CMs

1
3
Right-click

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Loading CMs First Time

13

Check the appropriate


boxes

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Loading CMs Which Had Previously Been Downloaded

Honeywell

If a CM had previously been downloaded, it must be inactivated prior to


being re-loaded
Can be done manually from the Monitoring tab BEFORE the load is initiated
Can be done as part of the load process by selecting the checkbox

Before inactivating a CM,


MAKE SURE:
Operations personnel are aware
Process is in the proper state

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Activating/Inactivating CMs

Right-click

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring CMs Scale Factor


Monitoring/Chart Visualization

Scale Factor
Icon

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 3: Loading Control Modules


Which of the following is not a way to load a control module?
A) Select the corresponding CM in the
Project tab and then select
Controller > Load

13

B) Select the CM in the Project


tab and select the down arrow
C) Select the CM in the
Monitoring tab and select the
down arrow
D) Left-click the CM in the
Project tab and select Load
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
must
not-answer
-Click
answer
Clickanywhere
anywhere
the
thisquestion
question
to
to
You answered this correctly!
before
completely
continue
continuing
Submit

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Clear

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Building and Editing Control Modules
Loading, Activating and Monitoring Control Modules

Inserting an OLE Object in a Control Module

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Inserting an OLE Object in a CM Ex: Word Document

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Viewing the OLE Object

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

A new CM is automatically assigned a unique, sequential name.


The execution phase and period of the CM defines the execution cycle.
Cycle overruns can occur when the scheduled processing for a cycle does
not
finish by the start of the next cycle.
blocks execute in ascending order beginning with the block having
Function
the lowest execution order value.
You can load a CM from the Project tree using the Control Builder Controller
menu.
You can view an activated CM in the Monitoring tree of Control Builder or in
the
associated detail display in Station.

Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Data Acquisition Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules


4/13/2012

13

When building, loading, activating and monitoring a CM in Control


Builder, remember:

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: Data Acquisition Control Module


Contents
Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module .................................................................................3

Configure Series C IO Channel ...........................................................................................................19


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module ..................................................................................33

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Configure Series A IO Channel .............................................................................................................5

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module

Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module


Introduction
This portion of the lab describes how to follow the Data Acquisition Control Module lab.
Procedure
Step
1

Action

13

Select ONLY one of the following:


Read the IMPORTANT information below.

Please select whether you will be performing labs for the C200E (and Series A I/O
modules) or for C300 (and Series C I/O Modules). Select only one of the following:

_______

C200E (and Series A I/O modules)

_______

C300 (and Series C I/O Modules)

If you selected:
C200E (and Series A I/O modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the first and third sections):
Configure Series A IO Channel
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
C300 (and Series C I/O Modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the second and third sections):
Configure Series C IO Channel
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Data Acquisition Control Module


Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Configure Series A IO Channel


Practice

Configure a Control Module (CM)

Understand the naming of the Control Module and the function blocks within the Control
Module

Configure an indicator Control Module for an analog input point

13

Objective

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server or Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded

Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the server (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)

SIM-C200E/C200E controller and IOMs configured

Excel Data Exchange configured and loaded with the simulation spreadsheet

Introduction
To create a Control Strategy, you must first create a Control Module, and then insert and connect
function blocks into the Control Module. The point 11_TI20 is built in this lab. 11_TI20 will have
alarming and be in a group and detail display. 11_TI20 will also be historized.

The Control Module is built, loaded and activated. The CM is linked to a Microsoft Excel
worksheet for process simulation. The remaining Control Modules of a similar type are then
imported into the project.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Configure a Control Module (CM)

Step
1

Action
Read the attention box.

ATTENTION
This section should be done only by students who
have selected C200E (and Series A I/O Modules).

Open Control Builder through Configuration Studio.

Open one or two Project/Monitor tree windows as desired.

Project Tree window

Monitoring
Tree window

Library Tree
window

Open the Excel spread sheet by double-clicking on:


C:\Users\Student\Documents\Tie_back_NEW.xls
(or by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop if it is available).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Step

From Control Builder, expand System in the Library tab, as shown below:

13

Action

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
5

Action
Select and drag the CONTROLMODULE into a blank area in the Project tree.
A dialog box, as seen below, will appear.

ATTENTION
If you have a problem finding blank space which will
allow you to drop the CM, collapse the trees in the
Project window.
It is important to use the CM names given in this
document, because they are used in the Excel
simulation.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
6

Action
Enter the following information:
Destination Tagnames:

11_TI20 (name of the new CM)

Destination Item Names:

11_TI20_Item.

13

Click Finish.

ATTENTION
In this tagname, the character after the letter T is the
letter I.
When adding a new CM, Control Builder numbers the
CM sequentially, by default. You can assign any 16character unique Project name to the CM.
It is important to use the CM names, given in this
document, because they are used in the Excel
simulation.
The Source Names contain random numbers
generated by Control Builder. Therefore, the ones in
this picture may be different than yours.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

10

Step

Action

Verify 11_TI20 is added to the Unassigned section in the Project Tree window.

Configure the parameters for 11_TI20.

Right-click 11_TI20

Select Module Properties

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Step

Enter parameter details, in the Main tab, as given below.


Name:

11_TI20 (Maximum 16 characters allowed)

Description:

T-100 Bottom (Maximum 24 characters allowed)

Parent Asset:

Level_C11.

Eng Units:

Deg C (Maximum 16 characters allowed)

13

Action

ATTENTION
If you want help on any of the parameters in this form,
press <F1> or click the Help button located at the
bottom of the form.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
10

Action
Click the Server Displays tab, and enter the display details, as shown below.

ATTENTION
This lab uses the standard Honeywell analog point detail and group
display for the point 11_TI20 in Station.

12

11

Click OK.

12

Assign the CM to the Controller CEESCEFB61.


on the toolbar to open the

With 11_TI20 selected, click the Assign Button


Execution Environment Assignment screen

If not already highlighted, select 11_TI20 in the CM/SCMs tab.

Select CEESCEFB61 in the Assign To window

Click the Assign Button

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
Assigned Modules will show 11_TI20.

13

13

Action

Click the Close Button.


14

4/13/2012

11_TI20 is assigned to CEESCEFB61, as indicated below.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Add Function Blocks to a CM


Use the IOMs, configured in the lab Configure C200E Hardware, here.

Step
1

Action
Double click 11_TI20 in the Project Tree window to open the chart view.

ATTENTION
Your screen may vary from the example shown.

14

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
Add Function Blocks to CM 11_TI20.

Click the Library Tree window

Expand the IOCHANNEL, by clicking the + sign adjacent to it

Select the AICHANNEL block

13

Action

3
4

4/13/2012

Drag and drop the AICHANNEL to the 11_TI20 chart view.


Click the

icon on the toolbar to Save your CM to the Project database.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
5

Action
Configure AI Channel parameters.

16

Double-click on the AICHANNELA to open the Block Properties

Enter the following details, as given below:


Channel Name:

TI

Module Name:

AI_8_4_4

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
7

Action
Enter the following details as given below:
Select Channel Number: 1

13

Click the Assign Channel Block button.

ATTENTION
The Module Type displays automatically when
selecting the module name.
11_TI20.TI is assigned to the channel number 1 of AI_8_4_4, as seen in the Channel
Number/Channel Name list.
8

4/13/2012

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series A IO Channel

Step

Action

9
ATTENTION
You have completed this section of the lab. Go to the
third section of this lab which is titled Configure the
Data Acquition Control Module.
Do NOT perform the section titled Configure Series C
I/O Channel.

10

18

Save and close 11_TI20.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Configure Series C IO Channel


Practice

Configure a Control Module (CM)

Understand the naming of the Control Module and the function blocks within the Control
Module

Configure an indicator Control Module for an analog input point

Refer Guide to Debutanizer model for C200/C300 Labs section in Appendix for IO
channel assignment.

13

Objective

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server or Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded

Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the server (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)

SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured

Excel Data Exchange configured and loaded with the simulation spreadsheet

Introduction
To create a Control Strategy, you must first create a Control Module, and then insert and connect
function blocks into the Control Module. The point 11_TI20 is built in this lab. 11_TI20 will have
alarming and be in a group and detail display. 11_TI20 will also be historized.

The Control Module is built, loaded and activated. The CM is linked to a Microsoft Excel
worksheet for process simulation. The remaining Control Modules of a similar type are then
imported into the project.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Configure a Control Module (CM)

Step
1

Action
Read the attention box.

ATTENTION
This section should be done only by students who
have selected C300 (and Series C I/O Modules).

Open Control Builder through Configuration Studio.

Open one or two Project/Monitor tree windows as desired.

Project Tree window

Monitoring
Tree window

Library Tree
window

Open the Excel spread sheet by double-clicking on:


C:\Users\Student\Documents\Tie_back_NEW.xls
(or by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop if it is available).

20

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Step

From Control Builder expand System in the Library tab, as indicated.

13

Action

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
5

Action
Select and drag the CONTROLMODULE into a blank area in the Project tree.
A dialog box, as seen below, will appear.

ATTENTION
If you have a problem finding blank space which will
allow you to drop the CM, collapse the trees in the
Project window.
It is important to use the CM names given in this
document, because they are used in the Excel
simulation.

22

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
6

Action
Enter the following information:
Destination Tagnames:

11_TI20 (name of the new CM)

Destination Item Names:

11_TI20_Item.

13

Click Finish.

ATTENTION
In this tagname, the character after the letter T is the letter I.
When adding a new CM, Control Builder numbers the CM
sequentially, by default. You can assign any 16-character
unique Project name to the CM.
It is important to use the CM names, given in this document,
because they are used in the Excel simulation.
The Source Names contain random numbers generated by
Control Builder. Therefore, the ones in this picture may be
different than yours.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

24

Step

Action

Verify 11_TI20 is added to the Unassigned section in the Project Tree window.

Configure the parameters for 11_TI20.

Right-click 11_TI20

Select Module Properties

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Step

Enter parameter details, in the Main tab, as given below.


Name:

11_TI20 (Maximum 16 characters allowed)

Description:

T-100 Bottom (Maximum 24 characters allowed)

Parent Asset:

Level_C11.

Eng Units:

Deg C (Maximum 16 characters allowed)

13

Action

ATTENTION
If you want help on any of the parameters in this form,
press <F1> or click the Help button located at the
bottom of the form.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
10

Action
Click the Server Displays tab, and enter the display details, as shown below.

ATTENTION
This lab uses the standard Honeywell analog point detail and group
display for the point 11_TI20 in Station.

26

11

Click OK.

12

Assign the CM to the Controller SIM_CEEC300.


on the toolbar to open the

With 11_TI20 selected, click the Assign Button


Execution Environment Assignment screen

If not already highlighted, select 11_TI20 in the CM/SCMs tab.

Select SIM_CEEC300 in the Assign To window

Click the Assign Button

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
Assigned Modules will show 11_TI20.

13

13

Action

Click the Close Button.


14

4/13/2012

11_TI20 is assigned to SIM_CEEC300, as indicated below.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Add Function Blocks to a CM


Use the IOMs, configured in the lab Configure C300/SIM C300 Hardware, here.

Step
1

Action
Double click 11_TI20 in the Project Tree window to open the chart view.

ATTENTION
Your screen may vary from the example shown.

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
Add Function Blocks to CM 11_TI20.

Select the Series_C_IOLINK Link

Expand the C_AI_3, by clicking the + sign adjacent to it

Select the AICHANNEL_01 block

13

Action

ATTENTION
You can add Series C IO function blocks to a CM in two ways:
1. The Project Tree method.
2. The Library Tree method (Covered in Describe C300 and
Series C IO configuration Presentation)
We will use the Project Tree method. This method uses the
fact that Series C IO modules contain their own configuration
databases. Therefore when you add an IOM, its configuration
parameters are available from project.
In this case, select the first AI channel from your AI IOM.
Refer Guide to Debutanizer model for C200/C300 Labs
section in Appendix for IO channel assignment

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
3
4

Action
Drag and drop the AICHANNEL_01 onto 11_TI20 chart view.
Click the

Configure AI Channel parameters.

icon on the toolbar to Save your CM to the Project database.

Double click on the AICHANNEL_01 from the chart view of 11_TI20.

Enter the following details, as given below:


Channel Name:

TI

ATTENTION
IO Channel is automatically assigned to the IOM when you drag and
drop it from the IOLINK.

30

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel
Step
7

Action
Click on the Configuration tab and enter the Channel PV Ranges details as given
below:

PV Extended High Range:

267.54

PV High Range:

260

PV Low Range:

PV Extended Low Range:

-7.54

13

ATTENTION
In all Labs, you need to configure the Channel PV
Range parameters for all Analog Input Channel
blocks; it should match with DACA block Process
Variable details.
Click OK
8

Save and close 11_TI20.

9
TIP
In the future, when building Control Modules, follow the
steps above.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

31

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure Series C IO Channel

This page was intentionally left blank.

32

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module


Practice

Configure a Data Acquisition Control Module (CM)

Understand the naming of the Control Module and the function blocks within the Control
Module

13

Objective

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server or Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded

Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the server (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)

SIM C200E/C200E, or C300/SIM-C300 Controller and IOMs configured

Excel Data Exchange configured and loaded with the simulation spreadsheet

Introduction
To create a Control Strategy, you must first create a Control Module, and then insert and connect
function blocks into the Control Module. The point 11_TI20 is built in this lab. 11_TI20 will have
alarming and be in a group and detail display. 11_TI20 will also be historized.

The Control Module is built, loaded and activated. The CM is linked to a Microsoft Excel
worksheet for process simulation. The remaining Control Modules of a similar type are then
imported into the project.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

33

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Add Function Blocks to a CM


Use the IOMs, configured in the lab Controller Hardware Configuration, here.

Step
1

Action
Read the attention box.

ATTENTION
This section should be done ALL students (C200E &
C300).

Open Control Builder and open 11_TI20 to the chart view.

Add a DACA Function Block to CM 11_TI20.

Click the Library Tree window

Expand the DATAACQ, by clicking the + sign adjacent to it

Select the DATAACQ block

Drag and drop the DATAACQ block on the 11_TI20 chart view.

ATTENTION
For more information on adding function blocks to a
CM, refer to the Control Building Guide in Knowledge
Builder along the path,
Experion R400 > Configuration > Control Building
users Guide > Creating a Control Module >
Creating an Instance of a Basic Function Block.

34

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
Maximize the chart view by clicking the

icon.

13

Action

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

35

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
5

Action
Arrange the blocks as shown below.

ATTENTION
In this lab the screen capture is shown for
SIMC200E/C200E, if you are using SIMC300/C300 the
AI channel will be different from Series A.

36

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
Click the

icon on the toolbar to Save your CM to the Project database.

13

Action

Double-click the Data Acquisition Block that was just added to the CM.

Enter the following information :


Name:

DACA

Description:

T-100 Bottoms

Engr Units:

Deg C

ATTENTION
This block must be named DACA so that the
Honeywell supplied analog point detail display will
function properly when called from Station.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

37

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
9

10

38

Action
Enter the Process Variable details, as given below:

PVEU Range Hi:

260

PVEU Range Lo:

PV Extended Hi Limit:

267.54

PV Extended Lo Limit: -7.54

Low Signal Cut Off:

NaN

Enable Clamping Option.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step

Action

11
ATTENTION

13

The PV High must set before the PV High High will


appear.
Configure Alarms for the CM.

12

4/13/2012

Click the Alarms Tab of the DACA Block

Enter the information as given below :


Trip Point

Priority

PV High High

260

URGENT

PV High

234

HIGH

PV Low

13

LOW

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

39

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Connect Function Blocks


After adding the Function Blocks, connect them together to form a control strategy. Connect Blocks
together anytime, before or after configuring block parameters.

Step
1

Action
Select Chart > Insert > Wire or click

icon in the toolbar.

Cursor changes to PLUS + sign inside the Project chart window

Click the PV Pin of AICHANNEL block (TI)

ATTENTION
Note the change in color for the PV pin of block TI.
This indicates the block pin is selected.

40

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step

Click the P1 pin of DATAACQ Block DACA.

13

Action

Connection
established

4/13/2012

Save the CM by clicking the

icon on the toolbar.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

41

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
4

42

Action
To show the cross reference connections made between function blocks:

Click Tools > System Preferences to open the window, as shown in the display
below

Select the Display Cross-References checkbox under the General tab.

Click OK

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step

Click OK. (Your dialog box may not look exactly like this one.)

13

Action

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

43

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
6

Action
The display below shows cross references.

TIP
This cross reference may not be shown on a C300
Control Module

44

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
History collection.

Double-click CM 11_TI20 in the white space to open the configuration form

Click the Server History tab. Verify that the Control Level is 200

13

Action

4/13/2012

Select the parameters for historization.

Click the blank Row 1 under the Parameter column in the History
Configuration table

Click the Point selection button

to open the Point Selection form

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

45

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
9

Action
The Point Selection form appears, as shown below.
Select Point 11_TI20 DACA, as indicated below.
Select parameter PV from the Parameters of 11_TI20.DACA list.
Click OK to close the Point Selection form.

10

46

11_TI20.DACA.PV appears in the History Configuration table.

Select the FAST and STD history checkboxes

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
11

Action
Click the Server Displays tab and enter the following information, to add the CM to a
Trend and Group.

13

Number of trends
to be entered

Enter Trend #, Pen


color, Parameter and
Description.

Enter Group #, Position


of the tag in the group,
Parameter and
Description.

ATTENTION
You can also do this, by entering the trend/group
number and the pen/ position, in the trend and group
window, after building the control strategy in the CM.
12

4/13/2012

Click OK to close the Control Module Properties window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

47

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
13

Action
Save the CM 11_TI20 and close the chart window.

14

48

This CM now appears with the symbol


been loaded to the controller

indicating that the CM has not yet

Download this CM.

Select 11_TI20

Click the

Select Continue in the Load Box

button on the toolbar

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step

Action

15

Select the Automatically change All control elements to the state selected in Post
Load State after load is completed. The Post Load State is selected as ACTIVE by
default.
Click the OK button.

13

16

A Load dialog box appears, as shown below, that automatically closes on a successful
download.

ATTENTION
In the Project window, notice there is no
front of 11_TI20.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

sign in

49

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
17

Action
Click the Monitoring Tree window to verify that 11_TI20 is green, which means it is
active.
1
2

18

If active (green) skip the next step


If inactive (blue) perform the next step

Activate the CM. To activate a CM, right-click and select Activate > Selected Items
or select 11_TI20, and click the Toggle State button on the toolbar.

The following screen appears

Click Yes.
2
19

50

Notice 11_TI20 is now green

Open Station, if not already open.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step

Call up Debutanizer_123 on Station, as shown below.

13

20

Action

The 11_TI20 point is at the bottom of the T-100 tower.

In this example, the temperature shown is approximately 85.00 DegC.


If you click the parameter block in your graphic, point parameter, details appear in the
message zone: E20ESV##_Server:11_TI20.DACA.PV with real-time value and the CM
description.

ATTENTION
If you do not see the value for 11_TI20 varying, then
close and open the Tie_back_new.xls file.
Use this file for simulation purpose.
E20ESV##_Server is the server alias name defined
for this class. In real environment this will be a different
name specific to your site requirements.
The ## is the student number

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

51

Data Acquisition Control Module


Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step

Action

21
ATTENTION
The actual value may be different on your screen.
If the 11_TI20 CM is inactive, the value in the
parameter box is NaN.

If a point is not properly built and you select the


parameter block, the following message appears in the
message zone: Selected object not found.
If the point is not loaded and you select the parameter
block, the following message appears:
11_TI20.DACA.PV=??().

52

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

14

Describe Bulk Build Functionality

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
In this lesson, you will learn to use the Bulk Build tool in
Control Builder.

At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to describe how to


quickly build multiple control modules of the same type using the
Bulk Build tool.

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics

Bulk Build Procedure Overview


Bulk Build Procedure

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Overview of the Bulk Build Procedure


1

Create
Typical(s)

Select Typical(s)
Tool: Create Bulk Build List

For each typical:


Determine the number of &
the names of the copies

4
For each typical:
Select the parameters to
be changed on the copies

5
Create the Bulk Build file
.mdb, .csv, .xls

Edit the Bulk Build file


parameters to change on
the copies

7
Read the Bulk Build file
Tool: Read Bulk Build List

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Build Copies

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Features of the Bulk Build Tool

Bulk Build:
Productivity tool used to generate large quantities of control strategies
outside of Control Builder
This tool is a licensed option

Bulk Build supports the following components:


Control modules
Sequential control modules

14

Fieldbus devices
I/O modules
User templates (instances of templates and templates themselves)

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Bulk Build Procedure Overview

Bulk Build Procedure

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Create the Bulk Build List


Tools > Bulk Build > Create Bulk Build List

Invoke Create
Bulk Build List

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Select a Typical Control Strategy

Set copy name


and count
Select a typical
control strategy

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Set the Number and Names of the Copies


Use Alpha Sequence
Add letter to each
block name
Ex: PIC0102A, B

Selected Typical

Add Underscore
Separator
Ex: PIC0102_X

Number of copies to create

Base Name

14

Add Leading Zeros


Ex: PIC0102001, 002
(cannot be used with
Use Alpha Sequence)

Add prefix or suffix,


then start number and
increment amount

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Number of Copies is Updated

Result is updated

Select block
parameter for
Bulk Build list

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Select Parameters

Select block

Parameters of
selected block

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Parameters selected
for typical control
strategy

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Number of Parameters is Updated

Result is updated

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

14

Modify Parameters in Excel

Make modifications
as desired in the
required CM

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

13

Honeywell

Open the Read Bulk Build List Tool


Tools > Bulk Build > Read Bulk Build List

Invoke Read
Bulk Build List

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Read Excel File and Validate Control Strategies

Select to replace
existing, when desired

Validation ensures that


the Typicals being copied
are present and are
structurally consistent
with the spreadsheet

Select Validate

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Validation Report

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Build Control Strategies

Validated.
Build OK.

14

Build and Assign OK.

Select Build

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Build Report

View report
after Bulk Build

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

New CMs

New CMs available


in the Project

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Bulk Build Tool


Use the Bulk Build tool to:
A) Create EB files for C200/C300
control modules
B) Generate large quantities of
control strategies outside Control
Builder
C) Export control modules to other
ERDBs
D) All of the above

Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You must answer the question before
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
Bulk
Bulk
Build
Build
tool
tool
is
iscontinue
used
used
to
togenerate
generate
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
notThe
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
completely
continuing
multiple control strategies outside Control Builder.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Clear

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary
The Bulk Build tool:

multiple copies of a typical control strategy to an Excel spreadsheet


Exports
where each copy can be modified.
the edited Excel spreadsheet back into Control Builder which applies
Imports
the normal configuration checks and creates the individual control strategies.

Supports the following components


Control modules

14

Sequential control modules


Fieldbus devices
I/O modules
User templates (instances of templates and templates themselves)

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe Bulk Build Functionality

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe Bulk Build Functionality


4/13/2012

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson you will learn how to use the bulk edit parameters tool in
Control Builder.
At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will know how to
use the tool to:
Export tags and parameters from
a Control Builder project to an
Excel spreadsheet
Modify the parameters in an
Excel spreadsheet
Read the parameters into a
Control Builder project

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Create Bulk Edit List


Bulk Edit Parameters

Utility which allows you to change the value of multiple parameters in a


single operation by importing a prepared list of edits

14

Tools > Bulk Edit Parameters > Create Bulk Edit List

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Create Bulk Edit List

The Show All Points button is used to populate the "Available Points"
selection list with the names of all points in the database.

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Select the Parameters Which Will be Changed

Honeywell

Select the points and parameters

All parameters that


exist on any selected
block in the Available
Points field will appear
in the Available
Parameters field.

The selected points

The parameter(s)
to be modified

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Create Bulk Edit List


Build the Excel file

Browse to
desired
output path

Select the output


file type
Name the
output file

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Save
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Edit Parameters

Open the created BulkEdit.xls file in Excel

14

Edit the parameters


as necessary

Do not change or
add tag names.
Keep columns in order.

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Use the single quote


before numbers 100

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Honeywell

Read Bulk Edit List

Select Update
Monitor or Project

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Select Start

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Bulk Edit Parameters Tool


Use the bulk edit parameters tool:

A) As an online tool to activate or inactivate multiple


control modules at once
B) To copy the control module to the monitoring tab
C) To export selected control modules
D) To change selected parameters in selected control
modules
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
Bulk
Bulk
Edit
Editis:
Parameters
Parameters
tool
tool
isisused
usedto
tochange
change
YouThe
must
answer
the question
before
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
selected
parameters
in
selected
control modules.
continuing

Submit

Click anywhere to continue.

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Clear

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary
You can use the Bulk Edit Parameters tool to:

tags and parameters from a Control Builder project to an Excel


Export
spreadsheet.

Modify the parameters in an Excel spreadsheet.


Do not change or add tag names
Keep columns in order
Use the single quote before numbers 100

Read the parameters into a Control Builder project.

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality

14

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality


4/13/2012

Describe the Block Name References in CM


and SCM

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
In this lesson, you will learn about:
Block name references in CMs and SCMs

At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:


Reference a parameter in CMs
Reference a parameter in SCMs

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Name References
Generally, name references take the following form:
CM_Name.BlockName.Parameter
EX: 11_PC15.PIDA.SP
SCM_Name.Parameter
Ex:
SCM_D100.ModeAttr

Name references exist in:


Parameter references

14

Expressions used in SCMs

Expressions used in Calc Blocks

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

System Preferences Relative Reference Display Option

Honeywell

Tools>System Preferences
The Relative Reference
Display Option allows
references to be:
Full Name
Short Name
Enter less information
Use less area on
chart view
Fewer characters in
expressions

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Short Name Block Name References Control Modules

When Short Name is selected, the entries for name references depend
on the location of the reference relative to where the entry is made
Reference to a parameter on a block in another CM
Name References take the form: CM.Block.Parameter
Reference to a parameter on another block in the same CM
Name References take the form: Block.Parameter
Reference to a parameter on the same block
Name References take the form: Parameter
Only the parameter name must be entered
CM2

BLK2

CM1
BLK1

PARb
PARa

CM1.BLK1.PARa
BLK2.PARb
PARc

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Short Name Block Name References SCMs

BLK3
PARc

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

Honeywell

When an expression in an SCM includes a reference to another SCM,


the full name reference must be used even if Short Names is
selected
SCM_Name.Parameter

References to the same SCM use a $


$.Parameter

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

Honeywell

14

Expression Example - SCM

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

41

Honeywell

Parameter Connector Example - CM

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

42

21

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Parameter Reference Example - CM

Different Block
Same Block

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

43

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Short Names


Which of the following statements is true about Short Names?
A) Optional setting
B) Applies to parameter connector and parameter
references
C) Applies to expression used in SCM and all Calc
Blocks
D) Reference to a container parameter will be displayed
as "$.parameter" in the expression present in the
step of a SCM
E) All of the above
No. The
The
No.
The
correct
answer
is
"All
of
the
above".
All
Yes!
correct
answer
is "All
"All of
of the
the above".
above". All
All
No.
correct
answer
The
correct
answer
is: is
Your
answer:
ofYou
these
statements
arequestion
correct about
about
Short
of
these
statements
are
correct
about
Short
of
these
statements
are
correct
must
answer the
beforeShort
Correct
Click
anywhere
to
continue
You
Incorrect
did You
not -answer
Click
anywhere
this
question
to
continue
completely
Names.
Names.
Names.
answered
this correctly!
continuing
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue.
Click
anywhere
to
continue.
Click

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

44

22

Clear

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

The block name references function in CMs and SCMs allows you to:

14

Shorten parameter reference in CMs


Shorten parameter reference in SCMs

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

45

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module


lab exercise and the lab exercises that follow it
Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

46

23

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM


4/13/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Contents

14

Export/Import a Control Module .............................................................................................................3

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Export/Import a Control Module


Practice
Objective

Use the Import and Export functionality of Control Builder to incorporate parts from one
Control Builder Project into another Project

Export the Control Module 11_TI20

Import Analog Indicator points

Use Bulk Edit Parameters to change parameter values


14

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server or client machine loaded with Experion PKS Engineering Tools

11_TI20 CM configured in Control Builder

Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C200E available in the path:
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A

Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C300 available in the path:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C

Control Builder running with at least one Project/Monitor tree window open

SIM_C200E/SIMC300 Controller and IOMs configured

Introduction
A Project file can contain many items, such as IOMs and CMs, for up to 20 controllers. From
Control Builder, use the Import/Export tool to copy some or all of one project to another.

Export - copies the designated portion of a project from Control Builder to a specified
directory

Import - copies the designated CMs into Control Builders Project Tab

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Procedure
Export Function Block Configuration

Step
1

Action
In Control Builder, click on the Project window then from the menu bar select File >
Export, to call up the dialog box, as shown below.

Select 11_TI20

ATTENTION
Your point list may be different. The point list contains
all items in the current project.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step

11_TI20 now appears in the Point Name field.

14

Action

Browse to the path of:


C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Export

4/13/2012

Double-click Export and click OK

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
3

Action
Click the Export Button.
The Exporting Data dialog box appears

ATTENTION
This dialog box automatically closes if there were no
errors during the export.

Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the exported CM location:

C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Export

The following files are generated:


Module Name.bcd (In this case, module name is 11_TI20.)
Module Name.cnf.xml
Export.sl
global.gui
global.snl.xml

The Export.sl is the successful list file. It contains a list of all the exported
objects
ATTENTION
Here, 11_TI20 was successfully exported. You can
import this CM to any other Project with the Import
facility.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Import a Control Module


Import copies designated Control Modules from the Import/Export files located in the specified
directory (shown in the Import form) to a Control Builder Project.
In this lab, import the Analog Indicator points. These are pre-built CMs and already exported into
the following directory:
Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C200E available in the path:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A

Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C300 available in the path:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_C
14

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
1

Action
From Control Builder, select File>Import to call up the dialog box, as shown below.
All items in
current
Import/
Export Text
Files

Selection tools

List of items
to import
based on
selections
from window

Import /
Export Text
Files
Location

Selection List
When
enabled,
select your
own list of
items to
import

Start Import

ATTENTION
When the above dialog box opens, the Project Tree
window automatically closes.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
2

Action
Click the Browse button and change the Import path to the following folder:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)

TIP
Make sure Series_A (or _C) is in the Look in field
before clicking OK.

14

Click OK.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
3

Action
Import the Analog Indicator points listed below.
Selection can be made with <SHIFT> select (for contiguous items) or <CTRL> select (for
noncontiguous items).

ATTENTION
Select only the following, from the list, to import:
11_PI14, 11_TI21, 11_TI22, 11_TI23, 11_TI24, 11_TI25, 11_TI26
and 11_TI40.

Maintain the Import CEE Assignments checkbox selection. This checkbox imports and
assigns the above CMs to the CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).

10

If this option is NOT selected, then the imported items are imported as
Unassigned

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
5

Action
Click the Import button.
The following dialog box appears:

14

ATTENTION
This dialog box automatically closes after a successful
Import.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
6

Action
Open the Project Tree window and expand the Project.

12

CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300) with all the imported CMs appears, as shown
below

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Use Bulk Edit Parameters

Step
1

Action
Open the Bulk Editor.

14

Click Tools > Bulk Edit Parameters > Create Bulk Edit List

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
2

14

Action
Click on Show All Points button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
3

Action
Select 11_TI21.DACA from the Available Points window then
button

Click the arrow

11_TI21.DACA now appears in the Selected Points window

14

Similarly, select 11_TI22.DACA, 11_TI23.DACA, 11_TI24.DACA and 11_TI26.DACA


and move them to the Selected Points window

ATTENTION
Press <CNTRL> key for selecting multiple points.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
4

Action
In the Available Parameters window, find and select PVEUHI and PVEXHILM. Select
the arrow
button.

ATTENTION
Press <CNTRL> key for selecting multiple parameters.

For C300 students only (C200E students skip this step):


From Available Points, select and move the following to Selected Points:
11_TI21.TI, 11_TI22.TI, 11_TI23.TI, 11_TI24.TI, 11_TI26.TI

For C300 students only (C200E students skip this step):


From Available Parameters select and move the following to Selected Parameters:
PVEXEUHI

16

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step

Click the Browse button for the Output Directory.

Select C:\Users\Student in the Browse for Folder window

Click OK

14

Action

Select Excel Spread Sheet [.xls] from the Select File Type pull down menu.
Click the Save button.

ATTENTION
If the file already exists in the folder, a prompt will appear
asking you to overwrite the existing file. Press YES.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

18

Step

Action

Click OK.

10

Close the Create Bulk Edit List window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step

Open Windows Explorer and navigate to C:\Users\Student

Double click the BulkEdit.xls file

Result: Excel opens displaying the points as shown below

14

11

Action

Screen capture shown for SIMC300. You will see this only when using SIMC300

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
12

Action
In the PVEUHI column, select each 100 value and change it to 260
In the PVEXHILM, select each 100 value and change it to 260.

ATTENTION
Be sure to put the single quote before 260. This
tells Excel that this value is text.
For C300 students only:
Enter the PVEXEUHI as 260 for each Series C Analog
Input channel.
Screen capture shown for SIMC300. You will see this only when using SIMC300.

20

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
13

Action
Save and close the Excel spreadsheet.

14

Accept the default C:\Student file location.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
14

Action
In Control Builder, select Tools > Bulk Edit Parameters > Read Bulk Edit List.

22

Result: the Read Bulk Edit List tool opens

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step
15

Action
Click the Browse button.
From the C:\Users\Student, select the BulkEdit.xls file.

14

Click the Open button.

16

Select the Update Project option.


Click the Start button.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step

Action

17

Click the OK button to acknowledge the warning.

18

Close the Bulk Edit tool.

19

In Control Builder, verify that PVEUHI changed (to 260) for the five points above
(11_TI21, 11_TI22, 11_TI23, 11_TI24, 11_TI26).

ATTENTION
If necessary, open the Project Tree, and expand the
Project.

24

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step

Select the 11_PI14, 11_TI21, 11_TI22, 11_TI23, 11_TI24, 11_TI25, 11_TI26, and
11_TI40 points.

14

20

Action

Click the Download button.


Click Continue on the Load dialog window.
Select the checkbox with Automatically change in the Load dialog box, and click OK
to begin the download.
After a successful download, go to the Monitoring Tree window, expand your SCE/CEE
and verify that the CMs are activated (green).

ATTENTION
Your Project screen may appear slightly different than
the example above.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step

Action

21

In Station, open the Debutanizer_123 graphic and verify that the downloaded points are
displaying values. If Debutanizer_123 is already displayed, refresh the display.

26

11_TI40, 11_TI21, and 11_TI23 are shown below

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

Step

11_TI25, 11_TI24 and 11_TI21 are shown below

14

22

Action

11_TI22 is shown below

ATTENTION
Your displays may differ.
If values for 11_TI20 are not updating, close and reopen Tie_back_new.xls and verify the following is
selected:
Tools >
Microsoft Excel Data Exchange >
Recalculate Every 5 seconds
This file is used for simulation purposes.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

Productivity Tools in Control Builder


Export/Import a Control Module

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson you will learn about the engineering repository database
(ERDB) and how to administer it.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify the purpose and location of the ERDB
Open the Database Administration (DBAdmin) tool for the ERDB
Describe the DBAdmin functions for the ERDB

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

15

Describe ERDB Administration

Honeywell

Topics

Introduction to the ERDB


Opening and Navigating the DBAdmin Tool for the ERDB

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

ERDB Description
The ERDB:
Contains logic CMs/SCMs
from the C200 and C300
controllers
Is created and referenced
via Control Builder and
DBAdmin tasks
Is a purely SQL server
database

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

ERDB Location

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

ERDB Files

ERDB database file

QVCS database

Warning!!!
Even though the database files
have an .mdf extension, they are not
Microsoft Access database files.
Attempting to open these files with any
program may corrupt the entire database.

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

15

Program Files > Honeywell > Experion PKS > Engineering Tools > system > ER

Honeywell

Redundant ERDB Servers

ERDB_A - Secondary
ERDB_B - Primary

Replication Status:
No-Sync
Sync
Sync-fail
Synching

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell
Question 1: The ERDB
Which statement about the engineering repository database (ERDB) is
false?
A) It can be redundant
B) It contains logic CMs/SCMs
from C200 controllers
C) It is created through Control Builder
D) Its .mdf files can be opened with
any database program

Incorrect.
Correct! The
Thefalse
falsestatement
statementisis"Its
"Its.mdf
.mdffiles
filescan
canbe
be
Your
answer:
The
correct
is:
opened
withanswer
any database
program ."Attempting to open
You
must
answer
thecorrupt
question
before
the
.mdf
files
may
the
entire
database.
You
did You
not -answered
answer
this
question
completely
Incorrect
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
to continue
this
correctly!
Correct
continuing to continue
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Clear

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Introduction to the ERDB

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Opening DBAdmin for the ERDB


DBAdmin (ERDB) is opened through Configuration Studio

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

15

Opening and Navigating the DBAdmin Tool for the ERDB

Honeywell

DBAdmin Window Panes

Tree pane

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

View pane

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB

The result is nine


different choices for the
content of the view pane

Click the PLUS sign ( + ) to expand


DbAdmin and Experion Node

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB


ERDB Host Information
General information about the server appears in the view pane

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB

A lock dialog box will appear when you attempt to open a locked CM in
Control Builder after an abnormal application termination.

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

15

Use the Tools menu to refresh status

Honeywell

DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB


ERDB Active Locks allows you to open a locked CM
CMs in Control Builder that are locked appear in the view pane
Use the Tools menu to clear all locks

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB


CAB Active Locks also allows you to open a locked CM

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

ERDB Admin Tasks for Redundant Servers


The following tasks are only available for redundant servers

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

15

ERDB Admin Tasks displays the ERDB administration tasks

Honeywell

DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB


Version control system (VCS) Admin Tasks

Synchronize VCS - Synchronizes the Qualification and Version Control System


database with the Engineering Repository database and clears any QVCS locks.
Backup VCS Database - Creates a backup copy of the current QVCS database as a
".bak" file under the user-specified name and in the user-selected directory location.
Restore VCS Database - Restores the user-selected backup QVCS database
(.bak) in the primary ERDB through the Restore From dialog box.

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

DBAdmin Wireless specific Functions


Wireless Key Server and HART Parameter DB Admin tasks

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 2: DBAdmin Tool


The DBAdmin tool is:
A) Used for organizing excel
spreadsheets
B) A tool used by operators as
a search engine
C) A utility for maintaining the
ERDB
D) Use to modify tuning parameters
on PID control loops

Correct!
Incorrect.
The
The
DBAdmin
DBAdmin
tool
tool
is aisutility
a utility
for
Incorrect.
The DBAdmin
tool is a utility for
The
correct
answer
is:
Your
answer:
for
maintaining
maintaining
the
the
ERDB.
ERDB.
The
The
ERDB
ERDB
maintaining the ERDB. The ERDB Administrative
Administrative
tasks
are
carried before
out
You must answer
the
question
tasks
out
using
the
DBAdmin
tool.
Incorrect
Correct
-answer
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
to
tocontinue
continue
You
did are
not carried
thisthis
question
completely
You
answered
correctly!
using
thecontinuing
DBAdmin
tool.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Clear

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary
The engineering repository database (ERDB):

Contains control strategies for the C200, C200E and C300 controllers
Is created through Control Builder
located at Program Files>Honeywell>Experion PKS>Engineering
IsTools>system>ER
Is administered through DBAdmin, a Configuration Studio utility

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

15

Submit

Honeywell

Conclusion
Describe ERDB Administration

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe ERDB Administration


4/13/2012

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control


Builder

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson you will learn the purpose and use of the checkpoint
function in Control Builder.
At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will know how to:
Locate the checkpoint file
Save a checkpoint file
automatically or manually
Restore a checkpoint file

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

16

Checkpoints

Honeywell

Introduction
The Checkpoint Function:
Allows you to save and restore operational and configuration data
associated with a control strategy

C200/C200E, C300, ACE, series CI/O & PM I/O (when used with C300)
LIOM
OPC gateway on ACE
Helps minimize downtime caused by a process or hardware anomaly

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics

Locating the Checkpoint File


Saving Checkpoint Files
Restoring Checkpoint Files
Checkpoint Support

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Checkpoint File Location


The checkpoint file is created on the local server path
Folders are created for each node

In Checkpoint and in CheckpointBase

Folders under Checkpoint contain the actual


checkpoint files
Latest (most recent) checkpoint is stored directly
in the node folder (ex: SIM_C300)
Manual checkpoints are stored in the folder
named Manual
User created tasks (manual or auto) save
checkpoints in folders whose name is the same
as the name of the task (ex: CheckpointAll)

Folders under CheckpointBase contain


configuration information, and file management
information
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Checkpoint Base Folder

Attribute and Snapshot


file which contains the
configuration information,
and file management
information

Separate folders
for the controllers
Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

16

Checkpoints

Honeywell

Checkpoint Folder

Each .cp (checkpoint) file contains all files of the CheckpointBase folder
in a compressed format supplemented with the saved real-time data for
that instance.
Sub directories are created for Automatic and Manual scheduled task
checkpointing and Manual Save operation.

Contains the checkpoint


files which are saved
manually

Contain the checkpoint


files which are saved by
user created tasks
Automatic or Manual

Latest checkpoint file of


the Controller named
SCE59 using the Syntax
ControllerName_Latest.cp

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Checkpoint File Location


Where is the Checkpoint File stored?
A) C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\ApplicationData\Honeywell\Checkpoint
B) C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\ExperionPKS
C) C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\ExperionPKS\Data
D) C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion
PKS\Checkpoint\Att

Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
No.
The
correct
answer
is
No.
The
The the
correct
correct
answer
answer
is
is
You mustYes!
answer
question
before
C:\Documents
and
Settings\All
Users\Application
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
C:\Documents
and
Settings\All
Users\Application
continuing
Data\Honeywell\Experion
PKS\Checkpoint
Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Checkpoint
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue
continue
Click

Submit

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Clear

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Locating the Checkpoint File

Saving Checkpoint Files


Restoring Checkpoint Files
Checkpoint Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Automatic Checkpointing
Controller > Checkpoint > Schedule Checkpoint Task

Select to schedule checkpoint

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

16

Checkpoints

Honeywell

Checkpoint Task Manual

Name of the task

Select Manual

Select Controller(s)

Assign Controller(s)

Add comments
if desired
Click

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Checkpoint Task Automatic Schedule

Select automatic
Select the date
and time for the
first checkpoint
Select interval

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Automatic Checkpointing

Add number of version to


be retained

NOTE: The number of versions is grayed


out in this case because the QVCS option
was included with this system.
QVCS permits only one version to be retained.

Add comment

Click

13

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Automatic Checkpointing
Checkpoint Scheduler

Start

Stop

Define Task

Refresh Contents
Delete Task

Edit Task

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

16

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Checkpoints

Honeywell

Manual Checkpointing

Select Save Checkpoint


Manually

Must be initiated from


the Monitoring tab.

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Manual Checkpointing By Node

Lists the nodes for


which checkpoint is to
be saved

Lists the Nodes


available - but
not selected to be
saved

The file name is


automatically generated
based on the:
1. Node To be Saved
2. Date & Time.

File Name and


Comments of the
checkpoint file which
is to be created

If multiple nodes are


selected, the port
changes to File Path
and points to the
Checkpoint folder.

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Manual Checkpointing By Task

Lists the nodes to be


saved as defined by
the selected task (or
first task listed if none
are selected as here)

Lists all Checkpoint


Scheduler tasks which
have type=Manual

File Name (or Path)


and Comments of the
checkpoint file which
is to be created
Comments entered
when the task was
defined

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 2: Saving a Checkpoint File


Which statement about saving a checkpoint file is false?
A) If your system has the QVCS option, you will only
be able to save 1 version of the checkpoint file
automatically; otherwise, you can specify the
number of versions to save
B) The checkpoint scheduler shows a list of the
automatic and manual checkpoints that have been
saved
C) You can save a checkpoint file manually for only one
project node
D) When you save a checkpoint file automatically you
must specify the start date, start time and interval
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
YouCorrect!
must
answer
the
questionis
No.
No. The
The
The
false
false
false
statement
statement
statement
isbefore
is
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
"You
"You can
can save
save aacontinuing
checkpoint
checkpoint file
file manually
manually
for
for only
only one
one project
project node."
node."
Click
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue.

Checkpoints

Submit

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Clear

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

16

Checkpoints

Honeywell

Topics
Locating the Checkpoint File
Saving Checkpoint Files

Restoring Checkpoint Files


Checkpoint Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Checkpoints

19

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Restore from Checkpoint


Displays a list of ALL nodes
and shows which node(s) are
selected for restore

Location where the


checkpoint file for the
node is saved

Used to select the


Restore scope (only
available for C300)

List of files available


for restore

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Files to Restore
Multiple parent
Nodes selected

Hardware children in
Multiple parent

Hardware children in
Single parent

Single Parent
Node selected

Available for selection


Unavailable for selection
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Locating the Checkpoint File
Saving Checkpoint Files
Restoring Checkpoint Files
Checkpoint Support

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

16

Checkpoints

Checkpoint support for C300, Series C I/O, & PM I/O

Honeywell

C300 target and save granularity


C300 CEE with Series A modules supported on C300
Series C I/O
PMIO supported on C300

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

C300 Restore
Restore from single C300 Checkpoint file

C300 selected for restore


with Restore Selected
Node & its associated
hardware option selected

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

C300 and Series A IO Modules Restore

C300 selected for restore


with Restore selected
Node option selected

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Series C IO and PM IO Restore


One IOM or IOP selected

More than one IOM or IOP selected

One or more SeriesC IOMs


and/or one or more PM
IOPs selected for restore

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

16

Checkpoints

Honeywell

C200 and Series A IO Modules Restore


C200 Save
Series A I/O
PM IO

C200
Series A I/O

C200_latest.cp or previously saved


compatible file

PM IO

C200 selected for


restore. Restore scope
option is not available
for selection
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Checkpoints

27

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

LIOM Checkpoint Support


LIOM Controller
Redundant or Non-Redundant configuration
LIOM Block, the LIOM CEE, 621 IOMs, and its contained CMs
Save / restore

Latest.cp

LIOM

Checkpoints

621 IOM

621 IOM

621 IOM

621 IOM

During restore, the


Restore scope option
will not be available for
selection

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

OPC Gateway Checkpoint Support

The OPC Gateway is a CPM-like Function Block that resides on an ACE


Node and provides configuration parameters necessary for OPC
connections from ACE CEEs.
If the ACE Node that hosts the OPC gateway should fail, the OPC
Gateway Checkpoint file can be used to restore these configuration
parameters.
OPC gateway

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Checkpoints

29

OPC Gateway latest.cp

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 3: Checkpoint Functions


Which of the following statements are true about Checkpoints?
A) C300 checkpoints are stored in a single file
B) PM and Series C IOM can be restored individually,
when connected to C300
C) C200 checkpoints if used, restores the C200 and all
IOMs
D) Series A I/O connected to C300 cannot be restored
individually
E) All of the above
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Yes!
No. All
All of
of the
the above
above statements
statements are
are true
true
You must answer
the question before
about
Checkpoints.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Clear

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

16

Restore

ACE

Detail Display

Honeywell

The System Status Display supports direct navigation to the detail


display for a selected node
Checkpoint save and restore operations from the checkpoint TAB in the
detail display

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Checkpoints

31

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Save Failed Status


Checkpoint save failed status

Checkpoints

Alarm is generated for Checkpoint save failed (System Status Display)

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Checkpoint File Needs the ERDB


A checkpoint file works together with the ERDB to restore data
The checkpoint file by itself cannot be used to restore data

A checkpoint file (.CP) can only be restored when EXACTLY the same
version of the ERDB exists on the server as when the checkpoint was
taken
Example:
Time 1:
Time 2:
Time 3:
Time 4:

A new CM is downloaded (and a checkpoint is taken)


A manual checkpoint is taken
An automatic checkpoint is taken
A CM is modified and downloaded (and a checkpoint is taken)

Only the checkpoint made at Time 4 is available to restore this controller

Checkpoint files and the ERDB should be backed up together

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Downloading Causes a Checkpoint Status of Incomplete

Honeywell

When downloading modules (CMs, SCMs, etc.), a checkpoint is taken


Controller data is not uploaded for the modules being downloaded
Checkpoint Entirety = Incomplete
Shown in Restore from Checkpoint dialog
Checkpoint Status =
Shown on the detail display of the controller (checkpoint operations tab)

Details of the Incomplete state show which modules are incomplete


Display the Restore from Checkpoint dialog
Select the checkpoint whose Entirety = Incomplete
Click the Details button

If this CP is used to restore, only configuration checkpoint data (CCD)


will be restored for modules which have an incomplete status
Operational checkpoint data (OCD) will not be restored

Performing a separate checkpoint after the download will create a


complete checkpoint
Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

16

Checkpoints

Honeywell

Summary
The Checkpoint function in Control Builder:

Saves and restores operational and configuration data


Speeds recovery from process or hardware anomalies
Can be done manually or automatically at set intervals

Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Open and Operate Control Builder lab exercise.


Checkpoints

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder


4/13/2012

Topic: Checkpoints
Contents
Perform Checkpoint Save ......................................................................................................................3

16

Perform Checkpoint Restore .................................................................................................................7

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Save

Perform Checkpoint Save


Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn the Checkpoint save operation
Prerequisites
SIM_C300 / SCE59 must be configured and loaded

16

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Save

Step

Action

Save Checkpoint Manually


1

On the Monitoring tab, right-click on the controller (SCE59 or SIM_C300) and select
Checkpoint > Save Checkpoint manually

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Save
Step

Action

Click Save to save the checkpoint file.

On the Save Checkpoint message window click OK.

16

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Save

Step
4

Action
On the Save Checkpoint Manually window click Close.

ATTENTION
The status of the checkpoint save can be confirmed
from the Event Summary page in Station as shown
below

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore

Perform Checkpoint Restore


Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn the Checkpoint Restore operation

Checkpoint restore from Control Builder

Checkpoint restore from Station

Prerequisites

SIM_C300 / SCE59 must be configured and loaded

Note:

16

1. On completion of this lab, the SIM_C300 / C200E, and the associated I/O and strategies will
be restored.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore

Step

Action

Restore From Checkpoint


1

To change the status of the controller to Fail, open the Services window and restart the
Experion CDA-SP service.

ATTENTION
To open Services window, click StartRun and type
Services.msc and click OK
To restart the Experion CDA-SP service, right click on
the service and select Restart

Open Control Builder, if not already open. The status of SIM_C300 / SCE59 has
changed to idle and the CEE and I/O status changed to fail.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Step

4/13/2012

Action

Right-click on SIM_C300 / SCE59 in Monitoring tab. Select Checkpoint > Restore


from Checkpoint.

Verify that the Latest checkpoint status is Complete (in the Entirely column).

Select the Latest Checkpoint file from the list and click Restore.

Click Continue in the Restore from Checkpoint message window

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

16

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore

Step

Action

You should get a message indicating that the Restore completed successfully

Close both Restore from Checkpoint windows.

On to the Monitoring tab, check that the status of the controller and all the other items
under it appear in healthy status (green or blue).

10

Change the state of the CEE to WARMSTART.

11

Verify that all of the IO modules and Control Modules are active.

Restore Checkpoint From Detail Display

10

12

Repeat Step 1 to change the status of SIM_C300 / SCE59 to Fail.

13

Open the Station application.

14

Open the Detail Display for SIM_C300 / SCE59.

15

Click Checkpoint Operations tab in the detail display

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Step

4/13/2012

Action

16

Change the Security Level to mngr. Click Restore from checkpoint.

17

Repeat earlier steps to restore the checkpoint of SIM_C300 / SCE59

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

16

11

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore

Step
18

12

Action
Open the detail display of SIM_CEEC300 / CEESCEFB61 and change the state of CEE
to WARMSTART

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Step

Action

19

Go back to Control Builder Monitoring tab and verify that the status of SIM_C300 /
SCE59 controller and its I/Os are healthy. Activate the I/O modules and Control Modules
if not active.

16

ATTENTION
Checkpoint Save and Restore for Series C I/O, and
PMIO when used with C300, is supported from both
Control Builder and Station point Detail Displays
The screen might look different, if you are using SIMC300

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore

This page was intentionally left blank.

14

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization


Fundamentals

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Overview
Topics
PV Tracking
Mode behavior after IOL / IOP communication error

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

17

Initialization

Honeywell

Introduction

PV Tracking sets the SP equal to the PV when automatic control is


disabled (e.g. cascade is broken or the mode is Manual)
Setpoint (SP) tracks Process Value (PV) to avoid output bumps when
automatic control is re-established
Setpoint Limits are still enforced when automatic control is disabled and
PV tracking is enabled
If the PV is greater than SPHI, then the SP will be set equal to SPHI
If the PV is less than SPLO, then the SP will be set equal to SPLO

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

PV Tracking

The PV tracking option is typically configured for PID blocks in a


cascade configuration
Allows the PID block to resume control with no error after initialization or
when it is taken out of Manual mode
PV tracking option sets SP equal to PV when the cascade is broken due to
function block initialization, an operator action, or a program action (such as
setting the mode to Manual)

The PV Tracking option is enabled on the SetPoint Tab of a PID block

PV Tracking

PV Tracking when
block is Initializing
and mode is Auto

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

PV Tracking Options

If the first PV tracking option is enabled (and PV Tracking in Auto/Init is


not enabled), the function block will set the SP equal to the PV (subject
to SP limits) when the PID loop is set to Manual mode.
Note 1: PV tracking will not occur on recovery from a bad PV
Note 2: PV tracking will not occur if a block is in the Auto mode. If a PID
is in Auto mode, it means the SP value is normally stored by the user; if
PV tracking was available for Auto mode, the user SP would be lost
The first PV Tracking option will not work when the block is Initializing and
the mode is Auto

PV Tracking in Auto Initialize mode


When checked, PV Track in Auto/Init is enabled and provides PV Tracking
when the block is in Auto mode and it is undergoing initialization (INITMAN
is On)

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

PV Tracking

17

After enabling the PV Tracking option

SP is equal to PV when mode is


in MAN

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

PV Tracking in Auto/Init

When the mode is changed from CAS in a secondary controller,


INITMAN is turned ON in the primary controller
If the option Enable PV Tracking in Auto/Init is checked, the SP will track
the PV if INITMAN is ON, even if the mode of the primary controller is
Auto
SP tracks PV when
block is in an Initialize
state and in Auto mode

Mode is
AUTO

Block is in
Initialize State

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Initialization Propagation
Initialization propagation

Occurs when control blocks check the downstream blocks for broken loop
In case of a broken loop, each block will initialize itself and provide an
initialization request and initialization value to its primary (upstream) block
Initialization starts at the final control element and propagates upstream

In a Cascade control loop

Secondary controller block initializes itself and sends an initialization request


to Primary controller when its MODE is changed from CAS
Initialization does not occur when Secondary controller mode is changed
from AUTO/MAN to CAS

Initialization requests are brought in from downstream blocks using the


implicit BACKCALC connection for each output
Downstream block may propagate one shot initialization requests to an
upstream block
Occurs when a block is activated or returning from bad control

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Initialization (Cascade Control Loop)

When the mode of a secondary controller is changed from CAS,


INITMAN is turn ON in the primary controller
INITMAN parameter indicates the initialization status
Primary Controller

Secondary Controller

INITMAN is ON
for Primary
Controller

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Initialization Parameters
When INITMAN is ON

17

Function block is in Initialization Manual


Either a cascade is broken (i.e., secondary controller mode is not Cascade),
or initialization is requested by a secondary downstream block

INITMAN is available in following blocks


All RegCtl blocks, DevCtl, Pulse Count Control, Pulse Length Control,
HTmotor, LTmotor, Solenoid, ValveDamper

Secondary Initialization Option


When enabled, a Regulatory Control function block ignores initialization
requests from the secondary
There is one SECINITOPT parameter for each secondary
Number of secondary connection depends on the function block type

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Enable Bad Output Connection Option (BADOCOPTENB)

Honeywell

When communication to the Input Output Processor (IOP) is lost:


Mode is set to MAN
Mode attribute is set to OPERATOR
Initialization (this block & upstream)

Available in all regulatory control blocks


Applicable for the following I/O:
PM I/O
Series C I/O
Series A and H (except Fieldbus, Profibus, and DeviceNet on Series A I/O)

Disabled by default

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Bad Output Connection Option (BADOCOPT)


BADOCOPT = NaN

Initialization request (this block & upstream) occurs immediately


No mode shed occurs

BADOCOPT = 0 sec (same as BADOCOPTENB = Disabled)

Initialization request (this block & upstream) occurs immediately


Mode & ModeAttr = MAN & OPERATOR immediately
User must restore mode after the communication with the I/O is restored

BADOCOPT = 1 to 60 sec

Initialization request (this block & upstream) occurs immediately


Mode & ModeAttr = MAN & OPERATOR after BADOCOPT seconds
Or during the next CM execution after BADOCOPT seconds
Communication restored within BADOCOPT seconds:
Normal operation is automatically restored without user intervention
Communication NOT restored within BADOCOPT seconds:
User must restore mode after the communication with the I/O is restored
Bad Output Connection Option:
Nan, 0, 1-60

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell
Bad Output Connection Option (BADOCOPT) Diagrams
BADOCOPT
Lose communication to IOP
Communication restored
Time
= NaN
Init. Request
No Mode Shed

BADOCOPT
= 0 sec (same

Normal operation restored automatically

Lose communication to IOP

Communication restored

Time
Init. Request
Mode Shed

as BADOCOPTENB
= Disabled)

User must restore mode

Communication restored

BADOCOPT
= 1 to 60 sec

Lose communication to IOP

Communication restored

BADOCOPT Seconds

Time
Init. Request

Mode shed
User must restore mode

Normal operation restored automatically


PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

RegCtl Block Detail Display

17

Bad Output Connection Options (BADOCOPT) is available on Main tab


of detail display

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Uncommanded Mode Change Alarm

Alarm indicates a mode change due to the Bad Output Connection


Option
Only available when BADOCOPTENB is enabled

Alarm returns to normal when the user restores (changes to) any mode

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

What Causes an I/O Communication Failure?


The following result in an I/O communication failure:

Removing the physical card from the rack


Loss of communication on the I/O link
Power cycle of the remote chassis which has an AO or DO card
The diagnostic failure of an individual slot
Failure of the I/O processor
Removing the local or remote CNI card or removing the ControlNet cable or
FTE cable connecting to the IOLIM

Items which do NOT cause the RegCtl block to shed mode:


Activating or inactivating an IOM function block
Activating or inactivating a CEE that contains an IOM block
Activating or inactivating a CM which has an AO or DO channel associated
with an IOM function block

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

PV Tracking
PV Tracking (when enabled) locks the SP to the PV -- the SP remains equal to the PV
(subject to SP limits) as long as the mode is Manual
PV Tracking in Auto/Init -- when the mode of a secondary controller is not in CAS, the
parameter INITMAN is turned ON in the primary controller. If the option Enable PV
Tracking in Auto/Init is checked, the SP will track the PV even if the mode of the
primary controller is Auto.

Initialization

Mode Behavior after IOL or IOP communication error

Initialization occurs in a cascade loop when the mode of a secondary controller is not
in CAS, which causes the INITMAN parameter to turn ON in the primary controller. In
a single loop, initialization can be caused by a problem with a secondary downstream
block. Any block that can be initialized has an associated BACKCALC variable.
Initialization requests from a points secondary or downstream block are brought in
through the implicit BACKCALC connection for each output.
Eliminates user intervention to restore regulatory control block mode, when
communication failure is restored very quickly
Provides a new parameter option (BADOCOPT) in regulatory control block to allow
users to select the mode behavior
Provides Access Lock to configuration parameters to prevent unauthorized user
access to the functionality

PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

17

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure a PID Control Module lab exercise and


the lab exercises that follow it
PID Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals


4/13/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: PID Control Module


Contents
Configure a PID Control Module ............................................................................................................3

17

Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200 & C300) .............................37

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Configure a PID Control Module


Practice
Objective

Configure a Control Module

Use the naming conventions for the Control Module and function blocks within the control
module.

Configure a Control Module with a single PID loop

Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server or Client machine loaded with Experion PKS Engineering Tools

Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server (This will be required at a later time to check
the control strategy.)

Control Builder running with the Project and Monitoring tree windows open

SIM-C200E/C200E, or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured

Excel Data Exchange open and loaded with the simulation spread sheet

17

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Introduction
The Heavy Feed Flow FC01 is built in this lab. This PID loop requires bumpless Auto Manual
transfer with alarms, groups, and historization enabled.

The PID loop will be built, loaded and activated. The remaining Control Modules, of a similar type,
are imported into the project.
To create a control strategy, a Control Module 11_FC01 must be built and function blocks inserted
and connected. Once the Control Modules are built or imported, you can test them with the
simulation.
In this lab, you will build a control module for a simple PID loop 11_FC01 for the heavy feed to the
debutanizer tower T-100.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Create a Control Module (CM)

Step
1

Action
Open Control Builder through Configuration Studio.

Open one or two Project/Monitor tree windows as desired.

Project
Tree
window
Monitoring
Tree
window

17

Library
Tree
window

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step

Action

Select File > New > Control Module.

Double-click the blank chart background.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
4

Action
On the Main properties tab enter the following:

Name:

11_FC01

Item Name:

11_FC01_item

Parent Asset:

Analyser_C11

Description:

Heavy Feed To Debutanizer (Maximum 120 characters)

Click the OK Button

Save and close 11_FC01

ATTENTION

17

Control Builder numbers all new CMs sequentially.


You can use any 16-character unique name for the
CM in Project.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step

Action

For this Lab, use the specified CM names, because this allows you to test the CMs with
the pre-configured Excel spreadsheet, used for simulation.

CM 11_FC01 is added to the Unassigned node in Project window

ATTENTION
Your Project window may differ. Verify that 11_FC01 is
in the Unassigned node.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
6

Configure the Parameters for 11_FC01.

If the Main property page is not open, right click 11_FC01

Select Module Properties

Enter the following parameter details in the Main tab.

Engr Units:

m3/hr (Maximum 16 characters allowed)

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on the Main tab

17

Action

ATTENTION
The name of every CM must be unique server wide.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
8

Action
Click the Server Displays tab.
Enter the following Display details:
Point Detail Display:

sysDtlPIDA

Click the OK button.

ATTENTION
The Group detail display for 11_FC01 in Station will be
directly picked from the type of Point detail display
specified.
You can directly add a CM, to a Trend and Group by
entering trend/group numbers and the pen/position in
Trends and Groups windows, here or after building the
control strategy in the CM.

10

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step

Assign the CM to the controller CEESCEFB61 (For SIM C200E) or SIM_CEEC300


(For SIM C300)

(Assign) button on the toolbar,


With the CM 11_FC01 selected, click the
to open the Execution Environment Assignment dialog.

Select 11_FC01 in the CMs/SCMs tab in Available Modules list box

Select CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300 in the Assign To list box

Click the Assign button

11_FC01 is added to Assigned Modules list box

Click the Close button

17

Action

11_FC01 is now assigned to CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300, as indicated below

For SIM-C200E

4/13/2012

For SIM C300

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Add Function Blocks to a CM


After creating a CM, you must design the control strategy by adding relevant Input/Output blocks
and control blocks such as PIDs, device control or logic blocks.
The IOMs configured in the Configure C200E Hardware and Series A IOM/Configure C300
Hardware and Series C IOM lab are used here.

Step

Action

Double-click 11_FC01 in the Project window to open the chart view, and then maximize
the view.

Add Function Blocks to the CM

From the Library tab, expand the IOCHANNEL (For Series A I/O) or
Series_C_IO AI-HL (For Series C I/O)

Select AICHANNEL

For Series A I/O

12

For Series C I/O

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step

Action

Drag AICHANNEL into the 11_FC01 Project chart view.

Drag the following Function Blocks from their respective block Libraries and add to the
CM.
Block Family

Block

DATAACQ

DATAACQ

REGCTL

PID

IOCHANNEL (For Series A I/O) or


SERIES_C_IO AO (For Series C I/O)

AOCHANNEL

ATTENTION

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Add the blocks in the order specified above. For more


information on adding function blocks to a CM, refer to
the Knowledge Builder along the path
Experion R400 > Configuration > Control Building
Users Guide > Creating a Control Module >
Creating an Instance of a Basic Function Block

13

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
5

Action
After adding all the blocks, arrange them as shown below.

For SIM-C300

For SIM-C200E
6

Configure AIChannel parameters:

Double-click the AICHANNEL block to open the AI parameter configuration


form.

Enter the Channel Name as FI.

For Series C I/O

For Series A I/O

TIP (Only for Series C IO Channels)


Channel PV Range parameters can be configured in
Series C AI Channel block
Therefore, PV ranges for Analog Inputs must be
configured for both the Series C AI Channel block and
the DACA block
7

For C300s ONLY:


Change the ranges of the FI block as follows:
PV Extended High Range 600.9

14

PV High Range

600

PV Low Range

PV Extended Low Range

-6.9

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
8

Action
Assign the AI Channel to an AI Module.
For C200E:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC01.FI:
Module Name:

Channel Number:

In the properties of the AI channel (FI block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.

Select the channel number.

Click the Assign Channel Block button.

Click the OK button to close FI properties.

For C300:
Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC01.FI:
Module Name:

17

Channel Number:

4/13/2012

Click the OK button to close FI properties.

Right-click the AI channel (FI block) and select Function


Block Assign.

In the Function Block Assignment Dialog, select the


appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
9

Action
Configure a Data Acquisition Block. Double-click the Data Acquisition Block, to open
the configuration form, and enter the following:
Name:
DACA
Description:
Heavy Feed to Debutanizer
Engr Units:
m3/hr
PVEU Range Hi: 600
PVEU Range Lo: 0
PV Extended Hi Limit:
600.9
PV Extended Lo Limit:
-6.9
Clamping Option: ENABLE
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

ATTENTION
You must name this block DACA so that the
Honeywell supplied Analog Point Details display
functions properly when called from Station

16

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module

Step

Action

10

Select the Show Parameter Names checkbox located at the lower left corner. Note that
the parameter names now appear in place of the parameter descriptions.

17

Configure a PID Control Module

ATTENTION
This displays the parameter names instead of
parameter descriptions.

11

4/13/2012

Uncheck the Show Parameter Names checkbox.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
12

Action
To Configure Alarms, select the Alarms tab.
Enter the following:
PV High:

500

Priority: HIGH

PV Low:

Priority: Low

Accept the defaults for all remaining parameters.

13

18

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
14

Action
To Configure a PID Block:
Double click PIDA.
Enter the following:
Name:
Description:
Engineering Units:

PIDA
Heavy Feed to Debutanizer
m3/hr

PVEU Range Hi:


600
PVEU Range Low:
0
Select the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkbox.

17

Normal Mode:
AUTO
Normal Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR
Accept the defaults for all remaining parameters on this tab.

ATTENTION
This block must be named PIDA for the Honeywell supplied
standard PID Point Detail Display to function properly.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
15

Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID configuration form and enter the following
Control Equation type:
Integral Time (T1):
Linear Gain Options:
Overall Gain:

EQB
0.2
LIN
0.40

ATTENTION
The Algorithm form allows you to configure PID control
equation types, associated PID equation parameters
and gain options for the PID block.
16

Click the SetPoint Tab and enter the following:


High Limit:
600
Low Limit:
0
Ensure Enable PV Tracking is selected.

20

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
17

Action
Click the Alarms tab of PID and enter the following:
Type: OP High
Trip Point: 95

17

Priority: LOW

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
18

Action
To add or remove Block Pins in a Functional Block :
Click on the Block Pins tab.
In the Selected Parameters portion of the window, for the PV parameter, change the
location to Left by:
Click on the TOP value on the PV parameter Location column.
Select LEFT from the drop down combo box.

22

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step

Action

19

As a result of the previous change in pin location, the PV pin shifted to the left side of the
PID block faceplate, as indicated below.

Click OK.
20

Configure the AO Block.


Double-click the AOChannelA Block and enter the following:
FV

17

Channel Name:

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
21

Action
Assign the AO block to an AO channel.
For C200E:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC01.FV:
Module Name:

Channel Number:

In the properties of the AO channel (FV block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.

Select the channel number.

Click the Assign Channel Block button.

Click the OK button to close FV properties.

For C300:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC01.FV:
Module Name:

Channel Number:

24

Click the OK button to close FV properties.

Right-click the AO channel (FV block) and select Function


Block Assign.

In the Function Block Assignment Dialog, select the


appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Connect Function Blocks


After adding the Function Blocks, wire them together to form a Control Strategy. You can wire
Blocks together anytime you choose, before or after configuring block parameters.

Step

From the Main Menu, Select Chart > Insert > Wire, OR Click the
toolbar.

button in the

The cursor changes to a PLUS (+) sign inside the Project chart window

Click the PV pin displayed in the AICHANNEL (FI) block and then click the P1 pin
in the DATAACQ (DACA) block

These function blocks are now connected

17

Action

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step

Action

Repeat the above steps to connect PV pin of DATAACQ (DACA) to the PV of PIDA.

Connect the PIDA OP pin to the OP pin of AO.

26

Your CM should be similar to the one shown below.

Select File > Save.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
5

Action
Configure History Collection, Trends and Groups.
Double-click in the white space of the chart view of 11_FC01 to open its configuration
form. Select the Server History tab.
In the History Configuration section, in the Parameter column, row 1, click the
Selection) button to open the Point Selection form.

(Point

Select the row having Point name 11_FC01 and Block Name PIDA, as shown in the
screen capture.
Select OP for the Parameter.

4/13/2012

17

Click OK to close the Point selection form.

11_FC01.PIDA.OP appears in the History Configuration table.

Click to select the FAST (Fast History) and STD (Standard History) options

11_FC01.PIDA.OP will now be historized

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step

Action

Repeat the above steps to configure History Collection for 11_FC01.PIDA.PV in row 2 of
the Parameter column.

Add Point Parameters to Trends.


Click the Server Displays tab in the configuration form.
In the Trends section, in row 1, specify Trend # 1 as the Trend number.
In row 1, Pen column, click to select 1 from the drop-down menu.
In row 1, Enter 11_FC01.PIDA.PV as the Trend Parameter.

You can also select the parameter with the help of Point selection list, as shown in
an earlier step.

In the Groups section, row 1, specify Group # 11, Position # 1 and Group Parameter
11_FC01.PIDA.PV.
Click OK.

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step

Action

Click File > Save.

10

Close the 11_FC01 Project chart window.

This CM is located under CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300, which means it is


assigned to that execution environment

The symbol
controller

indicates that the CM has not yet been downloaded to the

The color gray of the connection icon indicates the CM is in Project mode.

ATTENTION

17

The screen capture might look different if you are


using SIM-C300

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
11

12

30

Action
Download this CM.

Select 11_FC01

Click the

Click Continue on the Load window showing the warning

Select the Automatically change checkbox.


This ensures that the post load state is automatically set as ACTIVE

on the toolbar

Click OK.

A Load dialog box appears and closes on a successful download

In Project, notice that there is no

symbol in front of 11_FC01

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
13

Action
Click the Monitoring tab to verify that 11_FC01 is active (green).

If the CM is active (green) skip the next step

If the CM is inactive (blue) perform the next step


ATTENTION

17

The screen capture might look different if you are using SIM-C300

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

31

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
14

Action
Activate the CM (right-click 11_FC01 and select Activate) or select 11_FC01 and click
the

(Toggle State) button from the toolbar, to open the following.

Click Yes.

Notice that the 11_FC01 changes to green indicating it is now active


Monitoring tree status information is indicated by different symbols and colors,
as shown below:
CPM/SCE Symbols
1

32

3 4

7 8

Grey - As seen in project tree.

Grey Project tree

Grey - Loaded not monitored

Red - Communication failure

Yellow - Not used

Green - Active

Red - Failed

Yellow - Not Loaded

Blue Loaded

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step

Action
CEE/ CEESCE Symbols
1

Grey - As seen in project tree

Grey - Loaded not monitored

Red - Communication failure

Blue - Inactive

Green - Active

Red - Configuration Error


CM Symbols
1

Grey - As seen in project tree

Grey - Loaded not monitored

Red - Communication failure

Blue - Inactive

Green Active

Open Station, access and refresh the Debutanizer_123 graphic.

Change the 11_FC01 controller to AUTO mode

Click the SP value and enter 400 in the 11_FC01 faceplate.

17

15

ATTENTION
Open the Tie_Back_New Excel spreadsheet to observe the values for PV
and OP.
If the PV value for the point is not updating then restart the Tie_Back_New
Excel spreadsheet. This spreadsheet is used for simulation purposes.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

33

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
16

Action
To watch the trend in Station:
Click the

button in Station.

Enter 1 in command line. Change the trend interval, if necessary.


Zoom the line trend to get a closer display.

17

34

To see the CM in the Group display:

Click

Type 11 and press the Enter key.

button on Station.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step
18

Action
From the Group Display, change the MD to MAN.
Change the OP to 30.

19

The PV will change because the OP changed. The SP follows the PV because PV
tracking is enabled

This tests your CM 11_FC01

In Control Builder, import (with CEE assignment) 11_FC02, 11_FC28 and 11_PC15 from
the following location:

17

C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\


Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C).
ATTENTION
If needed, follow the steps in the Import/Export Lab for
importing the above CMs.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database
is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\
Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A
If you are Using SIMC300/C300, the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\
Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_C
20

4/13/2012

From Project, download (with activation) the CMs imported in the previous step.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

35

PID Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module

Step

Action

21

Verify that the three CMs are active (green) in the Monitoring tab.

22

Open Station and access the Debutanizer_123 graphic.

ATTENTION
Verify that the imported CMs have values. (If
necessary, place the imported loops in AUTO mode
and provide suitable SP values to see a PV response.)

36

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID Control Module


Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200 & C300)

Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200


& C300)
Practice
Objective

To calculate the Processing Units and Memory units for given blocks for C200E, and C300.

Prerequisites

Knowledge of Memory Units and Process Units in C200E, and C300.

Introduction
This exercise will allow you to determine about Memory Units and Process Units used in
C200E, and C300.

17

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

37

PID Control Module


Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200 & C300)

Procedure
Control Module Calculation

38

Step

Action

Calculate MU and PU for C200E, and C300.

If CM is build using 1AI, 1DACA, 1PID, and 1AO, 6 Logic FBs, total Memory Units
consume is______?

If CM is build using 1AI, 1DACA FB, Total Memory Units Consume is ______?

Calculate Processing Units (PU) for a typical Regulatory control CM with Execution
Period of .5 Sec _____?

Calculate Processing Units (PU) for a typical Analog Data Acquisition CM with Execution
Period of .5 Sec _____?

Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 20 Analog Data Acquisition CM with Execution
Period of .1 Sec _____?

Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 40 Regulatory control CM with Execution Period of
.5 Sec _____?

Where do you verify the Memory Units (MU) consumption in C300? _______

Calculate Processing Units (PU) for a typical Device control CM with Execution Period of
.1 Sec _____?

10

Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 50 Device control CM with Execution Period of .1
Sec _____?

11

Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 4 SCM with Execution Period of .1 Sec _____?

12

Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 40 Regulatory control CM _____?

13

Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 5 Auxiliary Function CM _____?

14

Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 10 Analog Data Acquisition CM _____?

15

Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 100 Device control CM _____?

16

Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 10 Logic control CM _____?

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Topic: PID with Split Range Control Module


Contents

18

Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs ...................................................................3

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs


Practice
Objective

Configure a Split Range Control Module.

Configure an AUTOMANUAL and FANOUT block.

Prerequisites
Knowledge of Configuration Studio.

Experion PKS Server or client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded.

The Debutanizer_123 graphics loaded on the Server. (This will be required at a later time to
check the control strategy.)

Control Builder running with one or two tree windows open.

SIM-C200E/C200E or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured.

Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded.

18

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Introduction
A reflux drum D-100 has a split range pressure controller 11_PC16. It controls the pressure on D100 by split range action on two valves, PV16A and PV16B, where PV16A is reverse acting and
PV16B is direct acting.

The following table illustrates how valves PC16A and PC16B open with the split range signal.
Valve PC16A is the valve on the line bypassing the debutanizer overhead condenser E-110. Valve
PC16B is on the line connecting D-100 to the compressor interstage drum, which provides a back
pressure of 240 kPag (35 psig). The flare has a backpressure of 14 kPag (2.0 psig).
Signal from 11_PC16

Valve

Condition

PC16A

Fully Open

50

PC16A

Closed

50

PC16B

Closed

100

PC16B

Fully Open

You will first import 11_HC41 (D-100 Overhead to Flare) and 11_HC44 (D-100 Bypass from
Compressor Interstage Drum), which are hand-control valves (Analog Output points).
The 11_PC16 control module is then built, and you can test the logic with simulation.
CM Name

Action to be taken

11_HC41 and 11_HC44

Import the CMs from existing database.

11_PC16 Split Range PID Control


Module

Configure PID block, Auto Manual (AUTOMAN)


block and FANOUT block.

Perform the following procedures in Control Builder.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Procedure
Configure Split Range Control Loop

Step
1

Action
Import valves.
From Project, Import (with CEE assignment) the hand control valves 11_HC41 and
11_HC44 from the following location:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents \Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)

ATTENTION

18

If needed, follow the steps in the Import/Export Lab for


importing the above CMs.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
2

Action
Build a new CM.
Drag a Control Module from the Library tab to the CEE in the Project window.

Drag here

In the Name New Function Block(s) window, enter:


Destination Tag Name: 11_PC16
Destination Item Name: 11_PC16_item
Click Finish
This adds 11_PC16 in the assigned tree in the Project Tree window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
4

Action
Expand the tree and double-click 11_PC16 to open the chart view.
Double-click the white space to open the Parameter Configuration form.
Enter the following details in the Main tab:
Parent Asset:

Tank_C11

Description:

Tank Pressure Controller

Engr Units:

KPaG

Accept the defaults for the remaining parameters on this tab.


5

Click the Server Displays tab and enter the following Display details:
Point Detail Display:

sysDtlPIDA

Click OK.
ATTENTION
The Group detail display for 11_PC16 in Station will be
selected based on the type of Point detail display
specified

Design a control strategy by adding function blocks in the following sequence:


Block Family

Block Type

Block Name

Layout Key

IOCHANNEL (Series A) or
SERIES_C_IO AI-HL (Series C)

AICHANNEL

AICHANNELA

(A)

DATAACQ

DATAACQ

DATAACQA

(B)

REGCTL

PID

PIDA

(C)

REGCTL

FANOUT

FANOUTA

(D)

REGCTL

AUTOMAN

AUTOMANA

(E)

IOCHANNEL (Series A) or
AOCHANNEL

AOCHANNELA

(F)

AOCHANNEL

AOCHANNEL _1 (G)

SERIES_C_IO AO (Series C)

IOCHANNEL or
SERIES_C_IO AO (Series C)

Letters in the layout key column correspond to the following diagram.

18

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
7

Action
After adding the blocks, arrange them as follows:

E
D

B
C
F

ATTENTION
The screen capture might look different if you are
using Series C I/O

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step

Action
A

AICHANNELA is the pressure input channel.


Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.

DATAACQA block provides the signal conditioning for the input signal.
Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.

PIDA the PID controller for taking the control action.


Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.

FANOUTA block is a single X1 input and up to 8 outputs (Regulatory Control


block). The block applies a user-specified gain and bias along with a
calculated floating bias for each of up to 8 initialized outputs to guarantee that
each output is "bumpless" following initialization or mode changes.
Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.
1) In this CM, we are using the FANOUT block to send the same input
(11_PC16.PIDA.OP) to two outputs valves; PV16A and PV16B.

AUTOMANA: The (Auto Manual) block applies a user-specified gain and bias
along with a calculated floating bias to the output to guarantee that the output
is "bumpless" following initialization or mode changes.
Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.
2) In this CM, we are using AUTOMANA to reverse the output to the
PV16A which is a reverse acting valve.

AOCHANNELA is the output signal to valve PV16A.


Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.

AOCHANNELA_1 is the output signal to valve PV16B.


Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.

Configure the AI Channel (A).


Double-click the AICHANNELA block to open the AI parameter configuration form.
Enter following details:
PI

18

Channel Name:

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
9

Action
Assign the AI Channel to an AI Module.
For C200E:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_PC16.PI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

In the properties of the AI channel (PI block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.

Select the channel number.

Click the Assign Channel Block button.

Click the OK button to close PI properties.

For C300:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_PC16.PI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

10

Click the OK button to close PI properties.

Right-click the AI channel (PI block) and select Function


Block Assign.

In the Function Block Assignment Dialog, select the


appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
10

11

Action
For C300 only, set the range of 11_PC16.PI as follows:
PV Extended Hi Range

1800

PV High Range

1750

PV Low Range

PV Extended Low Range

Configure the Data Acquisition Block (B).


Double-click the Data Acquisition Block to open the configuration form.
Enter following details:
Name:

DACA

Description:

D-100 Pressure Controller

Engr Units:

kPag

PVEU Range Hi:

1750

PVEU Range Lo:

PV Extended Hi Limit:

1800

PV Extended Lo Limits:

Accept the defaults for the remaining parameters.

18

Click OK.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
12

Action
Configure the PID Block (C).
Double-click PIDA.
Enter following details:
Name:

PIDA

Description:

D-100 Pressure controller

Engineering Units:

kPag

PVEU Range Hi:

1750

PVEU Range Low:

700

Enable Secondary
Initialization Option checkbox:

Select this option

Normal Mode and Mode:

AUTO

Normal Mode Attribute and Mode Attribute:

OPERATOR

Accept the defaults for all remaining values on this tab.

12

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
13

Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID configuration form.
Enter following details:
Control Equation Type:

EQB

Control Action:

Direct

Integral Time (T1):

.2
LIN

Linear Gain Options :


.5

Overall Gain:

Accept the defaults for all remaining parameters on this tab.

14

SP

700

High Limit:

1750

Low Limit:

700

Click the Alarms tab and enter the following details.


OP High Trip Point:

90

Priority: High

OP Low Trip Point:

Priority: Low

18

15

Click the SetPoint Tab and enter following details:

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step

Action

16

Click OK.

17

Configure FANOUT Block (D):


Double-click on the FANOUTA block and enter following parameters:
Name:

FANOUTA

Description:

Split range Selection

Engineering Units:

kPag

High Limit:

100

Low Limit:

Normal Mode and Mode:

CAS

Normal Mode Attribute and Mode Attribute:

Operator

Accept the defaults for all remaining parameters on this tab.

14

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
18

Action
Click the Block Pins tab.
Change the Location of the X1 pin to LEFT
Change the Location of the OP[1] pin to RIGHT

18

Change the Location of the OP[2] pin to RIGHT

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
19

Action
Click the Common Output tab.
In Output Limits section, enter the following values:
High Limit (%) : 100
Low Limit (%) : 0

16

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
20

Action
Click the Individual Output tab.
Enter the following:
Output #1 and Output #2 Gain:

Output Bias for Output #2:

100

Ensure that the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkboxes for Output #1 and
Output #2 are selected.
Deselect the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkboxes for all other Outputs.

TIP
Each output of the FANOUT block is calculated per the
following equation:
CV(n) = X1*K(n) + [OPBIAS(n).FIX +
OPBIAS(n).FLOAT]
Where
X1 = input value

18

K(n) = gain of output CV(n) (user specified)


(n) = Output channel (number 1 to 8)
OPBIAS(n).FIX = fixed bias for output CV(n)
(user specified)
OPBIAS(n).FLOAT = floating bias for output
CV(n) (calculated)
Click OK to close the FANOUT block.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
21

Action
Configure AUTOMANA block (E):
Double-click the AUTOMANA block and enter the following:
Name:

AUTOMANA

Description:

Split Range for PV16A

Engineering Units:

kPag

Normal Mode and Mode:

CAS

Normal Mode Attribute:

OPERATOR

Mode Attribute:

OPERATOR

Accept the defaults for all other parameters on this tab.

18

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
22

Action
Click the Output tab.
Enter the following details:
Output Limits section:
High Limit (%) :

100

Low Limit (%) :

Gain and Bias section:


Output Bias:

100

Gain(K):

-1 (Note: you will get an error until the low limit is changed)

Gain High Limit:

10

Gain Low Limit:

-5

18

Accept the defaults for all other parameters on this tab.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
23

Action
Click on the Block Pins tab.
Change the Location X1 pin to LEFT.
Change the Location OP pin to RIGHT.
Click OK.

20

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
24

Action
Configure one of the AO Blocks (F):
Double-click the AOChannelA block and enter the following:
PVA

Name:
25

Click on the Block Pins Tab.

18

Change the Location OP pin to LEFT.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
26

Action
Assign the AO Channel to an AO Module.
For C200E:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_PC16.PVA:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

Click on the Main Tab.

In the properties of the AO channel (PVA block), use the


pull-down list to select the module name.

Select the channel number.

Click the Assign Channel Block button.

Click the OK button to close PVA properties.

For C300:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_PC16.PVA:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

22

Click the OK button to close PVA properties.

Right-click the AO channel (PVA block) and select Function


Block Assign.

In the Function Block Assignment Dialog, select the


appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
27

Action
Configure the other AO Block (G)
Double-click the AOChannelA_1 block and enter the following:
PVB

Name:
28

Click on the Block Pins Tab.

18

Change the Location OP pin to LEFT.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
29

Action
Assign the AO Channel to an AO Module.
For C200E:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_PC16.PVB:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

Click on the Main Tab.

In the properties of the AO channel (PVB block), use the


pull-down list to select the module name.

Select the channel number.

Click the Assign Channel Block button.

Click the OK button to close PVB properties.

For C300:

Step
5

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_PC16.PVB:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

24

Click the OK button to close PVB properties.

Right-click the AO channel (PVB block) and select Function


Block Assign.

In the Function Block Assignment Dialog, select the


appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
30

Action
Wire the connections as shown below :
If necessary, change the block pin positions from the Block Pin tab in the Configuration
detail form of each block.

ATTENTION

31

4/13/2012

18

The screen capture might look different if you are


using Series C I/O

Save the Project chart form.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
32

Action
Configure the History collection.
Double-click in a blank space of the 11_PC16 project chart to open the configuration
form.
Click the Server History Tab.
1.) Historize the following parameters as shown below:
11_PC16.PIDA.PV; 11_PC16.PIDA.OP; 11_PC16.PVA.OP & 11_PC16.PVB.OP

26

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
33

Action
Configure Trends and Groups.
Click Server Displays and add the following data:
Trend #

Pen # 3

Trend Parameter: 11_PC16.PIDA.PV

Group #

13

Pos # 3

Group Parameter: 11_PC16.PIDA.PV

Click OK.

35

Save and close the CM 11_PC16.


Select 11_PC16, 11_HC41, and 11_HC44 in the Project tree window and click the
button.

36

Click Continue in the Load Window.

37

Select the Automatically change . checkbox in the Load dialog box.

18

34

ATTENTION
The Post load state is selected as ACTIVE by default.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
38

Action
Click OK to download.
ATTENTION
The download window closes automatically if the
configuration contains no warnings or errors.

39

Open the Debutanizer_123 graphic in Station.

40

Verify the 11_PC16 controller is in AUTO mode and enter a set point of 1170.
Select 11_HC41 and 11_HC44 and enter a 1 in the value input box.
ATTENTION
If the value of PV is not changing to the new SP, close the
Tie_Back_New Excel spreadsheet and re-open it.
Notice 11_PC16 SP is 1170 and the PV value is adjusting to the SP.

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step

Go to Group 13 to view the details of 11_PC16:

18

41

Action

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
42

Action
Change the SP to 1180.
The controller takes the new SP value and increases the PV towards the SP as shown
below:

You can watch the change by going to Trend number 3 on Station.


43

30

Change the SP to 935 and let 11_PC16 control to the new SP.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
44

Action
Open Control Builder in the Monitoring Mode.
Double-click 11_PC16 to open the chart view as shown below:

In the above example, PIDA OP is 51.73, that is, its between 50 and 100%.
Based on the logic, PVA is CLOSED (OP= 0)
PVB is OPENED (OP = 3.47)

18

ATTENTION
Values seen in this figure may differ from that seen on
your screen

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

31

PID with Split Range Control Module


Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
45

Action
Change PIDA to MAN Mode and change OP to 50%.

PVA and PVB are both closed.

Change PIDA OP to 0%

PVA will OPEN 100%.

PVB is CLOSED.

Change PIDA OP as 100%

46

32

PVA will CLOSE.

PVB will OPEN 100%.

Change the PIDA mode back to AUTO.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Topic: Cascade PID Control Module


Contents

19

Configure a Cascade PID Control Module ............................................................................................3

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Configure a Cascade PID Control Module


Practice
Objective
Configure a cascade controller for the T-100 bottom level control.
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server or a Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded

The Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check
the control strategy.)

Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open

SIM-C200E/C200E, or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured

Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded

19

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Introduction
The first Cascade loop built is 11_LC14, the T-100 bottom level control. Although the loop has two
secondaries, 11_FC17 and 11_FC18, in this lab the cascade is built with just 11_FC17. 11_ FC18 is
configured in the next lab.
The P&ID shows that this loop has an interlock with the bottom safety valve and is the primary to
both outlet streams (11_FC17 and 11_FC18).
LSD15 is driven by interlock logic. The interlock (11_LSD15) will be imported into the project.
The cascade loop, with 11_LC14 as primary and 11_FC17 as secondary, will be built, and
downloaded in this lab. However, the functionality will be tested after the next lab when 11_FC18
is added to project. The loops require a bumpless transfer from MAN to AUTO to CAS.

The following CMs will be configured:


CM Name

Action to be taken

11_LC14 & 11_FC17

Configure as a simple cascade loop.

11_LSD15

Imported from:
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or
_C)

Modify 11_LC14

Add logic to check when level goes above 5%.

Perform the following procedures in Control Builder.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Procedure
Create a Control Module (CM)
Step

Action

Open Control Builder from Configuration Studio, if not already open.

Open the Project tree window in the upper left hand corner and the Library tree window
in the lower left hand corner.

19

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
3

Action
Build a new CM.
Drag a Control Module from the Library tab to the CEE in the Project window

Drag here

ATTENTION
This creates a new Control Module and also assigns the CM
to the CEE.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
4

Action
Enter 11_LC14 in the Destination Tagnames textbox and 11_LC14_Item in the
Destination Item Names textbox.

19

Click Finish.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
5

Action
Configure the parameters for 11_LC14.
Open 11_LC14 in Chart View.
Double-click the chart view to open the configuration form.
Enter the following details under the Main tab.
Name:

11_LC14

Item Name:

11_LC14_item

Parent Asset:

Level_C11

Description

T-100 Debutanizer Bottom Lvl Controller

Engr Units:

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

Click the Server Displays tab and enter the following display details:
Point Detail Display:

sysDtlPIDA

Click OK.

ATTENTION
The Group detail display for 11_LC14 in Station will be directly
picked from the type of Point detail display specified.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Add Function Blocks to a CM


After creating the CM, design a control strategy by adding relevant Input/Output blocks and Control
blocks (like PID, device control, or logic blocks).
The IOMs configured in the Configure C200E Hardware and Series A IOM / Configure C300 Hardware and
Series C IOM lab are used here.

Step

Action

Add the following function blocks from the Library tab of Control Builder according to the
sequence shown below.
Block

Family Block

IOCHANNEL or
SERIES_C_IO AI-HL AICHANNELA (A)

DATAACQ

DATAACQ

(B)

REGCTL

PID

(C)

CM 11_LC14 should resemble the following diagram:

19

ATTENTION
The screen capture might look different if you are using Series C I/O

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
2

Action
Configure the AI Channel.
Double-click the AI Channel block to open the configuration form
Enter following details:
LI

Name:
3

Assign the AI Channel to the AI Module.


For C200E:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_LC14.LI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

In the properties of the AI channel (LI block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.

Select the channel number.

Click the Assign Channel Block button.

Click the OK button to close LI properties.

For C300:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_LC14.LI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

10

Click the OK button to close LI properties.

Right-click the AI channel (LI block) and select Function


Block Assign.

In the Function Block Assignment Dialog, select the


appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
4

Action
Configure a Data Acquisition Block (B).
Double-click the Data Acquisition Block to open the configuration form.
Enter following details:
Name:

DACA

Description:

T-100 Debutanizer Bottom Level

Engr Units:

PV Character

LINEAR

PVEU Range Hi:

100

PVEU Range Lo:

PV Extended Hi Limit:

102.9

PV Extended Lo Limit:

-2.9

Clamping Option:

ENABLE

19

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
5

Action
Configure Alarms for the DACA Block.
Click the Alarms tab.
Enter the following:
PV High Trip Point:

98

Priority: HIGH

PV Low Trip Point:

Priority: LOW

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.


Click OK.

12

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
6

Action
Configure a PID Block (C).
Double-click PIDA.
Enter the following details:
Name:

PIDA

Description:

T-100 Debutanizer Bottom Level

Engineering Units:

PVEU Range Hi:

100

PVEU Range Low:

Enable Secondary
Initialization Option checkbox:

Check

Normal Mode:

AUTO

Normal Mode Attribute:

OPERATOR

19

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
7

Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID configuration form
Enter the following details :

Control Equation Type:

EQB

Control Action:

DIRECT

Integral Time (T1):

0.4

Linear Gain Options:

LIN

Overall Gain:

0.4

Click the SetPoint tab.


Enter the following details :

14

High Limit:

100

Low Limit:

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
9

Action
Click the Alarms tab.
Enter the following details:
OP High Trip Point:

98

Priority:

HIGH

OP Low Trip Point:

Priority:

LOW

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

10

Click the Output tab


In the Control Variable section enter the following:
CVEU Range Hi:

385

CVEU Range Low:

For a primary loop the CVEU limits are the range limits of the secondary
controller PV.

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.

19

Click OK.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
11

Action
Arrange the function blocks as shown.
If necessary, change the block pin positions from the Block Pin tab in the Configuration
detail form of each block.
Connect the block pins as shown.
Save and Close 11_LC14.

ATTENTION
The screen capture might look different if you are using Series C I/O

12

Configure 11_FC17.
The following procedure configures 11_FC17 by copying then modifying 11_LC14.
Right-click 11_LC14 in Project tree.
Select the Copy option.
Enter:
Destination Tagnames:

11_FC17

Destination Item Names: 11_FC17_item

Click Next (or Finish).

16

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
13

Action
A message opens indicating that the channel assignment will not be retained.
(You may or may not get this dialog box.)

Click Finish.
ATTENTION
Copying a CM retains all the blocks and connections except channel
assignments.
14

Assign 11_FC17 to CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).


Hint: Use the

(Assign) button

15

Double-click 11_FC17 under CEESCEFB61 (For SIM-C200E) or SIM_CEEC300 (For


SIM-C300) to open the chart view.

16

Double-click the AICHANNEL (LI) block.


Enter the following:
FT

Name:
17

For C300s ONLY:


Change the ranges of the FT block as follows:
PV Extended High Range 390
385

PV Low Range

PV Extended Low Range

-9.6

19

PV High Range

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
18

Action
Assign the AI Channel to an AI Module.
For C200E:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC17.FT:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

In the properties of the AI channel (FT block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.

Select the channel number.

Click the Assign Channel Block button.

Click the OK button to close FT properties.

For C300:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_FC17.FT:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

18

Click the OK button to close FT properties.

Right-click the AI channel (FT block) and select Function


Block Assign.

In the Function Block Assignment Dialog, select the


appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
19

Action
Configure the DACA Block.
Double-click the DACA block.
Enter following:
Name:

DACA

Description:

T-100 Bottom to Storage Tank

Engr Units:

m3/hr

PV Character:

None

PVEU RangeHi:

385

PVEU Range Lo:

PV Extended Limits Hi:

390

PV Extended Limits Lo:

-9.6

Clamping Option:

ENABLE

19

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
20

Action
Click the Alarms tab.
Change the alarm setting as given below :
PV High Trip Point: 375

Priority: LOW

Click OK.

20

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
21

Action
Configure a PID function block.
Double-click PIDA.
Enter following details:
Name:

PIDA

Description:

T-100 Bottom to Storage Tank Flow

Engineering Units:

m3/hr

PVEU Range Hi:

385

PVEU Range Low:

Enable Secondary Initialization


Option checkbox:

Check

Normal Mode and Mode:

CAS

Normal Mode Attribute:

NONE

Mode Attribute :

OPERATOR

19

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
22

Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID confiuration form.
Enter following details:

23

Control Equation Type:

EQB

Control Action:

REVERSE

Integral Time (T1):

0.8

Linear Gain Options:

LIN

Overall gain:

0.22

Click the SetPoint tab.


Enter following details:

24

High Limit:

385

Low Limit:

Click the Alarms tab.


Enter the following details:
OP High:

98

OP Low:

Leave the priority settings unchanged.


Click OK.

22

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
25

Action
ADD an AO Channel from the Library tab
IOCHANNEL > AOCHANNEL (Series A) or
SERIES_C_IO AO (Series C)
Double-click AOCHANNELA.
Enter the following:
FY

19

Channel Name:

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
26

Action
Assign the AO block to an AO channel.
For C200E:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC17.FY:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

In the properties of the AO channel (FY block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.

Select the channel number.

Click the Assign Channel Block button.

Click the OK button to close FY properties.

For C300:

Step
1

Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_FC17.FY:
Module Name:
Channel Number:

24

Click the OK button to close FY properties.

Right-click the AO channel (FY block) and select Function


Block Assign.

In the Function Block Assignment Dialog, select the


appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
27
28

Action
Wire 11_FC17.PIDA.OP to 11_FC17.FY.OP.
Select Chart > Insert > Parameter Connector or click the

button on the toolbar.

Add 11_LC14.PIDA.OP to 11_FC17.PIDA.SP with a parameter connection as shown


below.
For detailed instructions, go to Knowledge Builder:
Experion R400 > Configuration > Control Building Users Guide > Control Builder
Operations >Creating a control module>Connecting and Disconnecting Blocks >
Connecting Blocks with Parameter Connector Option.

This connection configures the 11_FC17 controller as a secondary controller


receiving the set point from the primary controller, 11_LC14. That is why the normal
mode of the 11_FC17 PID block is defined as cascade

19

ATTENTION
The screen capture might look different if you are
using Series C I/O

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step

Action

29

Save 11_FC17.

30

Configure History collection.


Double-click in the blank space of the 11_FC17 Project chart window to open the
configuration form.
Click the Server History tab.
Historize the following parameters :
11_FC17.PIDA.PV
11_FC17.PIDA.OP
Enable the checkboxes FAST and STD history for the point parameters.

26

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
31

Action
Configure Trends and Groups.
Click the Server Displays tab.
Configure the following:
Trend # 4, Pen 4, Add parameter 11_FC17.PIDA.PV
Group # 11, Pos # 4, Add parameter 11_FC17.PIDA.OP
Click OK.

Save and Close 11_FC17.

19

32

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Add Logic to 11_LC14 to check if the level is greater than 5%


Logic blocks are added to 11_LC14 to check if the level in T-100 is greater than 5%.

Step

Action

Open 11_LC14 in chart view.

Add the following function blocks from the Library tab of Control Builder according to the
following sequence:

Block Family

Block

LOGIC

GE

(D)

UTILITY

NUMERIC

(E)

(D) = GE: This Greater than or Equal to block checks if the designated input (IN[1]) is
greater than or equal to a second input (IN[2])

Use the GE to check if the T-100 level is greater than 5% by checking the
level with a fixed value of 5 given in the numeric block

The output of GE is further used in the interlock logic of 11_LSD15, which is


imported later

(E) = NUMERIC: This NUMERIC block stores up to 8 bytes of floating point values
within a defined upper and lower limit for use in a control strategy. We will use the
numeric to hold a fixed value for the GE block to use as an input

Configure the GE block.


Double-click the GE function block.
Verify the parameters as shown below. Accept the defaults for any remaining
parameters.
Click OK.

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
4

Action
Double-click the NUMERICA function block.
Enter the following:
Name:

LL_Comparator

Actual Value:

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.

19

Click OK.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
5

Action
Arrange the parameter connector wire, 11_LC14.DACA.PV, to IN[1] in the GEA block
Arrange the PV pin wire of the NUMERICA block to the IN[2] of the GEA Block.

30

When 11_LC14.DACA.PV is >= 5, the OUT pin of GEA block is set ON. This pin is
used in the logic of 11_LSD15 to reset an Open/Closed flag

Save the CM.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
7

Action
Configure History Collection.
Double-click a blank space in the 11_LC14 Project chart window, to open the
configuration form.
Click the Server History Tab.
Historize the following parameters:
11_LC14.PIDA.PV
11_LC14.PIDA.OP
11_LC14.GEA.OUT

Configure Trends and Groups.


Click the Server Displays tab.
Trends section
Trend # 1, Pen 3, Add parameter 11_LC14.PIDA.PV
Groups section
Group # 11, Pos # 3, Add parameter 11_LC14.PIDA.OP

19

Click OK.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

31

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step

Action

Save and Close 11_LC14.

10

Import (with CEE assignment) CM 11_LSD15 from:


C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS
\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)
ATTENTION
In the next lab, you will import a calculation Control Module that
will provide additional process connections and the simulation
required for 11_LC14.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
If you are Using SIMC300/C300 the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C

11

Open the Project tree, select 11_FC17, 11_LC14, and 11_LSD15 with the <CTRL> key
and click

32

in the toolbar to download the three CMs.

Click Continue in the Load window

Select the Automatically change. checkbox and click OK.

After downloading, select the Monitoring tab and verify all the CMs are active
(green)

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
12

Action
Open the Debutanizer_123 graphic in Station and observe the T-100 bottom level
points.

Using the Open HV39 combo box, select ON. This will allow the 11_LSD15 valve to
open when the level is greater than 5%.

19

13

Change the mode of 11_LC14 to Normal and then observe the changing PV

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

33

Cascade PID Control Module


Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
14

Action
Change the 11_FC17 flow controller to MAN mode and double-click the SP value of
11_LC14 to open the Point Detail page.
Observe that the Primary Controller 11_LC14 has now changed to INIT (the indication
appears next to the OP value, as shown below). Whenever the Secondary Controller is
not in Cascade Mode, initialization will be indicated as shown on the Primary Controller.

34

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Topic: Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Contents

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

20

Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries ...........................................................................3

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries


Practice
Objective

Configure a Cascade Loop with one primary and two secondaries for T-100 bottom level
control

Configure a FANOUT block to connect the primary controllers output to the setpoint of
two secondary controllers

Configure an Auxcalc function block to calculate the flow at the outlet of T-100

Experion PKS Server or a client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded

Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)

Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open

SIM-C200E/C200E or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured

Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

20

Prerequisites

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Introduction
In this lab, the 11_FC18 loop is added as a secondary to the 11_LC14 loop built in the previous lab.
Similar considerations of operation apply; the loops require bumpless transfer from MAN to AUTO
or CAS.

In addition, the ratio of the flow of 11_FC17 and 11_FC18 is 70:30


The Control Module built in the previous lab will be modified, downloaded, and tested
The remaining Control Modules will then be imported into Project, downloaded and activated
The following CMs will be configured:
CM Name

Action to be taken

11_LC14

Modify this CM to add a FANOUT block, used to connect the


output to two secondary controllers and maintain a fixed flow
ratio between the two controller outputs.

11_FC17

Connect parameter 11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP(1) to


11_FC17.PIDA.SP.

11_FC18

Copy and modify 11_FC17 as 11_FC18 and connect


11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP(2) to 11_FC18.PIDA.SP.
Add an Auxcalc block for adding the flow through 11_FC17 and
11_FC18.

11_AC12; 11_FC15;
11_FC19; 11_FC20;
11_LC16; 11_TC10

Import these CMs from:


C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Perform the following procedures in Control Builder.


Create a Control Module (CM)

Step

Action

Open Control Builder from Configuration Studio, if not already open.

Double-click CM 11_FC17, to open the chart view in the Project window.

Delete the the wiring which connects 11_LC14.PIDA.OP (Parameter Connector) to


11_FC17.PIDA.SP.
11_FC17 will be as follows:

ATTENTION
This is to facilitate the connection of the FANOUT
block to the 11_LC14.PIDA.OP.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

20

The AI and AO channel block might look different if


you are using Series C I/O

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step

Action

Save and Close 11_FC17.

From the Project tab, double-click 11_LC14 to open the Chart view.

Select the Library Tree window.

Add the following block to CM 11_LC14.

Block Family

Block

REGCTL

FANOUT

Double-click the FANOUTA block.


Enter the following details in the Main tab:

Name:

FANOUTA

Description:

T-100 Debutanizer bottoms

High Limit:

385

Normal Mode:

CAS

Mode:

CAS

Mode Attribute:

OPERATOR

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
9

Action
Click the Individual Output tab.
Enter the following details:
Output #1 Gain:

0.7 (Op1 will be 70% of the input signal.)

Output #2 Gain:

0.3 (Op2 will be 30% of the input signal.)

Verify the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkboxes are selected for Output
#1 and Output #2.
Clear the checkboxes for all other outputs.
Click OK.

ATTENTION

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

20

Output Gain values are not accessible through


graphics. If they need an online change, use the
Monitoring mode in Control Builder. This is explained
later in this module.

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
10

Action
Wire 11_LC14.PIDA.OP to 11_LC14.FANOUTA.X1.

CM 11_LC14 should appear similar to the one shown below

Change the Block pin positions, if required

ATTENTION
In this picture the GEA and Numeric block are not shown.

11

Save and Close the CM.

12

Double-click 11_FC17 to open the Chart view.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries
Step

4/13/2012

Action

13

Wire parameter 11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP[1] to 11_FC17.PIDA.SP with the parameter


connector, as shown below:

14

Save and Close 11_FC17.

15

Right-click 11_FC17 in the Project tab and select copy.

Enter the Destination Tagname 11_FC18 and Destination Item Names


11_FC18_Item

Click the Next button.

Copying retains all the function blocks and parameters except the Input and
Output channel assignments (you may get a dialog box indicating the NonRetained items).

If the following error appears, Click Close.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

20

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
16

Action
Assign 11_FC18 to CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).
ATTENTION
When copying a CM, the new CM gets put in Unassigned.

17

Open chart view for 11_FC18.

18

Configure the AIChannel block.


Double-click the AIChannel named FT
Enter following details:
Channel Name:

19

FI

Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_FC18.FI.
For C200E:
Assign 11_FC18.FI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the FI block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the FI block.
Assign 11_FC18.FI to the appropriate module and channel.

20

Configure the AOChannel block.


Double-click the AOChannel named FY
Enter following details:
Channel Name:

21

FV

Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_FC18.FV.
For C200E:
Assign 11_FC18.FV to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the FV block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the FV block.
Assign 11_FC18.FV to the appropriate module and channel.

10

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
22

Action
Modify the PID block.
In the Algorithm tab, change T1 to 0.9 and the Overall Gain to 0.2
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
Click OK.

23

24
25

Wire the parameter 11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP [2] to 11_FC18.PIDA.SP with a parameter


connector, as shown below.

Click

icon to Save 11_FC18 CM.

Add an AUXCALC block to 11_FC18.

4/13/2012

Block Family

Block

AUXILIARY

AUXCALC

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

20

Select the Library tab and add the following function block.

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
26

Action
Double-click the AUXCALCA block.
Enter following details:
Name:

FLOW_CALC

Description:

T-100 Bottom Flow

Engr Units:

m3/hr

Assignable Outputs PV Selection : C[1]


Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

12

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
27

Action
Add new pins to the FLOW_CALC block.
Click the Block Pins tab.
Select P from the Parameters window.
Select the Pin Position as Input.
Select the Array Indices as 1 for P[1] and then Add parameter P[1], as shown below.
Select the Array Indices as 2 for P[2] and then Add parameter P[2], as shown below.
Change the Location of the Pins, as shown in the display.
Click OK.

ATTENTION

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

20

The AUXCALC block evaluates user-defined expressions


and conditions for calculations. You can write up to eight
expressions. Each expression can contain any valid
combination of inputs, operators and functions, and may
perform arithmetic or logic operations. Optionally, the
AUXCALC can accept up to six inputs. In this lab, the
block provides a total flow value.

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
28

Action
Add the following parameter connectors to the Flow_Calc block.
11_FC17.DACA.PV to P[1] pin.
11_FC18.DACA.PV to P[2] pin.

ATTENTION
The AUXCALC block has access to all parameters for all
points, so the above two parameters were not needed as
inputs to the AUXCALC Block. The parameters could have
been referenced directly by the expression. The inputs
were added only so they would be visible from the chart.

14

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
29

Action
Add expressions to the block.
Double-click Flow_CALC.
Select the EXPRN #1 tab.
Enter the following expression, using the Points button, to open the Point Selection
dialog:
11_FC17.DACA.PV + 11_FC18.DACA.PV
Click OK.

4/13/2012

Save and Close the CM.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

20

30

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step

Action

31

Download and activate 11_FC17, 11_FC18 and 11_LC14.

32

In the Monitoring tab, open chart view for 11_LC14.

33

Double click on the FANOUTA block to open the parameter configuration form and verify
that the gain values under the Individual Output tab are as shown:
Output#1 = 0.7
Output#2 = 0.3
If not, change the values as above.
Click OK.

16

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
34

Action
Open the Debutanizer_123 graphic on the Station. If it is already open, refresh the
display by clicking the Reload Page
button at the top of the Station application
window.
Find the T-100 bottom level control loop and valves.

Set the 11_LC14 controller to NORMAL mode.

Set 11_LC14 SP = 60. After stabilizing (about 5 minutes), 11_LC14 is controlling


the level of T-100.

In the above example, the SP of 11_FC17 is 119.78 and the SP value of 11_FC18 is
51.33.
119.78 + 51.33 = 171.11
119.78 / 171.11 = 0.7
51.33 / 171.11 = 0.3

Click the SP value of 11_LC14 to call up the faceplate.


Double click on 11_LC14 faceplate to open the detail display.
Click on the Chart tab to see the CM logic.
Observe the PIDA.OP value.

ATTENTION
The Tie_Back_New excel sheet should be open to observe the values
for PV, SP.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

20

If the values are not updating then restart the Tie_Back_New excel
sheet. This sheet is used for simulation purposes.

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
35

36

18

Action

The 11_LC14.PIDA.OP is divided in a ratio of 70:30 between OP[1] and OP[2] of the
FANOUT block

In the display shown below, the Output of 11_LC14.PIDA.OP is 44.4559 and OP[1]
is 31.1204 and OP[2] is 13.3368

In either Station (detail display) or Control Builder Monitoring tab, open the chart
view for 11_FC17 and observe the SP as shown below:

In the above example, the SP is 119.7865, which is 70% of the required flow
169.0143

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries
Step
37

38

4/13/2012

Action

Similarly, observe the details of the 11_FC18 controller as shown below

In this example, the SP is 51.3326, which is approximately 30% of the required flow
169.0143

Change the SP of 11_LC14 to 62 and observe the effects on the three controllers as
shown below.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

20

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries


Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
39

Action
Import (with CEE assignment), download, and activate the following CMs:
11_AC12
11_FC15
11_FC19
11_FC20
11_LC16
11_TC10

These CMs are the remaining pre-built Cascade Loops shown on the
Debutanizer_123 graphic. They can be imported from the following location:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)

ATTENTION
Follow the procedures in the Import/Export Lab, if you
need a refresher.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database
is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
If you are Using SIMC300/C300 the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C

20

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

21

Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag


Indication Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Big Picture CTLACTN and OPTDIR

PV

ATO
(Fail Closed)

SP
CtlActn

CV

OP

OPFinal
OptDir
ATC
(Fail Open)

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Big Picture - OUTIND

PV

ATO
(Fail Closed)

SP
CtlActn

OP

CV

OPFinal
OptDir

OutInd

ATC
(Fail Open)

OP

DirectDispInd
OP = 100%

ReverseDispInd
OP = 100%

OP = 0%

OP = 0%

Direct
OP = 100%

CV = 100%

CV = 0%

Reverse
OP = 100%

OP = 0%

CV = 0%

CV = 100%

OP = 0%

Operator
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

SCM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

Output Parameter Selections Depend On

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Process
Ex: controlling level by controlling feed flow or drain flow?

Type of final control element


Ex: ATO or ATC? What position is safe?

Desired representation of valve on screen


Ex: Valve OPEN shown as 0% or 100% ?

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

21
Honeywell

Introduction
OUTIND parameter for RegCtl blocks

OP indication can be visible on detail display pages and on faceplates

OP Indication

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

Honeywell

OUTIND Values
The following table shows the possible values of OUTIND

Direct

No value reversal; No display indicators

Reverse

Value reversal; No display indicators

DirectDispInd

No value reversal; Shows display indicators with 0% as closed


and 100% as open

ReverseDispInd

No value reversal; Shows reverse display indicators with 0% as


open and 100% as closed

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

Honeywell

DirectDispInd

OUTIND = DIRECTDISPIND

DirectDispInd

No value reversal
Display indicators shown
100% indicates Open (Hollow)
0% indicates Closed (Filled)

Example:

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

PID OUTIND: DirectDispInd


AO Channel OPTDIR: Direct
PID OP 100% (20 mA) valve Open
PID OP 0% (4 mA) valve Closed
Unpowered state of AO results in 0 mA
and the valve will be Closed

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

Honeywell

ReverseDispInd

OUTIND = REVERSEDISPIND

ReverseDispInd

No value reversal on bar


Display indicators shown
100% indicates Closed (Filled)
0% indicates Open (Hollow)

Example:

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

PID OUTIND: ReverseDispInd


AO Channel OPTDIR: Direct
PID OP 100% (20 mA) valve Closed
PID OP 0% (4 mA) valve Open
Unpowered state of AO results in 0 mA
and the valve will be Open

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

21
Honeywell

Affected Regulatory Control Blocks


OUTIND is specific to the blocks shown
Blocks affected

AUTOMAN, FANOUT, ENHREGCALC, OVRDSEL, PID, PIDPL, PIDER,


PIDFF, RAMPSOAK, RATIOBIAS, RATIOCTL, REGCALC

Reverse OUTIND option


is NOT supported by

RAMPSOAK, PIDER

OUTIND has no affect on a blocks control operation


CTLACTN: Control Action still specifies the output direction of a PID
function block
OPDIR: Defines the output action to be applied to the conversion of OP to
OPFINAL

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Affected Parameters
OUTIND = Reverse
OUTIND = Reverse,
affects OP-related
parameters

OP, OPEU, OPHILM, OPEXHILM, OPLOLM, OPEXLOLM, OPHIALM.TP,


OPLOALM.TP, OPHIALM.PR, OPLOALM.PR, OPHIALM.FL, OPEXHIFL,
OPLOALM.FL, OPEXLOFL, OPHIFL, OPLOFL, OPHIALM.SV, OPLOALM.SV,
OPHIALM.TM, OPHIALM.DB, OPHIALM.DBU, OPLOALM.TM,
OPLOALM.DB and OPLOALM.DBU

Reversal supported for


additional parameters

SAFEOP, OPROCPOSFL, OPROCNNEGFL


STARTVAL (Only when STARTOPT is FixedOp)
STOPVAL (Only when STOPOPT is FixedOp)
HOLDVAL (Only when HOLDOPT is FixedOp)

Parameters NOT affected when OUTIND = Reverse


Anti-Reset Windup Status on Output (ARWOP)
Windup parameters (ARWNET/ARWNETIN/ARWOPIN)

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

10

4/13/2012

Honeywell

OP Limits - Direct

OP Indication: Direct

When OUTIND = Direct

OPHILM = 102.00
OPEXHILM = 102.90
OPLOLM = -3.00
OPEXLOLM = -5.90

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

11

Honeywell

OP Limits - Reverse

OP Indication: Reverse

When OUTIND = Reverse

OPEXHILM = 100.00 Actual OPEXLOLM


OPHILM = 100.00 Actual OPLOLM
OPLOLM = 100.00 Actual OPHILM
OPEXLOLM = 100.00 Actual OPEXHILM

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

[100.00
[100.00
[100.00
[100.00

(-5.90) = 105.90]
(-3.00) = 103.00]
(102.00) = -2.00]
(102.90) = -2.90]

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

12

4/13/2012

21
Honeywell

OP Alarm Limits - Direct

OP Indication: Direct

When OUTIND = Direct


OPHIALM.TP = 98.00
OPLOALM.TP = 12.00

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

OPHIALM.PR = LOW
OPLOALM.PR = HIGH
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

13

Honeywell

OP Alarm Limits - Reverse

OP Indication: Reverse

When OUTIND = Reverse


OPHIALM.TP = 100.00 Actual OPLOALM.TP [100.00 12.00 = 88.00]
OPLOALM.TP = 100.00 Actual OPHIALM.TP
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

[100.00 98.00 = 2.00]

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

14

4/13/2012

Other Parameters Affected When OUTIND=Reverse

Honeywell

Parameter

Value when OUTIND = Reverse

OPHIFL & OPLOFL

Reverse of actual OPHIFL & OPLOFL

OPHIALM.PR; OPHIALM.SV

Reverse of actual OPHIALM.PR; OPHIALM.SV

OPLOALM.PR; OPLOALM.SV

Reverse of actual OPLOALM.PR; OPLOALM.SV

OPHIALM.FL

Reverse of actual OPHIALM.FL

OPLOALM.FL

Reverse of actual OPLOALM.FL

OPHIALM.DB/DBU/TM

Reverse of actual OPHIALM.DB/DBU/TM

OPLOALM.DB/DBU/TM

Reverse of actual OPLOALM.DB/DBU/TM

OPROCPOSFL

Reverse of Actual OPROCPOSFL

OPROCNNEGFL

Reverse of Actual OPROCNNEGFL

STARTVAL (Only when STARTOPT is FixedOp)

100 Actual STOPVAL

STARTVAL (Only when STARTOPT is FixedOp)

100 Actual STARTVAL

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

15

Honeywell

Experion OP Alarms

OUTIND = Direct

OUTIND = Reverse

4/13/2012

Alarm Summary shows the limit and value that were reversed
OP values are reversed when displayed
Values of high alarms and low alarms are swapped

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

16

4/13/2012

21
Applications Affected When OUTIND = Reverse

Honeywell

The following applications are affected when OUTIND = Reverse

Sequential Control Modules (SCMs)


Custom Algorithm Blocks (CAB)
HMIWeb Displays
Server Scripts

The following applications need modification since they obtain the


reversed or swapped OP values when OUTIND = Reverse
SCMs, CAB programs, Schematics, and Scripts obtain data from the CEE
Applications and Schematics that use the OP alarming parameters
Application interfaces using Control Environment OP alarm dead-band and
timer values
Peer-to-peer communication

Applications and schematics that only use ARWOP do not need to be


modified

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

17

RedTag

Honeywell

RedTag:
Set from the Point Detail Display
Shows that the function block is
out of service
Indicates that the FB or
associated control strategy
needs repair or maintenance

Requires
ENGR access

Freezes the output and mode


from Operator access
RedTag
indication on
faceplate

Callout Message zone displays


FB is Red Tagged if user tries
to change the output
Supported in CEE and EHG

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

18

4/13/2012

Primary Indication of RedTag on Secondary

Honeywell

If Primary loop is cascaded and the Secondary loop is RedTagged, the


Primary loop indicates a Red Lock Symbol with a Plus Sign
Indicates that the secondary loop is Out of service

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

4/13/2012

19

Honeywell

OperatorTag
OperatorTag:

Allows an Operator to indicate


that the loop is under repair or
having maintenance performed
Does not freeze the output or
mode from Operator action
Gives a description of up to 15
characters while loop is tagged
Is indicated by a graphical
symbol adjacent to OP
Supported in CEE
OperatorTag
description

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

20

10

4/13/2012

21
Honeywell

Summary
OP indication can be visible on detail displays and faceplates

OUTIND (Output Indication) added to Regulatory Control Points to indicate


valve direction. Specifies how the OP parameter is accessed and whether
display indications will be shown on the blocks faceplate (DirectDispInd)
OUTIND can reverse the OP related values read and displayed when set
to Reverse (ReverseDispInd)

RedTag functionality is supported in EHG and CEE blocks


RedTag indication is shown when the function block is out of service and
freezes the output and mode from Operator access

OperatorTag functionality is supported in CEE blocks


Operator Tag can be set by an operator to indicate there is maintenance
on-going for a loop but does not freeze the output or mode

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

21

4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe Output Reversal and RedTag


Indication Options

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure a Control Loop for RedTag Indication


lab exercise
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options

22

11

4/13/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

Topic: Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Contents
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications .........................................................................3
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication ................................................................................11

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

21

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications


Practice
The Purpose of this Lab is to see the results of configuring the Output Indication (OUTIND)
parameter for RegCtl Blocks.
Prerequisites

Experion engineering and Server Node.

FTE Topology

SIM-C200E/C200E or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured

Experion PKS Software Package.

Introduction
An Output Indication (OUTIND) parameter is added in RegCtl for indicating faceplate Display as
Direct, Reverse or not indicated in any Special manner. It provides consistency with reverse output
parameter

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Procedure
Create configuration for Reverse Input

Step
1

Action
In order for this lab to work, the Tie_Back_New.xls file will need to be modified as
follows:
The cell which reads (gets) 11_FC02.PIDA.OP (Cell D9) needs to be modified to get
FV.OPFINAL (It currently gets OP) as shown below:
=getpointvalarray(1,G4,B9,"FV.OPFINAL","V")

Open Control Builder (if it is not already open).

From the Project tab, open chart view for 11_FC02.

Double click on the PIDA block to open the properties window. Go to the Output Tab
and enter the Output Limits as shown below:

Go to Alarms tab, note the OP High Trip Point and Priority.


Trip Point

Priority

OP High:

Go to Monitoring Parameters tab, add OUTIND as a monitoring parameter.

Click OK to close the PIDA Properties window.

Save and Close 11_FC02.

Download 11_FC02. In the load window, be sure to check the box to automatically
activate the control module.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

21

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step

4/13/2012

Action

10

After downloading, click the Monitoring tab and verify that 11_FC02 appears green. If
you are using Series C I/O, ensure the I/O channels are also active.

11

Open Station if not already opened. Go to the Detail Display of 11_FC02.

12

Change the station security level to MNGR.

13

Change the mode to AUTO, and change the SP to 9.3.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step

Action

14

Go to the PV & OP tab and verify that the Output configuration values match the values
shown here.

15

Go to the Alarms tab and verify that the Trip Point and Priority configuration values
match the values shown here.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

21

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step

Action

16

Go to the Chart tab. On the PIDA block, double-click on OUTIND and change the value
to REVERSE.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step

Action

17

Go back to the PV & OP tab and observe that the Output configuration values have been
reversed as shown here.

ATTENTION
The Output Limits are different for Direct and Reverse.
However, if OUTIND = DIRECTIND or OUTIND =
REVERSEIND, then the Output limits will remain the
same as when OUTIND = Direct.
In other words, the Output Limits do not change when
OUTIND = Direct, DirectInd, or ReverseInd. The
Output Limits only change when OUTIND = Reverse.

18

From Control Builder Monitoring tab (chart view), or from the detail display of 11_FC02
(chart tab), change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Direct.

19

Observe that the point has no OP alarm. Make note of the following:
OP High:
OP:
OP Low:

20

From Control Builder Monitoring tab (chart view), or from the detail display of 11_FC02
(chart tab), change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Reverse.

21

Observe that the point still has no OP alarm. When the OP is reversed, the OP alarm
limits are also reversed. If the OP alarm limits were not reversed, the point would have
gone into alarm. Make note of the following:
OP High:
OP:
OP Low:

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

21

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step

Action

22

Change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Direct.

23

With 11_FC02 in Auto, change the SP to 50 to generate an OP High Alarm. Do not


acknowledge the alarm, but observe the alarm indication in the Alarm Summary. Make
note of the following:
Condition:
Trip Value:
Live Value:

24

Change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Reverse.

25

Observe the change in condition on the Alarm Summary page. Make note of the
following for the new alarm:
Condition:
Trip Value:
Live Value:
Also make note of the following for the previous alarm:
Status of the OP High Alarm:

ATTENTION
The OP High Alarm is still shown (because it had not been
acknowledged), but is shown as returned to normal.
An OP Low Alarm is generated with a new Trip Value, and a
new Live Value.

4/13/2012

26

Acknowledge all alarms.

27

Change the 11_FC02.SP = 30 to remove all alarms.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step

Action

28
ATTENTION
The screen captures below are for demonstration only.
Notice the graphical indications on the faceplate when OUTIND = DIRECTIND or
OUTIND = REVERSEIND.

Reverse OUTIND
Direct OUTIND

29

Change OUTIND back to Direct before starting next lab.

30

In Control Builder, on the Project tab, for 11_F02.PIDA, restore the output limits as
shown below:
OPHILM

= 105

OPLOLM

= -5

OPEXHILM = 106.9
OPEXLOLM= -6.9
31

10

Save and download 11_FC02 (with activation).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

21

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication

Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication


Experion Software Installation Server
The Purpose of this lesson is to see the affects of enabling Red Tag and Operator Tag. After you
complete this lesson you will be able to check:

Red Tag and Operator Tag

Prerequisites

Experion Server running

Control Builder database loaded and running

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication

Procedure
Perform Task in Station

12

Step

Action

In Station, invoke the detail display of 11_FC02.

Change the mode of 11_FC02 to MAN.

Change the station security level to MNGR

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

21

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication

Step
4

Action
On the Main tab, check the RedTag Checkbox.

ATTENTION
When the RedTag option is enabled, a red color lock
will appear to the right of the OP.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication

Step
5

Action
Try to change both the Output and the Mode. Observe the information displayed in the
tool tip.

ATTENTION
The tool tip indicates that the function block is Red
Tagged. Therefore, the operator can not make
changes to OP or MODE
6

14

Uncheck the RedTag Checkbox.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

21

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication

Step
7

Action
Check the OperatorTag checkbox to enable Operator Tag.
Enter Operator Tag Description as Maintenance and press Enter.

ATTENTION
The OperatorTag option allows an operator to tag the block for operator
maintenance or a similar condition
Enabling the OperatorTag option does not lock the point's OP and MODE
parameters

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication


Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication

16

Step

Action

When the OperatorTag option is enabled, a flag will appear to the right of the OP.

Move the mouse over the flag which is shown to the right of the OP, and read the tool tip.

10

Clear the Operator Tag checkbox.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

22

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name


List

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Device Control Module

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Big Picture Device Control Point

Output Truth Table and State Names

Input Truth Table and State Names


State

State Name

DI

State

State Name

DO

State 1

START

State 1

START

State 0

STOP

State 0

STOP

DI

Device Control Module

DO

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Some Device Control Block Configuration


See Appendix (last book) for more details

Up to 3 States
Up to 4 Inputs
Up to 3 Outputs

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Simple Device Control Block with One Input, One Output

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Honeywell

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Interlock Strategies are implemented using Permissives, Override Interlocks,


and the Safety Interlock
Permissive P(0-2)
There is a Permissive for each state
Normally ON
Operator can select the state if its
Permissive is asserted (ON)
Can be Bypassed

P(1)
ON

Override Interlock OI(0-2)


There is an Override Interlock for each state
Normally OFF
When an Override Interlock is asserted (ON)
the Output is forced to its state
Can be Bypassed

P(0)
ON
OI(1)
OFF
OI(0)
OFF
SI
OFF

Safety Interlock SI
Normally OFF
Sets the Output to the Safe State when asserted (ON)
Cannot be Bypassed

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Honeywell

Device Control Block with Logic

Device Control Module

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

22

Honeywell

Device Control with Permissives and Interlocks

Honeywell

Project Parameters and Add Block Pins


Project Parameters

Select parameters of each block which will be available outside of the


template (ex: FAN_LOGIC.GEA.IN[2] )
Give each projected parameter a name (ex: Temp_Num)
This will be accessed by FAN_LOGIC.Temp_Num

Add Block Pins for the


projected parameters

FAN_LOGIC
Temp_Num

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Instantiate the Template (Create Instances)


HS_A

FAN_LOGIC
HS_B

HS_H

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Instance of
the template
HS_A

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
In this lesson you will learn how to use
templates and the substitute name list
to streamline the production of control
modules.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you
will know how to:
Build control modules using templates
Load and verify templates
Build control modules using the
substitute name list

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

22

Control Module with Template Added

Honeywell

Topics

Building Control Modules Using Templates


Loading and Verifying a Template
Building Control Modules Using a Substitute Name List

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Device Control Module

11

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
Templates are control modules created in Control Builder

Once created, templates may be used to build multiple copies of desired


control strategies
Templates allow for change to propagate from parent to child
Templates can contain other templates, up to five levels

Template

GEA

Temp_Num

IN[2]

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

In the Library tab, under System,


right-click Control Module
Select Make Template

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Build the Control Strategy


Build the control strategy and configure parameters

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

22

Honeywell

Make a Template

Honeywell

Identify Projected Parameters


Define custom parameters for your control module
Connect your custom parameters to exposed pins

Template
Temp_Num

GEA
IN[2]

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Add Block Pins For Projected Parameters

Add a block pin for each


projected parameter which will
be wired

Template
Temp_Num

GEA
IN[2]

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Instantiate makes a useable version of the template for project


Make Template makes a new template in the library (child of the
original)

The name this template


will have in project

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Insert a Template
Insert the template into a CM

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

22

Honeywell

Use Template

Honeywell

Complete CM with Template


Complete the CM with a template

Template

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Device Control Module

19

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Template Use


Templates are best used:
A) For control modules containing one function block
B) For complex graphics
C) Where a complex control strategy is used in multiple
control modules
D) As a tool to prioritize the alarm sequence

Template

GEA

Temp_Num

IN[2]
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
Templates
Templates
arebest
bestused
usedbefore
where
whereaacomplex
complexcontrol
control
You must
answerare
the
question
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
strategy is
used in multiple control modules.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Clear

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Building Control Modules Using Templates

Loading and Verifying a Template


Building Control Modules Using a Substitute Name List

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Device Control Module

21

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Templates in the Monitoring tab


Containment view / Assignment view

Templates
shown at root

Templates shown
as contained

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

22

Honeywell

Topics

Honeywell

Chart View of a CM with a Template

Green indicates that the template is active


Blue indicates that the template is inactive
Red indicates that the template has failed

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Device Control Module

23

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Template in Chart View

Double-click the template in the


Monitoring Tab

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Which statement about templates is false?


A) A blue border on the bottom and right hand side of
an instance of a template in the Control Builder chart
view tells you the instance is active
B) In Control Builder containment view, a template
appears as a function block in the control module
C) In the Control Builder assignment view, a template
appears as a control module in the CEE simulation
D) None of the above

Correct!
Incorrect.
A blue
A blue
border
border
on the
on the
bottom
bottom
andand
the the
rightright
hand
side
hand
ofside
an instance
of an instance
of a template
of a template
in the Control
in the Control
Builder
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
chart
Builder
view
chart
tells
view
youtells
thatyou
the that
instance
the instance
is inactive
is inactive
and not
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
and
active.
not
active.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Device Control Module

Submit

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Clear

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Building Control Modules Using Templates
Loading and Verifying a Template

Building Control Modules Using a Substitute Name List

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

22

Honeywell

Question 2: Loading and Verifying Templates

Honeywell

Build Templates using Substitute Name List

Create the substitute names


Connect them to function block types

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Build Templates using Substitute Name List

Use the parameter connection tool


Select the substitute name as a connection

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

The substituted names can be resolved to a function block parameter


when the template is instantiated.

Resolved

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 3: Substitute Name List


You may create templates to be:
A) Instantiated as stand-alone
control modules using your
substitute name list
B) Embedded control modules
using projected parameters and
block pins
C) All of the above

Yes!
No. The
The correct
correct answer
answer is
is "All
"All of
of the
the above".
above". You
You may
may
create
templates
The
correct
answerto
is:be instantiated as stand -alone
control
modules
or
embedded
control
modules
using
You must answer the question before
Your
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
answer:
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
projected
parameters.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Clear

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

22

Honeywell

Build Templates using Substitute Name List

Honeywell

Summary
When using templates, remember:

Templates are built in Control Builder.


created, templates may be used to build multiple copies of desired
Once
control strategies.
Templates allow for change to propagate from parent to child.
may create templates to be instantiated as stand-alone control modules
You
using your substitute name list or embedded control modules using
projected parameters and block pins.

Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure a Device Control Module with Logic and


Configure a Device Control Module with Interlock lab exercises
Device Control Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List


4/13/2012

22

Topic: Device Control Module


Contents
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic ...................................................................................3
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock ............................................................................39

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic


22

Objective

Configure a Device Control Module for Fans on the Heat Exchanger E-110 of the
Debutanizer Model

Configure basic Logic Blocks: NOT, AND, GE (Greater than or equal to)

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server or a client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded

Debutanizer graphic (debutanizer_123.htm) loaded on the Server. (This is required at a later


time to check the control strategy built in this lab.)

Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open

SCE Controller and IOMs configured

Configure Data Acquisition Control Module and configure PID Control Module labs are
completed

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Introduction
The control logic for switching the fans on Condenser E-110 is developed in this lab.

Operationally, the cooling fans are turned on in case the top temperature of 11_TI25 is greater than
a specified value. The Operator initiates the start command and each additional fan starts as the
temperature increases. When the temperature reaches 260 Deg C then 11_TI25 resets and the fans
turn OFF automatically.

The module will be built, loaded and tested

The implementation is as follows:

The DEVCTL (Device Control) block is a multi-input, multi-output function that provides an
interface to discrete devices such as motors, solenoid valves, and motor-operated valves. This block
provides built-in structures for handling interlocks and supports the display of interlock conditions
in group, detail, and graphic displays.
In this lab, Device Control points are used to control the cooling fans of the heat exchanger
E-110. When the temperature of T-100 overhead (11_TI25) goes above 55 Deg C, then FAN A
(11_HS14A) is started.
Similarly, FAN B (11_HS14B) is started only if the temperature goes above 60 Deg C and the other
fans are started sequentially according to the temperature of the tower top (11_TI25).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Procedure

4/13/2012

22

Create a Template
Step

Action

Launch Control Builder from Configuration Studio, if not already open.

Create a Template.

Click the + icon adjacent to System in the library

Right click CONTROLMODULE

Select Make Template

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
3

Action
Configure CM Parameters.
Double-click the blank space in the chart view of the new Template form.
Enter FAN_LOGIC in the Name field.
Enter FAN_LOGIC_ITEM in the Item Name field.
Enter FAN TEMP CONTROL in the Description field.
Enter FANS_C11 in the Parent Asset field (use browser to select parent asset).
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
4

Action
Click the Server Displays tab.

22

Enter the following display details:


Point Detail Display:

sysDtldevctlA

ATTENTION
The Group Detail Display will be selected based on the
type of Point Detail Display specified.
These are the standard Honeywell Device Control
Point Detail and Group Detail Displays.

4/13/2012

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Adding Function Blocks to a Template

Step
1

Action
In the chart view of FAN_LOGIC, add Function Blocks from the respective Library
families, according to the sequence below and the diagram displayed in step 2.
Block Family

Block

LOGIC

GE

(A)

LOGIC

NOT

(B)

LOGIC

AND

(C)

DEVCTL

DEVCTL

(D)

ATTENTION
When the blocks are inserted according to the above
sequence, each one is assigned an execution order
(ORDERINCM) automatically, increasing in multiples
of 10. ORDERINCM determines the relative execution
order of blocks within the CM in ascending order. This
parameter can be changed as required. This field can
accept any number from 0 to 65535.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
2

Action
After adding all the blocks, arrange them as shown.

22

The explanation of each block is given below.

(A) GEA:
This block compares the Value in a Numeric Block (NUMERICA, added later) with the
actual temperature (PV of) 11_TI25.
(C) ANDA:
This block is a gate that provides the Start command to FANA if:
1. The temperature is greater than 55 Deg C and
2. The Operator has entered the start command.
(B) NOTA:
This block is a gate that inverts the signal from the ANDA gate and sends the signal to
the input OI(0) of the DEVCTLA block. This is the stop command for FAN A.
(D) DEVCTLA:
This block is the Device Control Block that provides the operator interface to the digital
I/Os.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
3

Action
Configure the Device Control Block.
Double click the Device Control Block (DEVCTLA.)
Enter the following details in the Main tab:

Name:

DEVCTLA

Description:

Fan A Start in E-110

Enter the Block Sizing parameters in the Main tab as follows:


Number Of Inputs:

Number Of Outputs:

Number Of States:

Enter the State Names as follows:


State 1 Name:

START

State 0 Name:

STOP

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

10

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
5

4/13/2012

Action
On the Inputs tab, enter following details:
Number of Digital Inputs:

1 (default)

Input 1 unchecked Box :

STOP

Input 1 checked Box:

START

A selected checkbox means Input 1 is in an ON condition

Input 1 is the feedback from the field device (FANA)

The above entries (illustrated below) indicate that when the device is in the Start
State, Input 1 is ON

When the Device is in the Stop State, Input 1 is OFF

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

22

11

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
6

Action
On the Output tab, enter the following data:
Number of Digital Outputs:

1 (default)

Output State checkboxes:


State 1
State 0

START:
STOP:

Selected
Not Selected

Select the Seal In Option.

See Online help (with option selected press F1 key) for Seal In Option details.

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

12

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
7

Action
On the Alarms tab, enter following data:
Time to
STOP

4/13/2012

Time to
START

Priority

Severity

Command Disagree

10

10

LOW

Command Fail

HIGH

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

22

13

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
8

Action
On the Block Pins tab:
Remove the SI pin.

Select SI in the Selected Parameters Table, click the Remove button

Add pins OI[0] and OI[1] as inputs on the left.

Select Input and Left / Right

Click the Add button

Click OK.

14

Connect 11_TI25.DACA.PV to the IN[1] pin of the GEA block with a parameter
connector, as shown below.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
10

Action
Arrange the Blocks and connect them as shown below.

22

ATTENTION
Change the pin positions as shown in the above figure using the
Block Pins tabs of each function block configuration form.

11

Save FAN_LOGIC.

12

Open the properties of FAN_LOGIC by double-clicking the blank space of the chart.
Select the Projected Parameters tab.
In the first Parameter Name location type Temp_Num.
In the Origin column, click the point selection () buton and in the Point Selection
dialog, select FAN_LOGIC.GEA.IN[2].
Click Insert Row to add a new row.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

16

Step

Action

13

Using the procedure in the previous step, insert new rows and complete connections as
indicated in the table below:
Parameter Name

Origin

Fan_Switch

FAN_LOGIC.ANDA.IN[2]

D_In

FAN_LOGIC.DEVCTLA.DI[1]

D_Out

FAN_LOGIC.DEVCTLA.DO[1]

14

Add pins and configure the Block Pins as shown below:

15

Click OK to close the parameters of Fan_Logic.

16

Save and Close FAN_LOGIC.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
1

22

Create a Device Control Module


Action
Create new Control Module and configure CM parameters
Create a new Control Module.
Double-click the blank space in the chart view
Enter the following details
Name:

11_HS14A

Item Name:

11_HS14A_item

Description

E-110A FAN

Parent Asset

FANS_C11

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.

4/13/2012

Click OK to close the properties of the new Control Module.

Save the CM and close the chart window.

Assign the CM 11_HS14A to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
5

Action
Open CM 11_HS14A in chart view and add the function blocks from the respective
library families, according to the table below:
Block Family

Block

Sequence

C200E:

DICHANNEL

(A)

UTILITY

NUMERIC

(B)

UTILITY

FLAG

(C)

C200E:

DOCHANNEL

(D)

IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO DI-HV

IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO DO-24B

18

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
6

Action
After adding the blocks, arrange them as shown.

22

C
D

ATTENTION
The DI and DO channel in the screen capture might
look different if you are using Series C I/O

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
7

Action
In the Library tree, click on the + icon adjacent to USER to expand the tree.
Right click on FAN_LOGIC.
Select Instantiate.

20

Change the Destination Tag Name to HS_A and the Destination Item Name to
HS_A_item.

Click Finish.

10

Assign the HS_A to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
11

4/13/2012

Action
Drag HS_A from the project tab into the 11_HS14A chart.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

22

21

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
12

Action
Double-click the DICHANNEL to open the DI parameter configuration form.
Enter the following data:
Channel Name

13

HI (the letter I)

Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS14A.HI.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS14A.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the HI block.
Assign 11_HS14A.HI to the appropriate module and channel.

14

Double-click the DOCHANNEL to open the DO parameter configuration form.


Enter the following data:
Channel Name:

15

HS

Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS14A.HS.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS14A.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HS block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the HS block.
Assign 11_HS14A.HS to the appropriate module and channel.

22

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
16

Action
Double-click the NUMERICA block.

22

Enter the following:


NUMERICA

Name:

PV High Limit: 95
PV Low Limit:

45

Actual Value:

55

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.


Click OK.

17

Double-click the FLAGA block.


Enter the following details:
Name:

FLAGA

Description:

Operator cmd to turn ON/OFF Fan

Accept the default for any remaining parameters.


Click OK.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
18

Action
Arrange and wire the blocks as shown below.
Change block pin locations, as necessary.
Save and Close 11_HS14A.

24

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
1

22

Copy Control Modules with Templates


Action
Right-click 11_HS14A in project view.
Select Copy.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step

Action

Change the CM Destination Tag Name to 11_HS14B and the Destination Item Name to
11_HS14B_Item.
Change the Template Destination Tag Name to HS_B and the destination Item Name to
HS_B_item.
Click Next.

26

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step

Action

22

3
ATTENTION
This step is necessary only for C200E.
Click Next.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
4

Action
Leave the Before and After entries as 11_TI25.DACA. (The GEA blocks of ALL
Device Control CMs will be comparing to the same temperature.)
Click Finish.

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module

Step

Action

Select 11_HS14B and HS_B in the Unassigned section of Project Tree and Assign both
tags to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).

Double-click and open 11_HS14B in chart view.

Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS14B.HI.

22

Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

For C200E:
Display the properties of the HI block (double click on it).
Assign 11_HS14B.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS14B.HI to the appropriate module and channel.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step

Action

Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS14B.HS.
For C200E:
Display the properties of the HS block (double click on it).
Assign 11_HS14B.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HS block.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS14B.HS to the appropriate module and channel.

Double-click NUMERICA to open the parameter configuration form.


Ensure the following values are specified:
PV High Limit: 95
PV Low Limit:

45

Actual Value:

60

(note: this is 5 more than the actual value for 11_HS14A)

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.


Click OK

10

30

Save and Close the Chart view.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
11

Action
Build six more CMs 11_HS14C through 11_HS14H. Following the same procedure you
just used to build 11_HS14B and the configuration information in the tables below.

22

Templates Tag Names And Item Names


CM
Destination
Tag Name

CM Destination
Item Name

Template
Destination
Tag Name

Template
Destination
Item Name

11_HS14C

11_HS14C_item

HS_C

HS_C_item

11_HS14D

11_HS14D_item

HS_D

HS_D_item

11_HS14E

11_HS14E_item

HS_E

HS_E_item

11_HS14F

11_HS14F_item

HS_F

HS_F_item

11_HS14G

11_HS14G_item

HS_G

HS_G_item

11-HS14H

11_HS14H_item

HS_H

HS_H_item

NUMERICA Configuration
CM Name

NUMERICA
PV HIGH
LIMIT

NUMERICA
PV LOW
LIMIT

NUMERICA
ACTUAL
VALUE

11_HS14C

95

45

65

11_HS14D

95

45

70

11_HS14E

100

70

75

11_HS14F

100

70

80

11_HS14G

100

70

85

11-HS14H

100

70

90

IO Module and Channel Assignment


ATTENTION
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the
end of Appendix to determine the correct module and
channel for each Control Module.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

31

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
12

Action
From the Library tab, expand the User function block, then right-click the FAN_LOGIC
template.
Select Module Properties.

32

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
13

Action
Select the Block Preferences tab.

22

Click Block Faceplate Color button.


Pick your favorite color from the resulting palette.
Click OK.
Open a few of the new CMs in chart view in project tree (11_HS14A through 11_HS14H)
and check that the color change propagated from the parent FAN_LOGIC to the child
templates.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

33

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Load and Validate Control Modules

34

Step

Action

Select and load CMs 11_HS14A though 11_HS14H and CMs HS_A through HS_H.

If the CMs were not activated when they were loaded (if the Automatically change
checkbox was not checked), activate the CMs from the Monitoring tab.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module

Step

Action

In the Monitoring window right-click the white space in the background of the monitoring
tree.

22

Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Select Assignment View or Containment View to toggle between views.


Select the + sign next to one of the new CMs.
ATTENTION
In Containment view, the contained CM is found under
the Container CM. In Assignment view, the Template
appears as any other CM in the tree.
Assignment View:

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

35

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
4

36

Action
Containment View:

Open Station and recall/refresh the Debutanizer_123 graphic.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
6

Action
Check the Fans status and the value of 11_TI25 as indicated below.

22

Click the Fan Control button to call the faceplate popup: The FANS are currently OFF.

4/13/2012

Use the Fan Control button to set all the fans to the ON state.

Wait until all fans turn off. This will happen just after the temperature
11_TI25 reaches 260 and is reset back to 0.0.

As the temperature of 11_TI25 rises, observe the logic allowing the


appropriate fans to turn on. See the following reference section.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

37

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
7

Action
Green indicates that the Fans are in the RUN state. Red indicates that the Fans are in
the STOP state.

Reference
Temperature value of 11_TI25 and the state of the Fans.

38

Temperature
11_TI25

FAN
A

FAN
B

FAN
C

FAN
D

FAN
E

FAN
F

FAN
G

FAN
H

55 to 60

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

60 to 65

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

65 to 70

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

70 to 75

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

75 to 80

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

80 to 85

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

85 to 90

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

90 to 95

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock


22

Practice
Objective

Configuring a Device Control Module for reflux pumps P62 and P63, and feed pumps P68
and P69

Use the Permissive and Safety interlocks of the Device Control Block

Understand block name references in CM and SCM

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server or Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools

Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server. [This is required (at a later time) to check
the control strategy built in this lab.]

Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open

SCE Controller and IOMs configured

Configure Data Acquisition Control Module and configure PID Control Module labs are
completed

Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

39

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Introduction

In this lab, the control for a pair of pumps, P62 and P63, is developed.

The Operator provides a Start command for Pump P62

If P62 does not start within 20 seconds from the Start command, then P63 will start

At any time, only one pump can be running

This strategy will be built, loaded, and tested

Device Control modules for the other pumps are then imported into the project

The three interlocks used for Device Controls are listed below.

The same logic is repeated for the Feed pumps P68 (11_HS68) and P69 (11_HS69)
1. Process Permissive Interlock (PI[0..2]
2. Process Override Interlock (OI[0..2]
3. Safety Interlock (SI)

40

These interlocks are associated with Device Control Block status values; that is,
State 0 and 1 for 2-state devices and State 0, 1, and 2 for 3-state devices

The Safety Interlock has the highest Priority and CANNOT be bypassed, while Process
Permissive Interlocks have the lowest priority

Override Interlocks OI[0..2], when active, force the commanded output (OP) to the
respective state regardless of the condition of the Permissive Interlocks. The operator cannot
command OP to a different state when the Override Interlock is active.

When BYPPERM is ON, an operator is able to change the OP regardless of the state of the
Override interlocks (BYPASS = ON). This does not affect the Safety Override Interlock
(SI). An Operator cannot bypass the Safety Interlock to change the OP. When you reset
the BYPASS parameter to OFF, any existing Override Interlocks, OI[0..2], take effect
immediately. Note: The default is OFF (unchecked - we are not using the Bypass option
here.)

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Procedure

22

Create a Control Module


Step

Action

1
ATTENTION
The screen captures for this lab assume the use of
Series A IO. If you are using Series C IO, please be
aware that you will be using the PV parameter for all of
your Series C DI connections and NOT the PVFL
parameter.
Create new Control Module and configure CM parameters
Create a new Control Module.
Double-click the blank space in the chart view
Enter the following details in the Main Tab.
Tag Name:

11_HS62

Item Name:

11_HS62_Item

Parent Asset:

Pumps_C11

Description:

P-62 Debutanizer Reflux Pump

Accept the default for any remaining parameters on this tab.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

41

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
2

Action
Click the Server Displays tab.
Enter the following Display details:
Point Detail Display:

sysDtldevctla

Click OK

ATTENTION
The Point Detail display 11_HS62 in Station will have
a standard Honeywell Device Control Point faceplate.

Save and close 11_HS62.


Assign 11_HS62 to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).

42

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

22

Add Function Blocks to a CM


The IOMs configured in the Configure C200E Hardware and Series A IOM/Configure C300
Hardware and Series C IOM lab are used here.

Step

Action

Double-click the CM 11_HS62 in the Project window to open the chart view.

In the chart view of 11_HS62, add Function Blocks from the respective Library families
according to the following sequence:
Block Family

Block

Sequence

C200E:

DICHANNEL

(A)

LOGIC

OR

(B)

UTILITY

FLAG

(C)

DEVCTL

DEVCTL

(D)

C200E:

DOCHANNEL

(E)

IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO DI-HV

IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO DO-24B

ATTENTION
For more information on how to add function blocks to
a CM, refer to the Knowledge Builder, Experion
R400 > Configuration > Control Building Users
Guide > Creating a Control Module > Creating and
saving a Control Module> Creating an instance of
a basic function block.
When you insert the blocks, one by one, according to
the above sequence, each one is assigned an
execution order (ORDERINCM) automatically,
increasing in multiples of 10. ORDERINCM determines
the relative execution order of the block within the CM
in ascending order. You can change this parameter, if
required. Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

43

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
3

Action
After adding all the blocks, arrange them as shown below.
The explanation for each block follows:

A
C

ATTENTION
The DI and DO channels in the screen capture might
look different if you are using Series C I/O
(A) DICHANNELA: This block provides feedback from the field for pump P62 indicating the
actual field state of P62 as follows:
DICHANNELA Status

P62 State

ON

START (i.e., Running)

OFF

STOP

(B) ORA allows either a signal from FLAGA or HS63 to force the pump off.
(C) FLAGA Used to give a manual Start command to the pump P62.
(D) DEVCTLA Device Control Block that provides the user-friendly interface to the digital I/Os.
(E) DOCHANNELA the actual signal to pump P62 in the field for the START/STOP command.

44

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step

Action

Save 11_HS62.

Double-click the DICHANNEL to open the DI parameter configuration form.

22

Enter the following data:


Channel Name
6

HI (the letter I)

Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS62.HI.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS62.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the HI block.
Assign 11_HS62.HI to the appropriate module and channel.

Double-click the DOCHANNEL to open the DO parameter configuration form.


Enter the following data:
Channel Name:

HS

Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS62.HS.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS62.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HS block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the HS block.
Assign 11_HS62.HS to the appropriate module and channel.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

45

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
9

Action
Configure the Device Control.
Double-click the Device Control Block.
Click the Main tab.
Enter the following:

46

Name:

DEVCTLA

Description:

P-62 Debutanizer Reflux Pump

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
10

Action
Enter the Block Sizing parameters in the Main tab as:
Number Of Inputs:

Number Of Outputs:

Number Of States:

22

Enter the State names in the Main tab as:


State 1 Name:

START

State 0 Name:

STOP

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

47

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
11

Action
Click the Inputs tab.
Enter the following details:

12

Number of Digital Inputs:

1 (default)

Input 1 unselected checkbox:

STOP

Input 1 selected checkbox:

START

Click the Output tab.


Enter the following data:
Number of Digital Outputs:

Outputs State 1 checkbox:

Selected

Outputs State 0 checkbox:

Not Selected

Select the Seal In Option.

See online help for additional information on the Seal In Option

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.

48

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
13

Action
Click the Alarms tab.

22

Enter the following data:


Time to
STOP

Time to
START

Priority

Severity

Command Disagree

20

20

LOW

Command Fail

10

10

HIGH

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.

4/13/2012

14

Click OK.

15

Click File > Save to save the CM 11_HS62.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

49

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step

Action

16

Double-click the Device Control block and select the Block Pins tab and add pin OI[1]
as Input Left.

Click OK.

50

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
17

Action
Double-click the FLAG block.

22

Enter the following details:


Name:

FLAGA

Description:

Turn Reflux Pump ON

Click OK.

18

Double-click the ORA block.


Invert the input IN(2) by selecting the checkbox for item 2.
Click OK.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

51

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step

Action

19
ATTENTION
This step is optional. Use either the Full Name option,
or the Short Name option as desired.
Click Tools System Preferences. In the Relative Reference Display Option field,
select Short Name so the user does not have to enter more information than required.

Click OK.
The following message requesting to close all other (remotely opened) Control Builder
sessions appears.

Click OK on the message box.

52

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
20

Action
Arrange and connect the blocks as shown below:

22

ATTENTION
For details of each block connection, refer to the chart
in the next step.

A
D

C
E

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

53

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
21

Action
Connection Chart for 11_HS62
PIN

TO FUNCTION
BLOCK

PIN

PVFL

ORA

IN[2]

PVFL

DEVCTLA

OI[1]

IN[1]

(CONNECT
LATER)

OUT

DEVCTLA

SI

HI

PVFL (PV for C300)

DEVCTLA

DI[1]

DEVCTLA

DO[1]

HS

SO

FROM
FUNCTION
BLOCK
FLAGA

ORA

22

Save and close CM 11_HS62.

23

Copy 11_HS62 as 11_HS63.


11_HS63 will be present in the Unassigned section in the Project tree window. Assign
the CM to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).

24

Open 11_HS63 in chart view.

11_HS63 contains the same blocks and wiring as 11_HS62. Only the HI
(DICHANNEL) and HS (DOCHANNEL) have no channel assigned
ATTENTION
The following steps will complete the configuration of 11_HS63.
Those steps will:

25

Assign HI (DICHANNEL) and HS (DOCHANNEL) to channels.

Modify the logic in 11_HS63 so that pump P63 will only start if
P62 fails to start within 20 sec after receiving the Start
command from the FLAGA block.

Because there can be only one FLAG block for the


START/STOP command on both pumps, the FLAGA block
must be deleted from 11_HS63.

To Delete the FLAGA block.


Select FLAGA.
Press the Delete button.

54

FLAGA and associated connections are deleted

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
26

Action
Drag and drop the following function blocks to 11_HS63.
Block Family
LOGIC
LOGIC

27

22

Block
ONDELAY
AND

Configure the ONDELAY gate.


Double-click the ONDELAYA Block.
Enter following details:
Name:

ONDELAYA

Delay Time:

20 (Delay time is in seconds)

Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.


Click OK.

ATTENTION
The ONDELAY block delays the Start command to
Pump P63 by 20 seconds.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

55

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
28

Action
Configure the ANDA gate.

This block sends the Start command, to pump P63 (delayed by 20 sec), if
pump P62 has not started

Double-click the ANDA function block.


Enter ANDA in the Name field.
Invert the input IN(2) by selecting the checkbox for item 2.
When finished, click OK to close the ANDA function block.

29

This option inverts the P62 Start signal. So if P62 has not started after 20 sec,
then only P63 will start

Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS63.HI.
For C200E:
Display the properties of the HI block.
Assign 11_HS63.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS63.HI to the appropriate module and channel.

56

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module

Step

Action

30

Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS63.HS.

22

Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

For C200E:
Display the properties of the HI block.
Assign 11_HS63.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HS block.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS63.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
31

Wire the blocks as follows:


Wire parameter 11_HS62.HI.PVFL (PV for C300) to the IN[2] pin of the ANDA block with
a parameter connector.
Wire the Out Pin of the ONDELAYA block to the IN[1] pin of the ANDA block.
Wire parameter 11_HS62.FLAGA.PVFL to the IN pin of the ONDELAYA block with a
parameter connector.

4/13/2012

The ANDA gate output is true if ANDA receives the TRUE signal at IN(1) and a
FALSE signal at IN(2) as IN(2) is inverted

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

57

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step

Action

32

Wire parameter 11_HS62.HI. PVFL (PV for C300) to the IN[1] pin of the ORA block with
a parameter connector.
Wire parameter 11_HS62.FLAGA.PVFL to the IN[2] pin of the ORA block with a
parameter connector.
Complete the remaining connections as shown below.

58

The ANDA gate sends the START command to the Pump through OI[1] only if
P62 does not start after 20 sec

33

Save and close 11_HS63.

34

Open CM 11_HS62 to configure the SI interlock (as shown in the following steps).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
35

Action

22

Wire parameter 11_HS63.HI. PVFL (PV for C300) to the IN[1] of ORA.

36

Save and close 11_HS62.

37

From the Project Tree window, import (with CEE assignment) CMs 11_HS68 and
11_HS69. Import from:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)
ATTENTION
Follow the procedures in the Import/Export Lab, if you need a refresher.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
If you are Using SIMC300/C300 the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

59

Device Control Module


Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step

Action

38

Open the Project Tree window and verify that the Parent asset of 11_HS68 and
11_HS69 is Pumps_C11. If not, change it to Pumps_C11.

39

Download (with activation) 11_HS62, 11_HS63, 11_HS68, 11_HS69.

40

Use the Monitoring Tree window to verify all the CMs are active (green).

41

Open the Debutanizer_123 graphics on Station. If the graphics already loaded then
reload the page so that new points are recognized.

42

60

All four pumps are OFF (Red)

Select the ON command for the pumps in the combo box.

P62 and P68 are ON (green)

If P62 and P68 fail which they will after sometime (up to 60 seconds) because of
the simulation in Tie_Back_New, then P63 and P69 will be commanded to start

After P62 and P68 have been commanded to start, it will be at least 20 seconds
before P63 and P69 are commanded to start because of the OnDelay function
blocks in P63 and P69

Therefore, after P62 and P68 turn on, it can be from 20 to 80 seconds (plus
screen update) before P63 and P69 turn on.

This happens because P62 feedback indicates that DI(1) is not ON within 20 sec
after the Operator issues a start command

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

23

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
In this lesson, you will learn about different Auxiliary Blocks

AUXCALC block
Counter Block

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Auxiliary Blocks
Auxiliary blocks perform mathematical functions

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

AUXCALC Block

Previously, the AUXCALC block was used for performing more


complicated mathematical functions
The AUXCALC block has mathematical and logical capabilities
The AUXCALC block uses a lot of memory (2452 bytes according to the
CEE Detail page)

Simpler calculation blocks have been developed

Use less controller memory


Ensure optimum use of memory

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

AUXCALC Block Constants


In R400, a Constants tab was added for calculator blocks

23

Can enable and enter values for up to 8 constants


Can define the access level required to change the constants
Can be used in expressions or as inputs or outputs

Constants used in
Expressions

Constants used as
inputs and outputs

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
In this lesson, you will learn about different Auxiliary Blocks
AUXCALC block

Counter Block

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Counter Block Overview


Provides a way to count events

Counts up based on CNTUPFL


Counts down based on CNTDNFL
Outputs are: Count and count limit reached flags
Count Limits determined by equation (Eq A to Eq H available)

Can be implemented in the following CEE environments


C200E, SIM-C200E, C300, SIM-C300, ACE, SIM-ACE

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Counter Block Functions

The counter can be reset to 0 (RESETFL), paused (PAUSEFL), or set to


a specific value (LOADFL, ININT32)
Output flags (QUFL, QDFL) are turned on or off based on:
Input (ININT32)
Count (OUTINT32)
Algorithm configured (Eq A to Eq H)
Ex: Eq A: QUFL is true if OUT IN; QDFL is true if OUT 0

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Count on Level vs. Count on Transition

If both CNTUPFL and CNTDNFL are ON


(or both transition to ON), or if both are
OFF (or both transition to OFF), then the
count does not change.

Count inputs are evaluated as edge-triggered quantities


Value increments / decrements if the input has changed from OFF to ON
t

Count on level flag (CNTVLVFL) checked


Count inputs are evaluated as level triggered quantities
Value increments / decrements on every execution cycle while the input is ON
t

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Counter Inputs
Accepts Integer 32, Float 64, and Boolean inputs

Selection of the input format is based on the Input Selection Specifier


(SELINT32FL) parameter
If checked, input format selected is INT32
If unchecked, input format selected is FLOAT64

If the selected input format is FLOAT64, the


Input Clamping Option (INCLAMPOPT)
determines if special handling is required
for out of range or invalid input values

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

23

CNTUPFL causes the count to increment


CNTDNFL causes the count to decrement
Count on level flag (CNTVLVFL) unchecked

Honeywell

Float 64 Input Conversions

Value clamping, or substitution for invalid or out of range values


Value fetched or
attempted to store

INCLAMPOPT

IN.FLOAT64 value

Value for Counter Load


Operation

Value for Limit


Checking

Value > 2,147,483,647.0

TRUE

2,147,483,647.0

2,147,483,647

2,147,483,647
NaN. Comparison is always
FALSE

Truncated Integer value

Value > 2,147,483,647.0

FALSE

NaN

Value will not be loaded.


Previous Counter value is
retained

Value within
2,147,483,648.0 to
+2,147,483,647.0

TRUE / FALSE

Floating point value


truncated to integer
equivalent

Truncated Integer value

Value < 2,147,483,648.0

TRUE

2,147,483,648.0

2,147,483,648

2,147,483,648
NaN. Comparison is always
FALSE
NaN. Comparison is always
FALSE

Value < 2,147,483,648.0

FALSE

NaN

Value will not be loaded.


Previous Counter value is
retained

NaN

TRUE / FALSE

NaN

Value will not be loaded.


Previous Counter value is
retained

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Counter Equations
Equation

Counter
Overflow

Counter
Underflow

QUFL (TRUE)

QDFL(TRUE)

+2,147,483,647

- 2,147,483,647

OUT >= IN

OUT <= 0

+2,147,483,647

- 2,147,483,647

OUT >= IN

OUT =
-2,147,483,647

+2,147,483,647

OUT >= IN

OUT = 0

IN

OUT >= IN

OUT = 0

+2,147,483,647

- 2,147,483,647

OUT >= 0

OUT <= IN

+2,147,483,647

- 2,147,483,647

OUT =
+2,147,483,647

OUT <= IN

- 2,147,483,647

OUT = 0

OUT <= IN

-IN

OUT = 0

OUT = IN

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary

Function blocks provide a variety of configurable functions for


Auxiliary
conditioning, calculating, and compensating PV data in support of
Experion PKS R400, the Constant tab and Expression Description
Inparameters
are added to calculator blocks
can be used to provide most features available in PLC
Counters
counters

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks


4/13/2012

23

Regulatory Control Functions

Describe MATH Function Blocks

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
In this lesson, you will learn about
Overview of MATH function blocks
Rolling Average Function block

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Math Blocks
Math blocks perform simple mathematical
functions

23

Use these blocks rather than the AUXCALC


block when performing simple math
More efficient use of memory
AUXCALC block uses 2452 bytes
Math blocks use 50 600 (see next page)

Mathematical function blocks provided


under the MATH Library

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

17

Honeywell

Library of Math Blocks


Math blocks provide efficient usage of memory
Block Name
ADD (8 input connections)

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Function
Sum of n arguments

1 MU = 1000 bytes
Memory Used
Approximately 110 bytes

SUB (2 input connections)

Subtraction

Approximately 60 bytes

MUL (8 input connections)

Product of n arguments

Approximately 110 bytes

DIV (2 input connections)

Division

Approximately 60 bytes

MOD (2 input connections)

(x MOD y)

Approximately 60 bytes

ABS (1 input connection)

Absolute value

Approximately 50 bytes

POW (2 input connections)

(x^y)

Approximately 60 bytes

EXP (1 input connection)

e to the power of x

Approximately 50 bytes

SQRT (1 input connection)

square root

Approximately 50 bytes

LN (1 input connection)

Natural logarithm of a number (log to the base of e)

Approximately 50 bytes

LOG (1 input connection)

Base 10 logarithm of a number

Approximately 50 bytes

NEG (1 input connection)

-(x)

Approximately 50 bytes

TRUNC (1 input connection)

Round down to nearest integer value

Approximately 50 bytes

ROLLAVG

Rolling Average

Approximately 600 bytes

ROUND (1 input connection)

Rounded up to nearest integer value

Approximately 50 bytes

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Introduction of Rolling Average block

Honeywell

Calculates a rolling average of values collected over a specified period


of time
Similar to the Rolling Average Algorithm available in the AM (TPS)

Available in the C200E, C300, ACE (and their simulated environments)


ROLLAVG function block is added from the MATH Library in Control
Builder

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Honeywell

Rolling Average Block Algorithm

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

The Rolling Average Calculation

Collect samples in buffer at specific frequency


Save the samples to the buffer
Mark samples as OK (good) or Bad
Calculate the average of the collected samples
Output = Sum of all samples (Good values) in buffer
No. of good samples in buffer

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Frequency of Sample Collection


The frequency of sample collection
is defined by two configurable
parameters

23

ROLLFREQ
Defines the number

ROLLFRBASE
Defines the time base:
Seconds, minutes, or hours

Sample Period (Frequency)


Defined by ROLLFREQ and ROLLFRBASE
Example: if ROLLFREQ is 4, and ROLLFRBASE is seconds then
samples are collected every 4 seconds
Must be a multiple of the period of the containing CM
Example: if CM Period is 2 seconds, the sample frequency can be a
multiple of 2 i.e. 2, 4, 6, 8, and so on
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

21

Load Time Error if Sample Period is Not a Multiple of CM

Honeywell

The collection frequency of the


ROLLAVG block must be a
multiple of the period of the
containing CM

If not, a load error will occur


The output (rolling average)
of the block will be NaN

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Error message at time


of download

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Length of Time for Which Samples Will Be Collected

Honeywell

ROLLBUF: Defines the period for which samples will be collected


ROLLBFBASE: Defines the unit of time for the collection buffer
Length of time samples will be collected
Example: if ROLLBUF is 20 and ROLLBFBASE is seconds then samples
are collected for 20 seconds

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Number of Samples Collected Buffer Size

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Rolling average size (ROLLAVGSZ)


The number of values that will be stored by the Rolling Average function
block
ROLLAVGSZ =

ROLLBUF
ROLLFREQ

The maximum size of the buffer is 3800 samples


When the buffer is full, the next sample will overwrite the oldest sample
in the buffer (FIFO)

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Rolling Average OK and BAD Value Count

Honeywell

ROLLAVGOK
The number of good samples in the buffer
Included when calculating rolling average

23

ROLLAVGBAD
The number of bad samples in the buffer
A bad sample is one whose value is NaN
Excluded when calculating the rolling average

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

25

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Example: Calculate Rolling Average

Consider the following values for calculating the rolling average

CM Period =
ROLLFREQ =
ROLLFRBASE =
ROLLBUF =
ROLLBFBASE =

2 seconds
6
seconds
24
seconds

Number of samples collected = 4


Values of samples collected: 4, 6, Nan, 8
Rolling Average (output) is 6
OUT = (4+6+8)/3=6

Block displays the good and bad values as


ROLLAVGBAD =
ROLLAVGOK =
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

1
3
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Example: Calculate Rolling Average


ROLLAVGOK = 7

ROLLAVGBAD = 3

Number of good samples


when calculating the rolling
average

Number of bad samples


excluded from calculating the
rolling average

Sum of all good samples


Number of good samples

4.5 4.6 4.5 4.9

NaN 4.6 NaN 4.7 4.8 NaN 4.5 4.6 4.5 4.5

ROLLAVGSZ = 10

ROLLAVG.OUT
= 4.6

4.5 4.6 4.5 4.9

Values stored in
buffer

Number of FLOAT64 values that will


be collected in the Average Rolling
function block

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Resetting the Rolling Average


ROLLAVGRST
Used to restart the rolling average
Can be done without inactivating the
CM

When ROLLAVGRST = ON

Sets all values = 0


Sets ROLLAVGOK = 0
Sets ROLLAVGBAD = 0
Turn the ROLLAVGRST to OFF
Restart sample collection
Restarts the calculation

Can be done by an engineer, SCM,


or CAB

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

23

Describe MATH Function Blocks

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe MATH Function Blocks


4/13/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Contents
Use Rolling Average Function Block .....................................................................................................3

23

Use Counter Function Block ................................................................................................................13

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Rolling Average Function Block

Use Rolling Average Function Block

Configure Rolling Average block

Navigate through different parameters of Rolling Average block.

23

Objective

Prerequisites

Knowledge of Configuration Studio.

Knowledge of Control Builder

Knowledge of navigating through Control Builder

Knowledge Builder access

C300/SIM-C300, C200E/SIM-C200E created and loaded in Control Builder.

TIP
The Rolling Average block cant be assigned to
C200/SIM-C200 CEE.
Introduction

4/13/2012

In this lab, you will learn the configuration and working of the Rolling Average block. The
Rolling Average block will calculate the rolling average of the Numeric output.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Rolling Average Function Block

Complete the following steps in Control Builder

Step

Action

Open Control Builder through Configuration Studio.

Click File > New > Control Module.

Double click on the chart to open properties window of control module.


On Main tab enter following:
Tag Name: CM_RollAvg
Item Name: CM_RollAvg_Item
Description: <Your choice>
Parent Asset: <Any Existing Asset>
Click OK.

Add a NUMERIC block from the UTILITY library to CM_RollAvg.

Add a ROLLAVG block from the MATH library to CM_RollAvg.

The CM will look as shown below:

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step
7

Action
Double Click on ROLLAVGA block to open properties window.
Rollavg frequency -time span

Rollavg frequency -units of time

SECONDS

RollAvg collection -time span

40

RollAvg collection -units of time

SECONDS

23

On the Main tab, enter the following:

Click OK.

ATTENTION
Rollavg frequency -time span (ROLLFREQ) should be
a multiple of the CM period. In this case, the
execution period of the CM period was left at
DEFAULT which is 1 second (default = 1 second for a
50 ms CEE). 4 seconds (the ROLLFREQ) is a
multiple of 1 second (the CM period).
Rollavg collection -time span (ROLLBUF) is configured
to be 40 seconds. This will cause a buffer size of 10
(ROLLBUF/ROLLFREQ). Therefore, 10 samples will
be used to calculate the rolling average.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step

Action

Connect the function blocks as shown.

Save, close, and assign the CM to the CEE of SCE59 (or SIM_C300).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step

Action

10

Load and activate CM.

11

Open CM_RollAvg in the monitoring mode.

23

Observe that the ROLLAVGSZ (Roll average buffer size) parameter is 10 and the
ROLLAVGBAD parameter is incrementing.

ATTENTION
ROLLAVGBAD is the number of bad samples that
have been put into the rolling average buffer. This
number is incrementing because the input to the block
is NaN (Not a Number). The rolling average
calculation uses only good values. In this case, the
input has always been NaN (since the CM was
activated). Because there have not been any good
values at the input, there are no values contributing to
the rolling average, and so the output is also Nan.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step

Action

12

Enter a value in the NUMERIC block (into the Actual Value field).
In the example shown value entered is 896.
You can enter any value.

13

Observe as the rolling average block gets the good samples it starts calculating the
rolling average.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Rolling Average Function Block
Step

Action

14

Observe that ROLLAVGOK is incrementing and that ROLLAVGBAD starts


decrementing. After some time, the buffer will be filled with good values. When that
happens, ROLLAVGOK will be 10 and ROLLAVGBAD will be 0.

15

Enter different values into the NUMERIC and observe that the output of the ROLLAVG
block changes accordingly.

23

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step
16

Action
Reset the rolling average by double-clicking on ROLLAVGRST and turning it ON.

Click Yes in the confirmation dialog.


17

10

Observe that the rolling average block restarts the calculation. Also ROLLAVGOK
becomes zero and starts incrementing to represent the number of good samples in the
buffer.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step
18

Action
Change the PV of the numeric block to NAN.
Observe that the output of the ROLLAVG block shows the average of only good values
received. NAN values are omitted from the calculations.

23

When the ROLLAVGBAD becomes equal to 10 the rolling average calculated becomes
equal to NAN.

ATTENTION
When ROLLAVGBAD becomes 10 it indicates that the
buffer has only NAN values and there is not a single
good value. Therefore, the rolling average becomes
equal to NAN.

19

Open the control module in project tab.


Remove the connection between the NUMERIC block and the ROLLAVG block.

20

Using a parameter connector, connect any 11_PC15.DACA.PV to the input of


ROLLAVG.

21

Save, Close, Load and Activate the CM.

22

Open the CM in monitoring mode.


Reset the ROLLAVG block.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step
23

Action
Observe the changes in the OUTPUT of ROLLAVG block.
In the example shown 11_TI21.DACA.PV is used.

ATTENTION
Make sure the TIE BACK excel sheet is running.

12

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Counter Function Block

Use Counter Function Block


Objective

The objective of this lab is to configure and use the Counter function block

Knowledge of Configuration Studio.

Knowledge of Control Builder and navigating through Control Builder

Knowledge of configuring and loading the Control Modules

C300/SIM-C300, C200E/SIM-C200E is created and loaded

23

Prerequisites

TIP
The Counter block cant be assigned to C200/SIMC200 CEE.

Introduction

At the conclusion of this lab, you will be able to do the following:


o Configure a counter function block
o Use the CNTUPFL,CNTDNFL,RESETFL,PAUSEFL,LOADFL flags

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Counter Function Block

o
Complete the following steps in Control Builder.

Step

Action

Open Control Builder if it is not already opened.

Create a new Control Module with the following properties:


Tag Name: CM_Count
Item Name: CM_Count_Item
Description: CM for Counter
Parent Asset: <Any Existing Asset>
Click OK in the configuration properties and save the Control Module.

Save the Control Module and assign it to the CEE of SCE59 (or SIM-C300).

In the Library tree, expand the AUXILIARY library. Drag and drop a CTUD block onto the
CM.

Double Click the CTUD block to open the block properties.


From the Block Pins Tab, remove the INFLOAT64 pin and add the ININT32 pin as an input on
the left.

From the Utility library, Drag and Drop the following blocks onto CM_Count:
FLAGARRAY
NUMERIC
TYPECONVERT

Double Click on FLAGARRAY to open the block properties.


On the Main tab, change the Number of Flag Values to 5.

14

On the Block Pins Tab, add 5 PVFL pins as outputs on the right.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Counter Function Block
Step

Action

Arrange and Connect the blocks as shown below:

10

Double click the CTUDA block to open its configuration properties.

23

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Counter Function Block

Step
11

Action
Enter the following in the configuration properties of the CTUD block:
Name: Counter
Description: Count Up or Down
Select the Count on Level Flag and Input Selection Specifier checkbox .
Leave other values to default and click OK.

TIP
If the Input Selection specifier is checked, then the
input format used in Counter block is INT32.
If the Count on Level Flag is selected, then the
counter increments or decrements the value as level
triggered quantities once every execution cycle.

16

12

Save and Close CM_Count.

13

Load and activate CM_Count.

14

In the Monitoring tab, open CM_Count.

15

Turn ON the PVFL[1] pin of the Flag array block which is connected to the CNTUPFL (Count
Up Flag) pin.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Counter Function Block
Step

Action

16

Verify that the value of OUTINT32 is incremented once every execution cycle.

17

Turn on the PVFL[4] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to PAUSEFL. Observe
OUTINT32 value is not getting incremented (or decremented ).

18

Turn off PVFL[4] pin of Flag Array block. Observe OUTINT32 value again starts incrementing.

19

Open the properties of the NUMERICA block. Enter 25 in the Actual Value column and press
enter. Click Yes in the Change Online Value dialog box.

20

Turn on PVFL[5] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to LOADFL pin.

23

Verify that the value of OUTINT32 is changed to 25 and that QUFL is ON.

21

Turn off PVFL[5] pin of Flag Array block. Observe that OUTINT32 is incrementing and QUFL
is still ON.

22

Turn off PVFL[1] pin of Flag Array block.

23

Turn on the PVFL[2] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to CNTDNFL. Observe
that OUTINT32 is getting decremented once every execution cycle.
Observe that QUFL is OFF.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Counter Function Block

Step

Action

24

When OUTINT32 value reaches 0 QDFL is ON.

25

Observe that OUTINT32 is decrementing and that QDFL is still ON.

26

Turn off the PVFL[2] pin of the Flag Array block.

27

Turn ON the PVFL[3] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to RESETFL pin. You
will observe that the value of OUTINT32 is set to 0.

28

Turn off the PVFL[3] pin .

29

Open the properties of the NUMERICA block and enter an actual value of 2147483645.

Leave the other values to Default and click OK.

18

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Counter Function Block

Step

Turn ON the PVFL[5] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to the LOADFL pin.
Verify that the value of OUTINT32 was changed to 2147483645.

23

30

Action

Turn off the PVFL[5] pin.


31

Turn ON the PVFL[1] pin of the Flag Array block connected to CNTUPLVL. When the value of
the OUTINT32 crosses 2147483647, an overflow occurs and the counter value changes to
-2,147,483,648 and continues counting .

TIP
Based on the value of the Counter Equation
(CNTEQN) parameter, the Overflow and Underflow
action varies.
For Equation C, if the Counter overflows from
+2,147,483,647, OUTINT32 changes to 0
32

4/13/2012

Turn OFF the PVFL[1] pin of the Flag Array block.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks


Use Counter Function Block

Step
33

20

Action
Close the CM_Count control module.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

24

Describe Search Functionality

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
Search engine is embedded in Configuration Studio
Search Utility is used to:

define the search criteria and initiate a search


search system databases, folders and files to determine where specific
strategies, templates, displays, and assets are used in the system
search for specific parameters that exist (defined) though they may not be
used
display detailed search results
save search criteria for future reference and use

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Search Types
The Search Utility supports
two query options:
Where Used
Parameter Search

Search Utility provides the


ability to navigate between
these search options

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

System Search

The Search Utility can be launched at either the system level, or the
server level
When launched as a system task, the search will allow one or all DSA
servers in the system to be searched
When launched as a server task, the search will allow only the connected
server to be searched

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Server Search
Search scope covers the entire Experion System
The Search Utility supports searching Assets/Alarm Groups

24

Search Utility, when launched as a Server task, will search the EMDB
(assets / alarm groups), but will search the folders (displays), QDB
(SCADA points), and ERDB (process points) only on the Server from
where it was launched

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Where Used Search

Where Used search option will list all the information regarding the
usage of:

Control Strategies/Templates in the ERDB (project!)


HMIWeb Displays and shapes in the HMIWeb Display Builder files
Asset and Alarm Groups in the Enterprise Model Database (EMDB)
SCADA Points in the QDB

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Where Used Search - User Interface


Search Query Pane

Search Results Pane

Status Bar
Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Search Query Pane Options


New - Clears the Search For and Look
In fields
Load - Loads saved search criteria
Save - Saves the search criteria as an XML file
Help - Launches a simpler version of
Knowledge Builder for search tips
Enter the objects name to search for
Refines a search by defining search
criteria (selecting specific data repositories and
file folders). Select double arrow for text input
boxes. A Browser Point Picker is available at
the right corner of all text input boxes

Launches a simpler version of Knowledge


Builder with tips on how to search
Switch to Parameter Search

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Select Server Combobox

Select the name of the Server(s) that will be searched when a search
query is started

24

If the Search Utility is launched at the system level, the Select Server dropdown box will list all Servers that are configured in the Enterprise system
model
When the Search Utility is launched at the Server level, the Select Server
drop-down box will list only the Server that is currently connected to
Configuration Studio

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Where Used Search Default


Where Used search opens All search options by default

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Where Used Search Specific Search

Honeywell

An introductory Search Query


pane is accessed when the
Back button is selected in the
All Search window
It also appears when Where
Used link is selected in the
Parameter search query pane

Where Used search has four


search options:

Process Points
Display Shapes
Assets/Alarm Groups
All/Any

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Honeywell

Look In Options

Database Search

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

24

Look In Options for Where Used Search

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Results Toolbar and Menu


Results Toolbar and Menu
Provide options to sort and filter search results

Simple text string search


on the search results

Specify the filter criteria


and click Filter to
view specific rows

Exports search results


(all/filtered) along with any
data in hidden columns into
.xml or .csv file formats

Print the Search results


in Report form

Select Columns in the


Results pane for clarity and
comparison
Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Where Used - Process Points


Searches for usage of a given Control
Strategy/Template/Objects defined in the
Engineering Repository Database (ERDB)
Searches Process Point references in
Display Files and Alarm groups
The instances of data objects that are
searched includes usage as:
a pin for a connection
a block reference

Instantiation, Derivation and Assignments of


function blocks and their parameters are
displayed in the results for a given strategy or
template when queried as Where Used

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Where Used Displays, Assets/Alarm Groups, All/Any

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Displays Shapes
Search for information on the usage of display shape references in Displays
and Shape files

Assets/Alarm Groups
Search for Asset and Alarm Group references defined in the Enterprise Model
Database (EMDB), ERDB, Display files and the Quick Builder file

All/Any
Search for data matching the text string specified in the Search For textbox

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Parameter Search

Search for Strategies/Templates based on Parameter names and values

24

Searches the ERDB and gets the information for all the Parameters with the
specified search criteria

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Search Query Pane Parameter Search

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Similar to Where Used Search Query Pane


Has only Process Points listed since
parameter query only searches the ERDB
Advanced Option is used to add specific
search criteria which helps refine the search

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Advanced Search Option

Used to define specific search


criteria (explained later)

Add the search criteria to


the Search Criteria List
Window at the bottom

Conditions used to combine


individual criteria to form a
complex search option

Used to move/delete/clear the


criteria in the Search Criteria
List Window

Search Criteria List Window

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Database Search

19

Advanced Option Parameter Search

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Field Textbox:
Specifies a Parameter to be used by the search criteria
A Browser Point Picker button is available to provide a list of parameters

Condition Combobox:
Used to select specific conditions for the search criteria
Shows only valid options based on the parameter type (String, Boolean or
Other)
String --

Other -Boolean --

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Advanced Option Parameter Search

Honeywell

Value Textbox:

24

Specify a valid value for the particular parameter type which is shown in the
Field textbox
Based on parameter type, a combobox or textbox will be available
If parameter type is Boolean, the options are TRUE/FALSE
A combobox displays the appropriate options
For Enumeration parameters, a combobox will list the appropriate
enumeration values
For other data types, an edit box is displayed where the value for
comparison is specified

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Example Parameter Search Results

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

PVEUHI is searched for values between 80 and 110


Search Results pane shows 74 points meet the specific search criteria

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Context Menu
Search Results Pane

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Wild Card Usage Special Characters

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Wild card characters such as an asterisk * and question mark ? can be


used in the Look In search option when specifying the item name
* implies one or more characters where as ? implies only a single
character

Generic entries are supported as Search attributes


Examples used in search criteria: ex*, CM_?
ex* will return search results ex1, ex2, example_cascade
CM_? will return search results CM_1, CM_2, CM_A (single character
replacement)

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Wild Card Usage


If just an asterisk * is used as the Search For attribute:

24

The search is performed on all Strategies/Templates, their Contained Blocks


and their parameters defined in ERDB
An * search on Display Files will search all points referred to in the files
specified
For Assets/Alarm Groups, the EMDB is searched for all Assets/Alarm
Groups defined and referenced
For SCADA Points, a search will be performed for Asset reference on all
points defined in the Quick Builder repository

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Search and Engineering Tools Operation

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Avoid conducting engineering tool operations and search queries


simultaneously
Both activities often require significant CPU and memory resources which
reduces system performance
When a query is started, the Search Utility searches the ERDB for
strategies, templates, parameters that meet the criteria specified in the
Search Query pane
Engineering operations performed in Control Builder, such as
Load/Create/Delete/Import/Bulk Build/Opening charts, also access
information in the ERDB
If engineering operations are performed simultaneously with search
operations, both compete for system resources in the SQL Server
Search queries, where the search criteria uses symbols (such as * or ?),
impose a high CPU and memory usage on the Server

Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Multiple Instance of Search Utility

Each Configuration Studio instance (on the same or different Servers):


Creates a separate instance of the Search Utility
Can create multiple instances of the Search Utility when launched at the
System level

One instance of the Search Utility may be opened for the System and for
each configured Server in Configuration Studio
Note:
Parameter Search and Where Used search cannot be simultaneously
performed on the same Server when connected at the Server level
Either a Parameter or Where Used search may be performed at the Server
level while a different search can be performed on the same Server by
connecting at the System level

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Database Search

27

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion
Describe Search Functionality

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Perform Parameter Search lab exercise.


Database Search

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe Search Functionality


4/13/2012

Topic: Database Search


Contents
Perform Parameter Search ....................................................................................................................3

24

Perform Where Used Search ................................................................................................................9

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Database Search
Perform Parameter Search

Perform Parameter Search


Practice
Objective
After completing this lesson you will be able to search for parameters using the Parameter Search
function.
Introduction

24

The purpose of this lesson is to familiarize you about the usage of Parameter Search in
Configuration Studio

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Database Search
Perform Parameter Search

Step
1

Action
Open Configuration studio if not already open. Select Your Server. Select Search for a
parameter in the system (Parameter Search) from the Search heading

In the Search For Parameter text box, click on the Point picker

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

button.

4/13/2012

Database Search
Perform Parameter Search
Step

Action

In the Browser Point Picker dialog box, select PVEUHI (High Range in EUs) parameter
and click OK.

24

4/13/2012

Display the Advanced options by clicking on the double arrow

In the Advanced options, click on the Point picker


Range in EUs) parameter, and click OK.

button, select PVEUHI (High

In the Advanced options, click on the Condition drop down list (just to the right of the
point picker).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Database Search
Perform Parameter Search

Step

Action

In the Select Parameter dialog box, select PVEUHI (High Range in EUs) 64 bit
parameter, and click Select.

In the Condition Combo Box, select >=

ATTENTION
The last few steps may need to be repeated to make
the Condition Combo Box display the >= selection.

Click in the Value combo box (to move your cursor into the field) and enter 90 into the
text box.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Database Search
Perform Parameter Search

Step
Click the Add
added.

button. The Search Criteria List window shows the criteria which is

24

10

Action

11

Click the AND operator and repeat the steps above to add a criteria PVEUHI <= 110.

ATTENTION
Be sure to make this condition <= (less than or equal),
and make sure the value entered is 110. Therefore,
the condition will be PVEUHI <= 110.

12

4/13/2012

Click on the Search button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Database Search
Perform Parameter Search

Step

Action

13

The Search Results Pane lists Control Strategies and Templates in the ERDB which
have a PVEUHI parameter value between 90 and 110

14

Look on the status bar (at the bottom of the window) for the status of the search, the
number of points found, and the time taken to do the search.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Database Search
Perform Where Used Search

Perform Where Used Search


Practice
Objective
After completing this lesson you will be able to search for a point using the Where Used search
Introduction

24

The purpose of this lesson is to familiarize you about the usage of the Where Used search in
Configuration Studio

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Database Search
Perform Where Used Search

Step
1

Launch Configuration Studio, connect to your system, and provide credentials of a user
with mngr security level.

In the Tree pane (left side), select your system. Click on the task Determine where an
object is used in the system (Where Used).

Type 11_FC01 in the Search For text box.

10

Action

Expand Displays by selecting the double arrow

next to the Displays option.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Database Search
Perform Where Used Search
Step

Action

Select the Point picker in the text box, expand items, check the DisplayShare2 option
(path) and click OK.

Click the Search button.

24

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Database Search
Perform Where Used Search

Step
7

Action
The Search Results Pane lists the usage of 11_FC01 in Process points, Displays and
Asset / Alarm Groups

ATTENTION
Search will take some time based upon your database
size

12

Look on the status bar for information about the search (including the status of the
search).

View both the Displays tab and the Process Points tab.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Introduction

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn about sequential control modules (SCMs).
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Build and edit SCMs
Configure transition and
step function blocks
Configure step timing

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

25

Describe the Configuration of SCMs

Introduction

Honeywell

SCMs:
Provide phase-level batch functionality
Command regulatory and discrete function blocks, contained within control
modules in a defined order, to accomplish higher-level tasks (for example,
boiler startup).
Contain the following function blocks:
Transitions that determine when to proceed
Steps that take action
Handlers for specified exceptions
Synchronization for parallel execution

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Topics

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Rules for Building SCMs


SCM Transitions
SCM Steps
Step Timing and Configuration
SCM Code Examples

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - Rules

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Sequential Control Modules - Rules

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Rule 2 SCMs can have multiple endings.

Candy Step

Ship It

Add
Chocolate

Add Grape
Flavor

END

END

END

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

25

Rule 1 Every SCM begins with an Invoke Transition.

Sequential Control Modules - Rules

Honeywell
Rule 3 Generally logic shall be made with Transitions and Steps in
alternate in SCM; however,
Step to Step connection is allowed in SCMs in R300 and later.
Transition to Transition Connections are still NOT allowed.

Red ! when
activated indicates
an error
(This is Elaborated
in the next slide)

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - Rules

A Failed SCM is indicated by a red !

The error exists at the start of main. Here the


INVOKE MAIN TRANSITION block is missing

Steps and Transitions are


shown in alphabetical
order, not in flow or
execution order.

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - Rules

A SCM with a severe warning is indicated


by a blue !

The error exists within main

A TRANSITION block to a TRANSITION


block connection is not allowed, even with
a SYNC block acting as an Intermediary.

In this case, execution of the SCM


will stop at the first of the two
transitions and will not continue
even if all conditions are true.

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - Rules

An SCM with a normal warning is


indicated by an inverted !

The error is within main, and


represents either a Transition
condition or a Step output failure

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

25

Ex: Transition configured with only


one condition, but several Primary
gates.

Sequential Control Modules - Example

Honeywell

Transition

Step

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: Building an SCM


An SCM begins with:
A) A project identification number
B) An END statement
C) An invoke transition
D) A transition

Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! SCMs
SCMsbegin
beginwith
withinvoke
invoke
You must answer
the question before
transitions.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Clear

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Rules for Building SCMs

SCM Transitions
SCM Steps
Step Timing and Configuration

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Sequential Control Modules - Transitions

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Transitions:
Evaluate if the sequential control module is ready to advance to the next
step
Ask questions
?

You can define:


Logic
Gates

Up to 10 conditions per transition


4 logic gates per transition
3 primary
1 secondary

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

25

SCM Code Examples

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - Transitions

Transition condition
descriptions

Selectable

Transitions determine when to proceed

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Sequential Control Modules - Transitions

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Transition conditions
(code)

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Fetch Enumeration

Some of the parameter values used in SCM Condition and Output


expressions require enumeration
Enumeration is a set of numbers corresponding to the parameter values
For example, the Mode parameter has an enumerated value set of 0 to 5
representing the possible modes

Select
Point.Parameter

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Why Use Fetch Enums?

Data type for all enumerated parameters used in Condition and Output
expressions is numeric
Hence it is necessary to enter a specific number corresponding to the
specific parameter state
For example
For Mode parameter
MAN (0)
AUTO (1)
CAS (2)
BCAS (3)
None (4)
Normal (5)

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

25

Drop down displays the


possible Enumeration
for selected
point.parameter

Click
Fetch Enums

Honeywell

Topics
Rules for Building SCMs
SCM Transitions

SCM Steps
Step Timing and Configuration
SCM Code Examples

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - Steps

Steps perform actions and send output commands to control module


function blocks
Note: the control modules mode attribute must be Program
You can define up to 16 individual outputs/actions per step
Minimum and maximum wait times are supported

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - Steps


Step output
descriptions

Selectable

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - Steps


Step outputs
(code)

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

25

Steps take actions

Honeywell

Question 2: Transition vs. Steps


Transitions and Steps:
A) Are identical to PID function blocks
B) Generally alternate in an SCM, if
required, Step to Step connection
is valid
C) Cannot be used in an SCM
D) Are built using Quick Builder

Incorrect!
Correct! Generally,
Generally,Transitions
Transitionsand
andSteps
Stepsare
areto
to
alternate within the SCM. However, in Experion
Release 300, step to step connection is allowed. But
transition to transition connections are still NOT
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
allowed.
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
Clickcontinuing
anywhere to continue.

Submit

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Clear

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Rules for Building SCMs
SCM Transitions
SCM Steps

Step Timing and Configuration


SCM Code Examples

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Sequential Control Modules Step Timing

Honeywell

The step timer begins


when the execution of
the step begins.

Maximum
Active Time

Minimum
Wait Time

Min Wait Time (in execution periods)


Specifies how long to delay evaluation of succeeding Transition block after
step outputs are stored. If Execution period is 50 milliseconds and Min Wait
Time is 100, the start of succeeding Transition is delayed by 5000 ms (5 s)

Max Active Time

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Sequential Control Modules Step Timing

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Enter times in number


of execution periods.
Ex: An entry of 600
is = 300 seconds
(exec. per. = 500ms)

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

25

The maximum number of execution periods that the steps can be active
before an SCM Step Alarm is generated
Configure the alarm priority on the SCM properties, not on the individual
step output properties

Honeywell

STEP Expression DELAY

DELAY is the period, in seconds, for which the output will pause before
its expression execution ie. before processing this output
Value is rounded up to the next multiple of the SCM period
For example with an SCM PERIOD of 10 secs, a value of 15 stored to
OP(i).DELAYTIME will be rounded up to 20
Value range is 0 to 25000000 seconds
Only applicable to Automatic outputs that have expressions configured
If a non-zero Step Output Delay time is entered for an Output with only an
instruction, the delay time will have no effect

A Steps active time should not be smaller than the largest output Delay
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Difference between = and := in an SCM

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Transition block is used to evaluate if a SCM is ready to advance to the


next step
:= is not supported in Transition condition expressions
= is used to compare or evaluate that a condition has been met or satisfied

STEP block performs actions and sends output commands to Control


Module function blocks
:= is used to set the value of a point parameter
= is not supported in STEP output expressions

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
Rules for Building SCMs
SCM Transitions
SCM Steps
Step Timing and Configuration

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Commanding Device
Control Block outputs from
SCMs

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

25

SCM Code Examples

Using Logic and Override/Interlocks

Honeywell

Logic and Override/Interlocks were


used to drive the Device Control
block output in the course labs as
in the case of the template
FANLOGIC
In a simple example:
An SCM could write to a flag in the
logic which could assert an
Override/Interlock forcing the output
to the associated state.

The following slides show several other methods for an SCM to


command Device
Control Module outputs:
1) Generic OP GOP
2) Output Command - OPCMD
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Generic OP - GOP

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

The SCM writes to the GOP parameter on the device control block.
This is the most commonly used device control command
Pros
Simple direct programming of devices allowing flexible easy to understand
designs

Cons
Programming must be structured to prevent step output failures for device
control blocks with Override/Interlocks asserted or in Operator MODEATTR

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Output Command - OPCMD

Honeywell

Output command parameters OPCMD[0..2] on the device control block can


be commanded directly from an SCM.
Pros
SCM writes to a flag (logic associated with the device control block)
Commanding a device with an active interlock will not cause an SCM failure
Commanding a device in operator MODEATTR will not cause a failure

Cons

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Common Device CM Configuration

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

25

Requires logic associated with the device control block (see next slide)
Action upon transition to Program or interlock clear will not always be apparent
and may be confusing for operators:
Device will return to the last requested state on interlock clear
The last requested state will be executed when the device control block
MODEATTR is set to Program

Honeywell

Additional Code Examples


11_AC12.PIDA.SP:=SCM_D100 .RECTARGET[3]
MESSAGES.XFERB.SENDFL[3] := 1
11_PC15.PIDA.SP := (1050.0 - (11_PC15.PIDA.PVEUHI 11_PC15.PIDA.PVEULO) * (FLAGS.FLOW.PV/100.0)) +
11_PC15.PIDA.PVEULO
11_PC15.PIDA.SP:=(SCM_D100.RECTARGET[2]+700)
CM456.PIDA.SP := (CM456.SPREC1FLAG.PVFL) ?
SCM457.RECTARGET[1] : NOP

If / Then
No Operation
(do nothing)

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

35

Honeywell

SCM State Change Diagram


INACTIVE

RESUME

(1st State After Download)


ACTIVE

IDLE

RESET

START

RESET

RUNNING

ABORT

RESET

COMPLETE
INTERRUPT

INTERRUPTING

INACTIVE

STOP

STOPPED
RESET

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

HOLD

VALIDATED

ABORTED

RESTART

HOLD
STOP

ABORT

HELD

ABORT

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Summary

Honeywell

A Sequential Control Module (SCM):

Commands regulatory and discrete function blocks contained within Control


Modules in a defined order to accomplish higher-level tasks.
Begins with an Invoke Transition
Can have multiple endings
Generally have alternating Transitions and Steps, if more than 16
outputs/actions are required, then Step to Step block connection is valid
Contains:
Transition function blocks that evaluate, if the Sequential Control Module
is ready to advance to the next step

Can have min and max wait times added to steps. Remember, wait times
are in execution cycles of the SCM itself and NOT in minutes or seconds.

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Describe the Configuration of Sequential Control Modules (SCMs)

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe the Configuration of SCMs


4/13/2012

25

Step function blocks that perform actions and send output commands to
Control Module function blocks

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Contents

25

Configure a Sequential Control Module.................................................................................................3

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Configure a Sequential Control Module


Objectives

Create an SCM

Configure SCM components

Download an SCM to the controller

Monitor an SCM online

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server with Configuration Studio installed

Debutanizer_123.htm graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check
the control strategy.)

Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet open

All the previously built points loaded and active


25

Introduction
The requirement is to pressurize the Debutanizer T100 tower at startup prior to starting the feed.
The fans of the heat exchanger are started and the feed begun.

Open HC44, PC15, and PC16, and back pressure the debutanizer (PI14) with natural gas
imported from the compressor interstage drum.

When the tower is pressurized, the following steps are completed:


1. Set bypass HC44 valve to 20 percent
2. Set PC15 at 1240 kPag and PC16 at 1170 kPag in automatic
3. Send the following message to the Operator:
Pressure stabilization SCM complete

4/13/2012

A CM named FLAGS needs to be built to facilitate the operation of the SCM. The following
CMs and SCMs will be built in this lab:
NAME

Action to be taken

CM > FLAGS

Configure 3 Flag blocks and one


Message block to facilitate the SCM
operation.

SCM > SCM_Pressure

Configure step sequences, to operate


11_HC44, 11_PC15 and 11_PC16 to
pressurize the T-100 tower, before
starting the feed.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Perform the following steps in Control Builder.


Create a SCM

Step
1

Action
Build a new CM named FLAGS and assign it to your CEE.
Drag a Control Module from the Library tab to the CEE in the Project tab.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
2

Action
Enter FLAGS in the Destination field as shown below.

25

Click Finish.

Find the Flags CM in the Project tree and double-click it to open in chart
view.
Double-click anywhere on the blank background to open the CM
properties.
On the Main tab, enter the information as follows:
Name:

FLAGS

Item Name:

FLAGS_Item

Parent Asset

C11

Leave all other entries as default.


Click OK.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
4

Action
Add a Flag function block to this CM.
Expand the Utility block in the Library tree window, and select the FLAG block,
as shown below.

Drag the FLAG block to the FLAGS chart window, which is open.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
5

Action
Double-click the FLAGA block to open the configuration form.

Enter the details in the Main tab, as follows:


Name:

Description:

Press Stabilization

Click OK.
Repeat the previous steps to add two additional Flag function blocks, as
follows:
Name

4/13/2012

25

Description

FLW & Bottom Heat

Debutane S/D start Flag

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
7

Action
Configure a Message Block.
A MESSAGE block provides up to 16 user-configurable messages
(MESSAGE[n]) that can be triggered by a client of the block. Here "n"
is the message number. A client can see the output from a Step block
in a Sequential Control Module, logic, or a manual command
Click the MESSAGE block in the Utility group.
Drag the Message function block to the open chart window.

A Message function block is shown below.

When a trigger is sent to the flag (SENDFL[n]) input, the


corresponding message (MESSAGE[n]) is sent to the Message and
Event Summary displays in Station

For example, when the SCM triggers the SENDFL[0] pin, then
Message[0] is sent to the Message and Event Summary in Station

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
8

Action
Double-click the Message block to open the configuration form.
Enter MESSAGEA in the Name field.

Select INFO from the first (0) Message Type drop-down list.

25

Type Pressure Stabilization SCM Complete in the Message Text list.


Select INFO from the #1Message Type drop-down list.
Type SCM in ABORT State in the Message Text list.
Click OK to close the Message function block.

ATTENTION
Message #1 is needed in the next SCM SCM_Presure.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
10

Action
Save and close the Flags CM.

11

There is no need to wire any block since they are operated using
SCM commands

Right-click Flags CM in the Project window and select the Load option.
The Load dialog box appears.

12

Select the Automatically change ...after load is completed option.


Click OK.
This loads and changes the CM to ACTIVE

10

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
13

Action
Configure an SCM for the Debutanizer Tower Top Pressure Stabilization.
Open Control Builder and select:

25

File > New > Sequential Control Module

The following chart view of the SCM opens

NOTE: Control Builder names The SCM sequentially, by default.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
14

Action
Double-click a blank area within the SCM chart window to open the
configuration parameters window.
Enter the following details on the Main tab:
Name:
SCM_Pressure
Item Name: SCM_Pressure_Item
Description: Pressure on T-100
Engr Units: KPAG
Parent Asset C11
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
Click OK.

ATTENTION
For additional field information, use the <F1> key to
access context sensitive help.

15

Save and close the SCM.

16

The SCM named SCM_Pressure appears under the unassigned modules in


the tree view of the Project tab.

17

Assign the SCM to CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).


SCM_Pressure now appears under CEESCEFB61(or SIM_CEEC300) in
the Project tab

12

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
18

Action
Double-click SCM_Pressure to open the project chart window.
B
C
D
A
NOTE:

19

25

By default, the Main Handler (A) and the Invoke Transition (B) are added
to the SCM chart, as shown
Each transition has three primary logic gates (C) and one secondary logic
gate (D)
The SCM waits at a transition until the logic in that transition becomes true
(=1). (Logic can be a combination of primary and secondary gates.)
Once the transition is true, the SCM continues to execute
10 conditions can be placed in one transition
Conditions are logically connected using the three primary logic gates and
one secondary gate
An SCM remains in the idle state until it receives a manual START
command or the Invoke Main transition becomes true. After that, the
SCM changes to the running state

Add a Transition condition.


Click the Add Button.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
20

Action
Double-click the Transition Condition to open the transition configuration
form.
Enter the following details in the Main tab.

21

Name:

Start

Description:

Start Condition

Select Cond. #1 Tab.


Enter Start in the description field.

14

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
22

Action
The next few steps will add a logical expression for the condition. When the
expression is true, it will cause the SCM to begin execution automatically. The
expression will be true when Flag C (of the Flags CM) is ON.

25

Click the Points Button to browse for Control Modules to use in the expression
field.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
23

Action
Select the FLAGS C entry from the Point Selection list.
Select PVFL in the Parameters of FLAGS.C list box.
Click the OK button.

ATTENTION
This condition is in the invoke transition (the first
Transition). When this condition becomes TRUE
(Flags.C.PVFL = 1), the SCM will start executing
automatically.

16

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
24

Action
The point parameter FLAGS.C.PVFL is now in the expression field, as
indicated below.

25

Click the = sign and then type 1 that is the entered condition is
FLAGS.C.PVFL = 1

ATTENTION
You can use the Expression Builder Buttons to build
expressions.
You can also enter Expressions through the keyboard.
This first Expression is placed in the first primary gate
(GATEP1), by default.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
25

Action
Click the Gates tab to specify a gate for the condition.
Select CONNECT from the Primary Gate (P1) Type drop-down list.
Select CONNECT from the Secondary Gate (S) Type drop-down list.
Click OK.

The Transition Condition displays in the Expression view, as shown

ATTENTION
All transition conditions appear in two views in the
SCM:
1. The Description view: Displays descriptions
entered in the Configuration form
2. The Expression view: Displays expressions
entered in the Configuration form

18

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
26

Action
To open the Description view.
Right-click the Transition.
Select SCM Transition Object > Toggle Description/Expression

25

The Transition condition will display in the Description view, as shown.

27

Or, you can click once on the top line

Information regarding SCM steps:


A Step contains one or more executable output statements. Up to 16
outputs can be part of a single step
If the step block is too close to the surrounding blocks, Control Builder
does not permit you to enter more outputs in the step. To ensure that
you can enter all the output statements, add outputs before adding the
next transition
Step outputs appear in two views similar to the Transition Condition:
1. The Description View
2. The Output View
You can change between the two by clicking the Step heading

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step

Action

28

Drag a Step block from the SCM library to your SCM chart window.

29

Double-click the Transition End arrow (your pointer turns to a + sign) and
then move the cursor to the starting line of the Step and click.
This physically connects the transition and the step, as shown below

20

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
30

Action
Double-click the step to open the Step Parameter configuration form.
Enter the following data on the Main tab:
Name:

Step1

Description:

Build Pressure in tower

Enforce Order Option:

AllOutputs

25

Keep all other parameters as default.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step

Action

31

Click OK.

32

Click the ADD button to add step output 1.

33

Double-click the blank STEP 1.


Enter the following information:
Description
HC44 Modeattr = program
Output Expression:
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODEATTR := 2

ATTENTION
You can use the Points selection list for creating
output expressions or enter the expression through the
keyboard.
Click OK.

22

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
34

Action
Click the Add button again to add Output Expression 2.
Double-click the step to open the configuration form and enter the details
below:
Description:
Expression:

HC44 Mode = Man


11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODE:= 0

25

Click OK.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step

Action

35

Repeat step 33 to add the following output expressions 3 through 12 according


to the configuration details displayed below for each new step.

36

24

No.

Description

Expression

Open HC44

11_HC44.AUTOMANA.OP := 100.0

HC44 Mode Attribute in


Operator

11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODEATTR := 1

PC15 Mode attribute in


Program

11_PC15.PIDA.MODEATTR := 2

PC15 Mode = manual

11_PC15.PIDA.MODE := 0

PC15 valve open

11_PC15.PIDA.OP := 100.0

PC15 Mode attribute in


Operator

11_PC15.PIDA.MODEATTR := 1

PC16 Mode attribute in


Program

11_PC16.PIDA.MODEATTR := 2

10

PC16 Mode = manual

11_PC16.PIDA.MODE:= 0

11

PC16 valve open

11_PC16.PIDA.OP := 100.0

12

PC16 Mode attribute in


Operator

11_PC16.PIDA.MODEATTR := 1

The Expression/Step Outputs view appears once you finish entering the
information.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
37

Action
Click the top Step header to view the Description.

25

Click again to toggle between the Expression and Description views. This
way, operators can quickly access either view

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
38

Action
Add Transition number 2.
Select the SCM group in the Library view and drag a transition to the
SCM_Pressure chart view.
Connect Step 1 to TransitionA.
Click ADD to add a condition.
Enter the details of the Transition2 block, as shown below.

Double-click the blank Transition 1 and enter the details as described below.
Main Tab
Name:
Transition2
Description:
PC15 >= 49.0 Kpag
Cond#1 Tab
Description:
Expression:

Tower Top PC15 GT 49.0


11_PC15.PIDA.PV >= 49.0

Gates Tab
Primary Gate (P1):
Secondary Gate (S):

CONNECT
CONNECT

Click OK.
39

Add Step2 (by dragging a step block from the Library view.)
Connect TRANSITION2 to STEP2.
Wire the step to the previous transition.
Configure STEP2 with details given below.
Main Tab
Name:
Description:

26

STEP2
Stabilize Pressure in twr

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module
Step
40

Action
Add outputs as necessary and enter the following step output expressions:
No.

Description

Expression

HC44 Mode attribute in


Program

11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODEATTR := 2

HC44 Mode = Man

11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODE := 0

HC44 set to 20

11_HC44.AUTOMANA.OP := 20.0

HC44 Mode attribute in


Operator

11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODEATTR := 1

PC15 Mode attribute in


Program

11_PC15.PIDA.MODEATTR := 2

PC15 Mode = Auto

11_PC15.PIDA.MODE := 1

PC15 SP = 1240

11_PC15.PIDA.SP := 1240.0

PC15 Mode attribute in


Operator

11_PC15.PIDA.MODEATTR := 1

PC16 Mode attribute in


Program

11_PC16.PIDA.MODEATTR := 2

10

PC16 Mode = Auto

11_PC16.PIDA.MODE:= 1

11

PC 16 SP = 1170

11_PC16.PIDA.SP := 1170.0

12

PC16 Mode attribute in


Operator

11_PC16.PIDA.MODEATTR := 1

13

Send SCM Completed


Message

FLAGS.MESSAGEA.SENDFL[0] :=1

25

STEP2 after completion is shown below.

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
41

Action
Save and close the SCM project chart window.
The SCM appears in the Project window with this symbol
This symbol indicates that this SCM has not yet been downloaded to the
controller

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step

Right-click the SCM and select Load.

25

42

Action

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
43

Action
Click Continue and OK.

The SCM is downloaded to the controller as well as to the Server


database
44

30

Click the Monitoring tab and select SCM_Pressure.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
45

Action
Activate this SCM by right-clicking and selecting Activate > Selected Item(s).

25

Click Yes at the change state confirmation window.

The color of the SCM changes from blue to green indicating the Active
state. Now if the Invoke Transition condition becomes true, the SCM
will start to execute.

4/13/2012

46

Before starting to test your SCM, verify that all points are active and the
simulation spreadsheet is running.

47

Navigate to Station and recall (or refresh) the Debutanizer_123 display.


Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

31

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
48

Action
On the Debutanizer123 graphic, find the following items and change the Start
SCM pressure flag to ON (this sets Flag.C.PVFL = 1). This causes the SCMs
invoke transition to be true and will automatically start SCM_Pressure.

View the SCM in chart view in the Monitoring tab of Control Builder
Transition1 changes to blue when satisfied

32

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
49

Action
On the Debutanizer_123 graphic -- note the status of HC44

11_PC15
The PV of PC15 is controlling toward the SP (1240)

25

11_PC16
The PV of PC16 is controlling toward the SP (1170)

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

33

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
50

34

Action
Click the SP value of 11_PC16 in the Debutanizer_123 to open the faceplate,
as shown below.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step

Similarly click 11_PC15 to open that faceplate.

25

51

Action

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

35

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step

Action
Open the Monitoring view of the SCM chart. The toolbar has a combo box
giving zooming facility, select 50%
The SCM is complete and all steps and transitions are blue

The SCM COMPLETE status is shown on the title bar, as illustrated


below

36

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
52

Action
The Message tab in the Status line of Station starts flashing green.

Click the Message Field to open the Message Summary window.

Acknowledge the message.


53

54

Turn off the Start SCM pressure flag. This will turn off the flag that triggers
SCM_Pressure.

In the Monitoring tab, open the SCM.

25

Double-click in a blank area.


Click the Status tab.
Change the Command to Reset (which takes the SCM State to Idle).

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

37

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use


Configure a Sequential Control Module

This page was intentionally left blank.

38

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Identify SCM Programming Techniques

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson you will learn to add functionality to Sequential Control


Modules (SCMs)
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to describe the purpose
and operation of:
Branching and looping functionality
Parallel execution functionality
Exception handlers

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Topics

Honeywell

SCM Branching and Looping

SCM Parallel Execution

SCM Exception Handlers

SCM Retry Option

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Sequential Control Modules Branching

Honeywell

Example of SCM Branching


Alternate paths.
Only one executes.
If multiple transitions
are true, the leftmost
executes

NEXTCOMP
PINS

STEP
(1)

TRANSITION A

(2)

(3)

TRANSITION B

TRANSITION C

STEP
Up to 10 branches can
be added to a step.

TRANSITION

STEP
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Sequential Control Modules - Looping

Honeywell
Example of SCM Looping

Recommended
End with a Transition then loop back
into a Step/Phase

STEP

Not recommended
Loop from Step/Phase back to always
true transition
Loop back to the default invoke transition
Loop from a parallel section to non
parallel section
Loop from a non-parallel section to a
parallel section

TRANSITION

TRANSITION

STEP
TRANSITION

A Phase block is available


in an RCM, but not in an SCM.
RCMs are beyond the scope
of this class.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: SCM Branching


At which SCM function block
does branching occur?
A) Handler
B) Step
C) Synchronization
D) Transition

Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! Branching
Branchingoccurs
occursat
ataastep.
step.
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Submit

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Clear

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

STEP

Topics

Honeywell

SCM Branching and Looping


SCM Parallel Execution

SCM Exception Handlers


SCM Retry Option

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Parallel Step Execution

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

TRANSITION
TRANSITION

NEXTCOMP
PINS

SYNC
STEP

Parallel paths.
All paths execute.

STEP

STEP
TRANSITION

TRANSITION
STEP
STEP

STEP
TRANSITION
SYNC

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Synchronization Block

Honeywell
A synchronization (sync) block
begins and ends a parallel step
execution.

TRANSITION

The end synchronization block:

SYNC

STEP

Monitors the execution status of


each parallel path

STEP

TRANSITION

TRANSITION

STEP

STEP

Terminates the thread when the


execution of the path completes
Starts one or several new threads
when all the preceding parallel
paths complete execution

SYNC

Synchronization Block

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

TRANSITION

A synchronization block can have


a maximum of 10 threads.

SYNC

Nested synchronization blocks are


permitted.
Nested levels are limited to 9 due
to the limit of 10 threads per
synchronization block.

STEP

STEP

TRANSITION

TRANSITION

STEP

STEP

SYNC

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

When Sync is followed by


Transitions, ALL must be true
before execution of any path
begins execution
When Sync is followed by Steps,
each path executes independently
(until the end Sync)

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

26

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell

Question 2: Parallel Step Execution


Parallel step execution begins with which of the following blocks?
A) Handler

HANDLER

B) Step
STEP

C) Synchronization
D) Transition

SYNC
TRANSITION

Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
Parallel
Parallelstep
stepexecution
executionbegins
beginswith
withaa
You must Synchronization
answer the question
before
block.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Topics

Clear

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

SCM Branching and Looping


SCM Parallel Execution
SCM Exception Handlers

SCM Retry Option

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Sequential Control Modules - Exception Handlers

Honeywell

Exception handlers are transitions and steps that run only after specified
conditions have been met
An SCM can have multiple handlers but only one handler of each type
may be active at any given time
Handler types, in priority order, are:
Abort
Stop
Hold

Handler priority

Restart
Interrupt
Check
Main

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

13

Sequential Control Modules - Exception Handlers

Honeywell

Handlers can be classified into three categories:


Internal (Null, Edit)
Normal (Main, Check, Interrupt)
Abnormal (Restart, Stop, Hold, Abort)

CHECK
This drawing does
not show all
possible paths

MAIN
HOLD

STOP

RESTART

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

INTERRUPT

ABORT

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Interrupt Handler

Honeywell

Interrupts the activity of the main handler, acting like a subroutine of the
main handler
When it completes, the program activity returns to the last step in the
main handler that had the Update Restart Address option ON
Used for normal process handling
Example: Making tomato soup
tomatoes have an unknown cook time
due to variations in water content
Interrupt trigger condition - viscosity < 55
Handler - heat till viscosity > 60
HOLD
This drawing does
not show all
possible paths

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

CHECK

Interrupt

MAIN
STOP

RESTART

ABORT

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Hold and Restart Handlers

The hold handler preempts the activity of the main and/or interrupt
handlers.
The stop and abort handlers can preempt the hold handler.
From the hold handler you can go to the restart, stop, or abort handler.

The restart handler can only be initiated from the held state.
It returns the activity to the main/interrupt handler at the last step with the
Update Restart Address checked.
CHECK
MAIN

Hold
Restart

STOP
INTERRUPT

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Used for an abnormal process condition


Example: Loss of steam
Hold trigger condition - wax temperature < 120
Handler pump tank contents to preheat tank
Restart preheat tank temperature > 125
This drawing does
not show all
possible paths
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Restart Address

Program execution will begin at the last checked Update


Restart Address (step) when returning from a interrupt or
hold/restart handler call.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Abort Handler

Preempts the activity of the main, interrupt, restart, hold, or stop handlers
Cannot be preempted
From the abort handler, you can only return to the check handler.

Used for an abnormal process condition


Example: milk overheated
Abort trigger condition milk temperature > 198
Handler dump tanks to waste

CHECK

This drawing does


not show all
possible paths

MAIN

HOLD

STOP

Abort

RESTART
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

INTERRUPT

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Stop Handler

Honeywell

Preempts the activity of the main/interrupt, restart, or hold handler


Abort handler can preempt the stop handler.
From the stop handler, you can go automatically to the abort or check
handler or by command to the hold handler.

This drawing does


not show all
possible paths

CHECK
MAIN

HOLD

INTERRUPT

Stop

RESTART

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

ABORT

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Check Handler

The SCM executes the check handler just before entering the IDLE
state.
On initial entry to the SCM, the check handler is executed as soon as
the SCM is activated.
The SCM also returns to the check handler after a RESET command or
when the conditions for the check handler are met after the stop handler,
main handler, or abort handler is completed.
A configured check handler can be used to initialize process equipment
and/or reset values for a new activity.
Check
Example:
Reset totalizers, historize values, etc.
MAIN
INTERRUPT

This drawing does


not show all
possible paths

HOLD

STOP

RESTART

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

ABORT

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 3: Exception Handlers


All of these are abnormal handlers except:
A) Abort
B) Hold

CHECK

C) Stop

MAIN

D) Main

HOLD

INTERRUPT

STOP

RESTART

ABORT

Incorrect.
Correct!
All
Allare
areabnormal
abnormalhandlers
handlers
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
except "Main".
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Topics

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

SCM Branching and Looping


SCM Parallel Execution
SCM Exception Handlers
SCM Retry Option

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Clear

Honeywell

Retry Option
Starting in R400, a new
configuration option has been
added: Retry Option
Specifies the number of retries
a step block will perform for a
failed step output
Available on the main tab of
the SCM/RCM
Cannot be changed in
monitoring
RetryN N defines number of
retries for a failed output
Default Performs endless retries

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

23

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Affect Of RETRYOPT In Various Operational Scenarios

Honeywell

Operational Scenario /
RETRYOPT

Default

Retry0

Impact of output errors on


normal execution
(MODE=AUTO)

Step never
completes as long as
at least one output
has an error

Step completes
immediately after all
outputs are processed
one time, regardless of
their success.

Step completes after N failed retries or after


success , whichever comes first.

Automatic recovery of
output and step if Retries
have not Expired

Step will always


recover automatically
if the condition
causing the output
store error has been
corrected (e.g.
destination had
wrong MODEATTR
and MODEATTR
was changed to
PROGRAM )

Not applicable

Step will recover automatically if the condition


causing the output store error has been
corrected (e.g. destination had wrong
MODEATTR and MODEATTR was changed
to PROGRAM ) , while retries have not
expired.

Operator can bypass


the output. This will
cause the step to
complete ( if no other
errors are present ).

Not required. Bypassing


will have no effect.

Automatic recovery of
output and step if Retries
have expired

How can an operator


work around failed
outputs
(MODE=AUTO)

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

RetryN ( N > 0 )

Step will not automatically recover from errors

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Bypassing the outputs is possible as long as


the Retries of the outputs are not expired.

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Summary

Honeywell

Functionality you may add to an SCM includes:


which occurs at a step and allows the SCM to take different
Branching,
paths based on the first true transition found
step execution, which begins and ends with a synchronization (sync)
Parallel
block
The end synchronization block starts one or several new threads
When all the preceding parallel paths complete execution.
handlers, which are transitions and steps that run only after
Exception
specified conditions have been met
supports a Retry Option, wherein a SCM will retry for specified number
SCM
of times before declaring a particular Step output / Step as failed

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion

Identify SCM Programming Techniques

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Identify SCM Programming Techniques


4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Explain the Operation of SCMs

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
In this lesson you will learn about the
operation of SCMs.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you
will be able to:
Describe the recipe and history data
that can be stored for an SCM
Explain the process an SCM follows
when it is activated
Describe the operation of an SCM as it
appears in the station chart tab
Identify the SCM execution modes
Identify the SCM event options

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
SCM Recipes and History
SCM Activation and Operation
SCM Modes and Event Options
SCM Force and Bypass operations

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - Recipes


A maximum of 50 recipe values can be stored for an SCM
Recipe data can include:
Descriptors
SP, PV access locks
Scaling options
High and low limits
Default values
Display and print options

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

26

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - History

A maximum of 50 history parameter values can be stored for an SCM.


Process data can be collected and stored during SCM operation.
History data will include:
Parameter descriptor
Parameter types
Parameter value

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 1: SCM Recipes and History


Process data can be collected and
stored during SCM operation:
A) Using a maximum of 50
history parameters
B) Using a maximum of 500
parameters
C) To send information to the
SCM prior to execution
D) To upload recipe values
when an SCM runs to
completion
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Yes!
No.
Process
data
data can
can
be
collected
collected
and
and
YouProcess
must answer
thebe
question
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
stored during
SCM
operation
using
a
continuing
maximum of 50 history parameters.
Click anywhere to continue.

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Clear

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Topics
SCM Recipes and History

SCM Activation and Operation


SCM Modes and Event Options
SCM Force and Bypass operations

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

33

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - SCM Activation


INACTIVE

RESUME

(1st State After Download)


ACTIVE

IDLE

RESET

START

RESET

RUNNING

ABORT

RESET

COMPLETE
INTERRUPT

INTERRUPTING

INACTIVE

STOP

STOPPED
RESET

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation


Explain the Operation of SCMs

HOLD

VALIDATED

ABORTED

RESTART

HOLD
STOP

ABORT

HELD

ABORT

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

EXP2001R400
Explain the Operation
- EPKS CEE
of SCMs
R400
4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Sequential Control Modules - Chart Visualization

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Sequential Control Modules - Chart Visualization

Honeywell

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Transition Blocks
Entity

Representation

Color

Description

Transition
Condition

White

False Condition

Transition
Condition

Green

True Condition

Transition
Condition

Red

Communication
Error

Transition Block

Grey

Execution pending

Transition Block

Green

Under Execution

Transition Block

Blue

Successfully
executed

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Sequential Control Modules - Chart Visualization

Honeywell

Step Blocks
Representation

Step Output
Step Output
Step Output
Step Output
Step Block
Step Block

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Color

Description

Green

Under Execution

Blue

Successfully
Executed

Red

Communication
Error

Yellow

Out of Range
Operation

Green

Under Execution

Dark Green

Successfully
Executed

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 2: SCM Activation and Operation


Which statement is false? When
operating an SCM, you must always:
A) Reset to return to Idle
B) Return to Idle before Inactive
C) Invoke an exception handler
from Running

Incorrect.
Correct!
The
Thefalse
false
statementisis""When
When
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:statement
operating an SCM, you must always invoke
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
didexception
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
an
handler
from
running".
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Clear

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

26

Entity

Honeywell

Topics
SCM Recipes and History
SCM Activation and Operation

SCM Modes and Event Options


SCM Force and Bypass operations

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Sequential Control Modules - Modes

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Execution Modes
Automatic
Run to Complete, with normal interventions
Semi-automatic
Pause after each step, wait for Resume command
and execute the next step
Obeys Transitions
Single step
Pause after each step, wait for Resume command
and execute the selected Target Step(s)
Ignores Transitions
Safe step
Like Single step, but allows jumping only to predefined areas
Manual Mode stops SCM execution
Normal Mode used with operator or GUS keyboard NORM
key to go to an SCMs configured execution mode

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Modules - Event Options


SCM Alarm and Event tab:

Step Alarm and Event tab:

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

41

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Question 3: SCM Modes


Which mode pauses the SCM after each step,
waits for the resume command and, upon resuming,
completes the next step?
A) Automatic
B) Normal
D) Semi-Automatic
C) Single Step

Incorrect. The 'Semi-Automatic'


'Semi-automatic' mode pauses the
Incorrect.
The 'Semi-Automatic'
mode pauses the
The
Your
correct
answer:
is:
SCM
after answer
the completion
of each step and waits
SCM
after
the
completion
of eachbefore
step and waits
Correct
You
must
answer
the
question
for
the
resume
command,
upon
resuming,
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
for
the
resume
continuing
completes
the next step.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

42

21

Clear

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell

Topics
SCM Recipes and History
SCM Activation and Operation
SCM Modes and Event Options

SCM Force and Bypass operations

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

43

SCM Transition Condition Force Requests

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

A condition in the SCM transition block can be forced to On or Off, if the


Force Permit flag is ON
SCM Transition condition Force Permit is used
To override a false condition, or
To stop SCM execution when the invoke transition is always true and the
SCM is designed in a continually executing loop

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

44

22

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

SCM Transition Force

To force a condition, first Enable the


Force Permit checkbox

Then select an option from


the drop down list:
ToOff : Force to turn OFF
ToOn : Force to turn ON
None : No Force

* Allowed online
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

45

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Transition Force Request Status

Transition condition Force Request state is reflected on that specific


Conditions properties form
Execution Status of that condition can be viewed while the SCM is executing

Force
Request set

Execution Status
shows Bypass

Indicates Force State


1 If Forced to turn ON
0 If Forced to turn OFF
- If not Forced

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

46

23

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell

SCM Execution Status Bypass

SCM Execution Status indicates Bypass if any condition of any transition


is forced (ToOn, or ToOff)

Invoke

Step

Forced

Trans

Step

Trans

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

47

Honeywell

Bypass Cancel Option

Bypass Cancel Option on SCM Main tab can cancel or clear Transition
Force permit/Force Request conditions
Applies to all transitions of all handlers contained in SCM
Can be changed while the SCM is executing

Select the appropriate Bypass Cancel


Option:
None - Bypassed/forced Transition
Conditions are not canceled/cleared
OnSCMReset - Bypassed/forced Transition
Conditions are canceled/cleared on SCM
Reset command
OnTransEnd - Bypassed/forced Transition
Conditions are canceled/cleared when the
Transition evaluation finishes (Transition
changed from Enabled to Disabled state)

* Allowed online
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

48

24

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

SCM Step Output Force Request

Unlike SCM Transition conditions, the SCM STEP Output expressions


cannot be Forced to On or Off
SCM Step Output can be Skipped

Select Skip to
bypass the
execution of STEP
condition

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

49

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

SCM Step Force Request Skip

If the Step Output processing cannot complete, then using the Force
Request:
Will let the Step proceed, as if the Output completed immediately and
successfully
This is most useful for allowing Steps with failed Outputs to proceed
Invoke

Step

Trans

Step
Skip

Output # 1
Output # 2
Output # 3

Trans

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

50

25

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell

Enforce Sequential Order

Enforce Order Option is configured to enforce how the STEP output


execution order would occur in a Sequential Control Module
When enforced, the required order is from Output #1, #2 up to Output #N

Possible values for the Enforce Order Option are:


None
CnfmInstrs
AllOutputs

Outputs are always started in the order specified, even if Enforce Order
Option is set to None
Using AllOutputs may slow down step execution significantly if the
destination parameters are not in the same controller (for example, peer
controllers or OPC references)

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

51

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Enforce Order Option None

All Step output expressions are started in the same cycle, in the order
specified
Different delays may lead to a different effective order

Delay times of all outputs


will begin at the same
time.

Confirmable Instructions can be acknowledged randomly in any order


Step execution will complete only after all Confirmable Instructions are
acknowledged

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

52

26

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Enforce Order Option CnfmInstrs

Honeywell

If CnfmInstrs is selected, the order of Confirmable Instructions is


enforced
All outputs are started at the same time

All Output expressions are processed and executed


Output expressions with Confirmable Instructions must be acknowledged in
a sequential order
Delay times of all nonconfirmable outputs
will begin at the same
time.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

53

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Enforce Order Option AllOutputs

Order of all Outputs is enforced; an output is executed only after the


previous output has completed execution including all delays and
instruction confirmations
Step active time cannot be smaller than the total sum of all output delays

Delay time of each step


output does not begin
until the previous output
completes.

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

54

27

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

26

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell

Enable Step-level Confirmation of Instructions


Specifies whether a Step-level confirmation of all Confirmable
Instructions is enabled for the Step

Step-level confirmation is possible only when this option is selected and


when the Enforce Sequential Order option is not equal to AllOutputs

With CnfmInstrs selected

With None selected

In this case, the checkbox


will have to be checked
three times once for each
confirmable instruction.

In this case, the


checkbox will only
have to be
checked once.

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

55

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Summary
An SCM:

Can contain up to 50:


Sets of recipe parameters, such as descriptors and SP and PV access
locks, which are accessible from the SCM detail display once the SCM is
active.
History parameters including parameter descriptors, types and values
that are collected and stored during SCM operation.

Status is indicated using state descriptors such as inactive, idle, running and
stopped for which specific paths must be followed.

Can be viewed and operated from the station chart tab which shows the
status of transitions and steps using colors such as blue which indicates a
transition is complete.

Has modes of operation that include automatic, semi-automatic, single step,


manual and normal.

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

56

28

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Lab Examples 1 of 7
Configure a Sequential Control Module (SCM)

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

57

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Lab Examples 2 of 7
Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

58

29

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

26

Honeywell

Lab Examples 3 of 7
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

59

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Lab Examples 4 of 7
Configure SCM Abort Sequence

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

60

30

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Lab Examples 5 of 7
Use a Step to Start another SCM

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

61

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Lab Examples 6 of 7
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow

VALVE_CHECK

CIRCULATE2

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

62

31

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

26

Honeywell

Lab Examples 7 of 7
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox

VALVE_CHECK

CIRCULATE2

PROCESS

RUN_PROCESS

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

63

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Honeywell

Conclusion
Explain the Operation of SCMs

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure a Sequential Control Module - Basic and Configure


Sequential Control Modules - Advanced lab exercises
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

64

32

Explain the Operation of SCMs


4/13/2012

Topic: Sequential Control Module - Lab


Contents
Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control ....................................................................................3
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition ..............................................................................5
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence ....................................................................................................19
Use a Step to Start Another SCM........................................................................................................25
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow ...........................................................................................31

27

Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox ...........................................................................................35

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Lab


Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control

Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control


Objective

Add five flag function blocks and one numeric function block to the existing Flags CM

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server with all required CMs loaded

D_100.htm graphic loaded on the Server. (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)

Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open

Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded

Introduction
In this lab, you will add five flag function blocks and one numeric function block to the existing
FLAGS CM for later use in the SCM program labs.
NOTE: You will be given the following:
Action to be taken

FLAGS

Add five Flag Function Blocks and one Numeric Function Blocks to
the existing Flags CM.

27

BLOCK NAME

4/13/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Sequential Control Module - Lab


Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control

Procedure
Add Function Blocks to FLAGS

Action

Step
1

Open the Chart view of the CM called FLAGS in project window.

Add five Flags and one Numeric to the existing FLAGS CM.
Name the new flags P_START, F_MESSAGE, READY, P_ABORT and
PROCESS.
Name the numeric FLOW.
Save and close FLAGS.
Load and activate FLAGS.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/13/2012

Sequential Control Module - Lab


Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition

Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition


Objective

Configure recipe values for later use in setting minimum flow level

Configure the invoke transition

Configure a step to turn on the Warning message

Use a transition to check the Ready flag

Configure a verify step, for later use, to allow the SCM to take separate paths

Configure a Sync to allow the SCM to follow parallel paths

Check and verify SCM program operation to this point

Prerequisites

Experion PKS Server with all required CMs built and loaded

D_100.htm graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check the control
strategy.)

Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open

Excel Data Exchange open with simulation spread sheet loaded

Previous SCM lab in this section complete, tested, and verified

Introduction
The process described in this lab is totally fictitious and created only to demonstrate SCM features.

Write a sequence that will do a fan switch check.

Write and verify that the SCM will follow either of two routes based on the fan switch
selection</